UV-Vis Instruments

Evolution 200 Series

User Guide

269-251400 Revision A August 2010
© 2010 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. All rights reserved.

Microsoft, Windows, Excel and Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation 

in the United States and/or other countries. DYMO is either a trademark or registered trademark of Sanford 

L.P. in the United States and/or other countries. Teflon and Viton are either trademarks or registered 

trademarks of E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company or its affiliates in the United States and/or other 

countries. Starna is either a trademark or registered trademark of Starna Scientific Limited in the United States 

and/or other countries. Hellma is either a trademark or registered trademark of Hellma GmbH in the United 

States and/or other countries. AccuVac and Hach are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Hach 

Company in the United States and/or other countries. Spectralon is either a trademark or registered trademark 

of Labsphere, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of 

Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. and its subsidiaries.

Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. provides this document to its customers with a product purchase to use in the 

product operation. This document is copyright protected and any reproduction of the whole or any part of this 

document is strictly prohibited, except with the written authorization of Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc.

The contents of this document are subject to change without notice. All technical information in this 

document is for reference purposes only. System configurations and specifications in this document supersede 

all previous information received by the purchaser.

Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. makes no representations that this document is complete, accurate or errorfree and assumes no responsibility and will not be liable for any errors, omissions, damage or loss that might 

result from any use of this document, even if the information in the document is followed properly. 

This document is not part of any sales contract between Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. and a purchaser. This 

document shall in no way govern or modify any Terms and Conditions of Sale, which Terms and Conditions of 

Sale shall govern all conflicting information between the two documents.

For Technical Support, please contact:

Thermo Fisher Scientific

5225 Verona Road

Madison WI 53711-4495 U.S.A.

Telephone: 1 800 532 4752 

E-mail: us.techsupport.analyze@thermofisher.com

World Wide Web: http://www.thermo.com/spectroscopy

For International Support, please contact:

Thermo Fisher Scientific 

Telephone: +1 608 273 5017 

E-mail: support.madison@thermofisher.com

World Wide Web: http://www.thermo.com/spectroscopy
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide iii

C

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

About the Software and Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Setting Up the Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Before Using the Spectrophotometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

About This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Contacting Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

E-mailing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Product Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Warranty Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Items Not Covered by Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Warranty Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Shipping Cost for Items Covered by Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Update Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Site Preparation and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Chapter 2 INSIGHT Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Quant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

The INSIGHT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Navigation Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Task Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Action Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Other Navigation Pane Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Right Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Instrument Status Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Thermo Software IQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Contents
Contents

iv Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Measuring Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Performing a Quantitative Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Quantifying Sample Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Performing a Kinetics Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Performing Kinetics Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Using the Palette Tools and View Finder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Using the Selection Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Using the Spectral Cursor Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Using the Peak/Valley Measurement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Using the Peak Area Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Using the Region-Threshold Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Using the View Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Setting Application Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Quant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Sharing Custom Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Managing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

My Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Math and Analysis Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Smoothing Scan Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Converting Scan Data to Other Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Adding Two Scan Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Normalizing Scan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Averaging Scan Spectra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor . . . . 89

Finding Peaks in Scan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Applications Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Report Master Page Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Preferences Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Data Store Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Formulas and Units Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Alignment Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Calibrations Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Lamp Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

System Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Contents

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide v

Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Chapter 3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Safety Label Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Lifting or Moving the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Operating Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Spectrophotometer Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Spectrophotometer Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Opening and Closing the Sample and Reference Compartment Doors . . 107

Local Control or Computer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

INSIGHT Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Outside Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Inside the Sample Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Removable Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Sample Compartment Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Tubing Access Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Mercury Lamp Access Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Detector Access Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Detector Access Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Corrosion Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Installing Sample Compartment Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Purging the Sample Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Standard Cell Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

10 mm Rectangular Sample Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Rectangular Reference Cell Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Installing a Manual Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Installing a Smart Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Installing a Liquid Thermostatted Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Installing a Reference Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Using the Spectrophotometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Computer Control Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Setting up a Computer Control Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Turning off a Computer Control Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Local Control Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Setting up a Local Control instrument for touchscreen operation. . . . . . . 128

Setting up a Local Control instrument for remote operation . . . . . . . . . . 129

Turning off a Local Control Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Keypad Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Contents

vi Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Cleaning the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Cleaning the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Removing and Installing the Detector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Ordering Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Chapter 4 Life Science Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

About the Life Science Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Nucleic Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Nucleic Acid Concentration Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Unique Screen Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Making Nucleic Acid Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Oligo Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Nucleic Acid Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Dye/Chromophore Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Unique Screen Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Making Nucleic Acid Labels Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Oligo Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Protein A280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Type Tab for Protein A280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Measurement Tab for Protein A280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Instrument Tab for Protein A280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Accessories Tab for Protein A280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Samples Tab for Protein A280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Unique Screen Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Making Protein A280 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Contents

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide vii

Proteins and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Dye/Chromophore Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Type Tab for Proteins and Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Measurement Tab for Proteins and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Instrument Tab for Proteins and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Accessories Tab for Proteins and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Samples Tab for Proteins and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Unique Screen Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Making Proteins and Labels Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Pierce BCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

BCA Kits and Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Type Tab for Pierce BCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Measurement Tab for Pierce BCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Standards Tab for Pierce BCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Instrument Tab for Pierce BCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Accessories Tab for Pierce BCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Samples Tab for Pierce BCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Working With Standard Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Making Pierce BCA Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Protein Bradford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Bradford Reagent Kits and Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Type Tab for Protein Bradford. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Measurement Tab for Protein Bradford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Standards Tab for Protein Bradford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Instrument Tab for Protein Bradford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Accessories Tab for Protein Bradford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Samples Tab for Protein Bradford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Bradford Standard Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Making Protein Bradford Assay Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Contents

viii Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Pierce Modified Lowry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Modified Lowry Kits and Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Type Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Measurement Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Standards Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Instrument Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Accessories Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Samples Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Lowry Standard Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Making Pierce Modified Lowry Assay Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Pierce 660 nm Reagent and Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Type Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Measurement Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Standards Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Instrument Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Accessories Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Samples Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Pierce 660 nm Assay Workbooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Standard Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Making Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Protein Biuret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Type Tab for Protein Biuret. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Measurement Tab for Protein Biuret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Standards Tab for Protein Biuret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Instrument Tab for Protein Biuret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Accessories Tab for Protein Biuret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Samples Tab for Protein Biuret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Standard Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Making Protein Biuret Assay Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Chapter 5 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

8 Degree Near Normal Specular Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

15 Degree Specular Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

20 Degree Specular Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

30 Degree Specular Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

45 Degree Specular Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

60 Degree Specular Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Contents

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide ix

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Installing Complete CVC in the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Loading CVC Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

CVC Test Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Using the CVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Running Performance Verification Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

CVC Test Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Viewing CVC Test Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Routine Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Recertification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Depolarizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Grazing Angle Specular Reflectance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Integrated Fiber Optic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Attaching Cables and Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Routine Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Aligning the Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Integrating Sphere Diffuse Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Mercury Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Installation and Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Contents

x Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

nanoCell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Introduction to Small Volume Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Using the nanoCell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Installing the nanoCell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Loading a sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Cleaning the nanoCell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Storing the nanoCell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Pathlength Correction Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Direct UV Assays for DNA, RNA, Oligonucleotides and Protein 

Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Direct UV Assays for DNA, RNA, Oligonucleotides and Protein 

Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Front and Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Preinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Routine Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Cleaning the Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Filling the Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Acoustic Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Water Level Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Other System Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Contents

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide xi

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Temperature Controller Front and Rear Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Preinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Setting the Target Temperature and Stir Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Using INSIGHT Software to Set Temperature and Stir Speed. . . . . . . . . 322

Using the Peltier Controller to Set Temperature and Stir Speed. . . . . . . . 325

Measuring Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Routine Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Cleaning the Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Probe Handling and Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Routine Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Cleaning Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Rapid Mix Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Reference Cell Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Rectangular Reference Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Cylindrical Reference Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Sample Position Cell Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Cylindrical Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Solid Sample Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Universal Sample Holder Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Contents

xii Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Installing a Smart Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Replacing the Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Calibrating the Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Initializing the Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Cell Changer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Measuring Samples with the Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Routine Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Cleaning the Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

System Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

External Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Temperature Controller Front and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Preinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Calibrating the Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Initializing the Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Setting the Target Temperature and Stir Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Configuring the Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Measuring Samples with the Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Routine Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Cleaning the Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Contents

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide xiii

Smart Rotary Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Installing a Smart Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Replacing the Cell Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Initializing the Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Cell Changer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Measuring Samples with a Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Measuring Standards with a Cell Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Routine Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Cleaning the Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Smart Sipper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Installing Pump Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Installing the Smart Sipper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Installing a Flow Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Routine Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Cleaning the Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Replacing Pump Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Cleaning Flow Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Replacing Flow Cell Tubing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Pump Tubing Chemical Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Pump Tubing Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Pump Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Contents

xiv Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Temperature Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Temperature Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

Configuring a Target Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Displaying a Temperature Status Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Routine Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Cleaning Temperature Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Replacing Stopper O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Variable Angle Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

VERSA Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Fiber Optic Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Fiber Optic Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Installing the VERSA Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Installing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Chapter 6 Performance Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

Overview of PV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

PV Test Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Running PV Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Chapter 7 INSIGHT Security Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457

Signing a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Verifying a Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Access Control and System Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Assigning Signature Meanings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 1

1

Introduction

This document covers INSIGHT software and the Evolution 200 series UV-Visible 

spectrophotometers and accessories.

About the Software and Hardware

Overview

The EvolutionTM 200 series UV-visible spectrophotometers integrate advanced hardware 

features with the power and flexibility of a wide range of Smart AccessoriesTM. The 200 series 

spectrophotometers include:

• Evolution 201

• Evolution 220

• Evolution 260 Bio

For a list of sampling and other accessories available for these instruments, see Accessories.

All instruments include our INSIGHTTM software for data collection and analysis. The 

INSIGHT software provides four modes of operation:

Contents

• About the Software and Hardware

• Contacting Us

• Product Warranty

• Trademarks

• Site Preparation and Safety

Contents

• Overview

• Setting Up the Instrument

• Before Using the Spectrophotometer
1 Introduction

About This Document

2 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

• Fixed, to measure the light passing through the sample at one or more wavelengths.

• Scan, to measure the light that passes through the sample over a range of wavelengths.

• Quant, to set up and perform quantitative analyses of sample data.

• Rate, to make time-based kinetics measurements.

The Evolution 260 Bio systems also have operating modes for the common life science 

applications, including Nucleic Acid and Protein A280. See Life Science Applications for 

more information.

Setting Up the Instrument

The spectrophotometer can be run from the optional touchscreen (Local Control) or from a 

Windows®-compatible computer connected to the instrument (Computer Control). Local 

Control instruments include an embedded computer preloaded with software. Computer 

Control instruments must be connected to an external computer with the proper software 

installed. All instruments include a keypad.

For instructions to set up a Computer Control or Local Control spectrophotometer and 

perform basic operations using the keypad, see Using the Spectrophotometer.

Before Using the Spectrophotometer

The spectrophotometer contains precise optical components. Handle it carefully. Before using 

the system, review the Site Preparation and Safety information and Operating Precautions.

About This Document

Organization

This document has the following main sections:

Contents

• Organization

• Conventions

Section Description

Introduction Overview of the instrument and this document plus 

information about registering your instrument, contacting us, 

and the system warranty.

Evolution 200 Series 

Spectrophotometers

Complete instructions for using and maintaining the 

instrument.
1 Introduction

Contacting Us

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 3

Conventions

This document uses the following conventions:

Contacting Us

For Technical Support, please contact:

Thermo Fisher Scientific

5225 Verona Road

Madison, WI 53711-4495 U.S.A.

Telephone: 1 800 532 4752

E-mail: us.techsupport.analyze@thermofisher.com

World Wide Web: http://www.thermo.com/spectroscopy

INSIGHT Software Complete instructions for using software features other than life 

science applications and Performance Verification (see below).

Life Science Applications Instructions for using life science applications to analyze 

samples.

Accessories Complete instructions for using accessories with the instrument.

Performance Verification Instructions for setting up and running tests to check the 

performance of the instrument.

Section Description

Note Notes contain helpful supplementary information.

NOTICE Follow instructions labeled “NOTICE” to avoid damaging the system hardware 

or losing data.

CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or 

moderate injury.

WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or 

serious injury.
1 Introduction

E-mailing Data Files

4 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

For International Support, please contact:

Thermo Fisher Scientific

Telephone: +1 608 273 5017

E-mail: support.madison@thermofisher.com

World Wide Web: http://www.thermo.com/spectroscopy

E-mailing Data Files

If you have questions about your data, you can send it to us as an archived workbook file 

(*.iwbk). Please send us the appropriate file as an e-mail attachment. See the description of 

E-mail Current Workbook in Menus and the description of E-mail in Data Store Tab for 

more information.

Product Warranty

Warranties herein are for products manufactured by Thermo Fisher Scientific or its authorized 

dealers.

Thermo Fisher Scientific warrants that this product is free from defects in labor and materials 

and shall conform to its product specifications as defined in the product user documentation.

This warranty covers parts (except those specified below) and labor, and applies only to 

equipment which has been installed and operated in accordance with the documentation 

supplied by Thermo Fisher Scientific, and which has been serviced only by authorized 

Thermo Fisher Scientific dealers or service personnel. This warranty does not apply to 

equipment and accessories that have been modified or tampered with in any way, misused, or 

damaged by accident, neglect, or conditions beyond Thermo Fisher Scientific’s control.

Related Topics

Warranty Period

Items Not Covered by Warranty

Warranty Repair

Shipping Cost for Items Covered by Warranty

Update Policy

Note Please have the instrument serial number available when you contact us.

Note Please do not send exported report files or user-defined workbooks—these do not 

contain the information we need.
1 Introduction

Product Warranty

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 5

Warranty Period

With the exception of SPECTRONICTM 20+, SPECTRONIC 20D+, GENESYSTM 20 and the 

HeliosTM Epsilon spectrophotometers, all UV Visible spectrophotometers come with a 

standard warranty that is fourteen months from the date of shipment or twelve months from 

the date of installation (whichever occurs first). The replacement parts and spare components 

are warranted for 90 days from the date of shipment. If such parts are intended for long term 

storage, it is recommended that their functionality is tested immediately upon receipt and any 

problems reported to Thermo Fisher Scientific within the above specified warranty period.

The following warranties apply to instrument light sources:

1. Xenon lamps are warranted against failure for a period of three (3) years.

2. Tungsten and deuterium lamps will be replaced under warranty if they fail on the initial 

power-up or within the first month of operation.

Thermo Fisher Scientific reserves the right to request the return of failed components that are 

being replaced under warranty.

User should complete and return the Product Registration card, and retain proof of delivery 

date.

Items Not Covered by Warranty

This warranty does not apply to glassware, expendable components, peripheral devices or 

accessories not manufactured by Thermo Fisher Scientific. The manufacturer of these 

products may offer specific warranties for such parts and components.

Cleaning and calibration service is not covered by this warranty.

Warranty Repair

In the event of failure within the warranty period, Thermo Fisher Scientific will at Thermo 

Fisher Scientific’s option, repair or replace the product not conforming to this warranty. There 

may be additional charges, including freight, for warranty service performed in some 

countries. For service, call Thermo Fisher Scientific (or its authorized dealer outside the 

United States and Canada). Thermo Fisher Scientific reserves the right to ask for proof of 

delivery date.

Warranty repairs for UV Visible instruments may vary per product line and region. UV 

Visible products manufactured by Thermo Fisher Scientific are covered by a 

“return-to-factory” parts and labor warranty. In some regions, on-site warranties, extended 

warranties and service contracts may be purchased for all products.

In the event that on-site warranty service is required, and no on-site service contract is active 

on this product, the customer is responsible for any travel expenses, labor costs, and additional 

expenses which may be incurred in the performance of on-site warranty service.
1 Introduction

Trademarks

6 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Please contact your dealer or Thermo Fisher Scientific Technical Service department for 

further information. A Return Authorization Number must be obtained from Thermo Fisher 

Scientific Technical Service before returning any product for in-warranty repair or 

replacement.

Shipping Cost for Items Covered by Warranty

It is customer’s responsibility to pay for the shipment of the product under warranty to 

Thermo Fisher Scientific.

This warranty covers return shipment (standard ground) charges for returning the repaired or 

replaced product to the customer.

Update Policy

Thermo Fisher Scientific may, from time to time, revise the performance of its products, and 

in doing so incur no obligation to furnish any such revisions to any Thermo Fisher Scientific 

customer.

THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESSED, IMPLIED, OR 

STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF FITNESS 

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY OR OTHERWISE, and 

states Thermo Fisher Scientific’s entire and exclusive liability and the Customer’s exclusive 

remedy for any claim in connection with the sale or furnishing of services, goods, or parts, 

their design, suitability for use, installation, or operations. Thermo Fisher Scientific will in no 

event be liable for any direct, indirect, special, or consequential damages, whatsoever, 

including loss of goodwill, whether grounded in tort (including negligence), strict liability or 

contract, and Thermo Fisher Scientific’s liability under no circumstances will exceed the 

contract price for the goods and/or services for which liability is claimed. 

REPRESENTATION AND WARRANTIES MADE BY ANY PERSON, INCLUDING 

ITS AUTHORIZED DEALERS, REPRESENTATIVES AND EMPLOYEES OF 

THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC WHICH ALTER OR ARE IN ADDITION TO THE 

TERMS OF THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT BE BINDING UPON THERMO 

FISHER SCIENTIFIC UNLESS IN WRITING AND SIGNED BY ONE OF ITS 

OFFICERS.

Trademarks

Microsoft, Windows, Excel and Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of 

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

DYMO is either a trademark or registered trademark of Sanford L.P. in the United States 

and/or other countries.
1 Introduction

Site Preparation and Safety

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 7

Teflon and Viton are either trademarks or registered trademarks of E. I. du Pont de Nemours 

and Company or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.

Starna is either a trademark or registered trademark of Starna Scientific Limited in the United 

States and/or other countries.

Hellma is either a trademark or registered trademark of Hellma GmbH in the United States 

and/or other countries.

AccuVac and Hach are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Hach Company in the 

United States and/or other countries.

Spectralon is either a trademark or registered trademark of Labsphere, Inc. in the United 

States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. and its subsidiaries.

Site Preparation and Safety

Before using the system, read the site preparation and safety manual on the provided 

documentation CD. Always follow the safety precautions in that manual and in this 

document when using the system.
1 Introduction

Site Preparation and Safety

8 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 9

2

INSIGHT Software

Applications

Fixed

Contents

• Applications

• The INSIGHT Window

• Thermo Software IQ

• Operation

• Options

• System Settings

• Keyboard Shortcuts

Contents

• Fixed

• Scan

• Quant

• Rate

Life Science Applications may also be available.

The Fixed application measures the light passing through 

the sample at one or more wavelengths. To work with this 

application, click Fixed in the right pane in Home.
2 INSIGHT Software

Applications

10 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

The INSIGHT Window

Setting Application Parameters

Measuring Samples

Scan

Related Topics

The INSIGHT Window

Setting Application Parameters

Measuring Samples

Math and Analysis Operations

Quant

Related Topics

Quant

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Rate

Related Topics

The INSIGHT Window

The Scan application measures the light that passes 

through the sample over a range of wavelengths. To work 

with this application, click Scan in the right pane in 

Home.

Use the Quant application to set up and perform 

quantitative analyses of sample data. To work with this 

application, click Quant in the right pane in Home.

Use the Rate application to make time-based kinetics 

measurements. To work with this application, click Rate

in the right pane in Home.
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 11

Setting Application Parameters

Performing a Kinetics Measurement

Measuring Samples

The INSIGHT Window

The INSIGHT window is divided into panes. At the left is the navigation pane, which 

contains task buttons and action buttons for displaying software features and performing 

operations. The right pane provides access to applications, stored data, software settings and 

data acquisition features.

Above the panes is a menu bar that can include features for working with workbooks, 

performing math, analysis and other operations, and getting help. The available features 

depend on the selected application, whether spectral data is displayed, etc.

Y To “right-click” a software feature on a Local Control system

1. Click the feature.

2. Display the keyboard by clicking or .

Click Home in the navigation pane at any time to see 

applications available in the right pane.

To display a keyboard for entering information or for “right-clicking” software 

features (for example, to display a shortcut menu) on a Local Control system, click 

this icon in the lower-left corner of the INSIGHT window. See the procedure below 

for more information.

Alternatively, click this icon on the Windows taskbar. If the taskbar is not visible, click 

the bottom (or other) edge of the Windows desktop to display it. 
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

12 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

3. Click the key indicated below.

Related Topics

Navigation Pane

Right Pane

Menus

Instrument Status Monitors

Navigation Pane

The navigation pane at the left side of the window contains features for the current 

application:

Task Buttons

Action Buttons

Other Navigation Pane Features

Related Topics

Right Pane

Menus

Task Buttons

The main task buttons (present when the software starts) provide access to basic operations:

Click this key

Button Description

Home Gives access to user groups and their applications. (The default is Classic.)

My Data Provides tools for storing and retrieving data and other information.
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 13

Other task buttons may be available for specific applications:

Related Topics

Action Buttons

Other Navigation Pane Features

Action Buttons

These action buttons appear at the top of the navigation pane when appropriate for the 

opened application:

Options Includes features for controlling how users interact with the software.

System Settings Provides features for aligning accessories, calibrating lamps, updating 

firmware and performing other tasks.

If a Local Control instrument is connected to an external computer 

running INSIGHT software, use the Instrument Control options on the 

System tab to select the desired location of instrument control.

Button Description

Measure (current 

application)

Displays data acquisition features for the current application.

Reports Configures reports containing sample data and specifies how to 

print reports.

Oligo Calculator Calculates molecular weight, extinction coefficients, concentration 

factors and melting points for nucleic acid sequences.

Dye/Chrom. Editor For entering and editing new dyes rather than using one of the 

precoded default dyes.

Button Description

Button Description

Starts sample data acquisition, displaying prompts for confirming samples 

information, loading samples, saving data or performing other actions. Available 

only after a blank measurement for some applications. May measure single or 

multiple samples, depending on the application settings.

Measures the baseline for the application.
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

14 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Other action buttons may appear for some tasks.

Related Topics

Task Buttons

Other Navigation Pane Features

Other Navigation Pane Features

Related Topics

Task Buttons

Action Buttons

Right Pane

Measures the blank for the application.

Stops data acquisition.

Prints a copy of the spectrum and associated sample data to the default printer.

Note To start data acquisition automatically after a specified delay instead of responding 

to a prompt, use Enable auto input trigger on the Preferences tab in Options.

Button Description

Feature Description

Overlay spectra Displays multiple spectra as they are acquired (instead of displaying only 

the spectrum being acquired or just acquired). The overlaid sample IDs 

appear in the upper-left corner of the data display. To display the 

spectrum of interest in red, click its sample ID. The last sample measured 

appears in red at the top of the legend.

The right pane in Home includes:
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 15

When the Home screen is not displayed, the right pane is used for application settings, sample 

measurement results, available workbooks, and other features.

Related Topics

Data Display

Working With Labels

Measurement Results

Navigation Pane

Setting Application Parameters

Measuring Samples

Menus

Data Display

Feature Description

Group Select a user group to access its applications (see 

“Application buttons” below). See Applications Tab for 

information on associating applications with user groups.

Application buttons Click a button (for example, Fixed or Quant) to open an 

application. The available applications depend on the 

selected user group (see “Group” above).

Click this button to access instrument performance tests. 

See Performance Verification.

Template list If the list is present, double-click a template to open it 

and the associated application.

For some applications, clicking the Measure task 

button provides a data display in the right pane for 

viewing sample data immediately after acquisition or 

previously acquired data.
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

16 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To view data listed below the data display, select them in the list. To select multiple spectra (or 

sample points), hold down Shift or Ctrl. To display data from multiple samples as they are 

measured, select Overlay spectra in the navigation pane.

The sample IDs appear at the top of the data display, with the selected spectrum (or sample 

points) and sample ID in red. To turn off the sample legend, right-click the data display, point 

to Sample Legend and choose OFF.

The X and Y values of the pointer location appear below the data display.

To enlarge a region, draw a box around it and click inside the box. Alternatively, click (if 

available) to reveal the view finder.

To expand the data display vertically, click .

To change the appearance of the axes or data, right-click an axis and choose Display 

Attributes (if available for the current application). View the effects on the display while 

adjusting the attributes. To change the color of the axes or their labels, click the appropriate 

color box.

The Sample ID readout to the right of the display shows the name of the sample being 

measured (or to be measured). The table below shows the results of analysis operations and 

whether sample points fall within specified control limits.

Right-click the display to access these features (if available for the current data type):

Sample ID

X and Y values of pointer location Click to expand vertically

Click to use 

view finder
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 17

Feature Description

Autoscale Adjusts the vertical scale of each spectrum for optimal viewing. 

Double-clicking the display has the same effect.

Auto Arrange Labels Positions labels for easier reading.

Set Scale For setting minimum and maximum values for the axes. To set 

them automatically, select Autoscale.

Sample Labels Specifies whether to display spectra with annotations (see 

“Annotate” below) and labels, such as those showing absorbance 

values for specific wavelengths.

Sample Legend Specifies whether to display sample IDs near the upper-left corner 

of the pane.

Line Type Specifies whether to display scan spectra using solid lines or 

individual data points.
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

18 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Annotate Provides features for adding annotation to displayed data. (Added 

annotation is displayed only for the selected data.) See Working 

With Labels for information about manipulating added labels. 

Right-click an edge of an added ellipse, rectangle or image to access 

ways to manipulate or delete the object. The availability of features 

depends on the current application.

More:

Attach to Curve displays the X value of the pointer location as a 

label attached to a scan spectrum by a line.

Free Standing Text adds an editable label at the pointer location. 

Its position is not affected by zooming in and out.

Ellipse draws an ellipse. To move it, drag its top edge. To resize it, 

drag a side or bottom edge. Its position, size and shape are affected 

by zooming in and out.

Rectangle draws a rectangle. To move it, drag its top edge. To 

resize it, drag a side or bottom edge or a corner. Its position, size 

and shape are affected by zooming in and out.

Image displays a dialog box for locating and selecting an image to 

add to the display. To move the image, drag its top edge. To resize 

it, drag the bottom edge or a corner. Its position and size are 

affected by zooming in and out.

Floating Image works the same as Image (see above), except the 

image position and size are not affected by zooming.

Tool Value displays the measurement made by the Peak/valley 

measurement tool or peak area tool as a label attached to the 

spectrum by a line.

Feature Description
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 19

Related Topics

Working With Labels

Measuring Samples

Right Pane

Measurement Results

The INSIGHT Window

Working With Labels

Some operations place labels on the displayed data. Here is an example:

More Display Options 

(Fixed only)

Specifies how to display fixed sample data and control limits:

Connect points (in Spectrum) draws connecting lines between 

sample points.

Show annotations displays X and Y values of sample points.

Show X grid draws light vertical lines through sample points, 

making it easier to see their X values.

Show Y grid draws light horizontal lines through sample points, 

making it easier to see their Y values.

If control limits were specified by Use control limits on the 

Instrument tab, Show limit lines displays for each sample point 

the triangular control limit markers.

If control limits were specified, Connect points (in Limit Lines) 

draws connecting lines between the triangular control limit 

markers.

Feature Description
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

20 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To show or hide labels

Right-click the pane, point to Sample Labels and choose ON or OFF.

Y To move a label

Drag it to the new position.

Y To edit a label

Double-click it and use the dialog box that appears to change the text, its font or its color, or 

right-click the label and choose Edit, Color or Font.

Y To rotate a label

Right-click it, point to Rotate and choose an orientation.

Y To move a label in front of or behind annotation

Right-click it and choose Send to Front or Send to Back. Click here for information about 

adding annotation.

Y To delete a label

Right-click it and choose Delete.

Related Topics

Using the Palette Tools and View Finder

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 21

Data Display

Measurement Results

Below the data display in some applications is a table of measurement results. To display a 

spectrum, click its row in the table.

To view, copy or print information about a spectrum, including its history, right-click it in the 

table and choose Properties.

To delete a spectrum from the workbook, right-click it in the table and choose Remove (if 

available). To delete all the spectra from the workbook, right-click the table and choose 

Remove All (if available).

Any Peak Pick or Value Level results appear to the right of the data display.

Menus

The File menu includes:

To print a report containing results information for a sample, select it in the table 

and click Print or choose File (menu) > Print Report. To preview the report, 

choose File > Print Preview. To specify the information to include, use the Print

tab and Configuration tab in Reports.

Command Description

New Workbook Opens a new workbook and closes and saves the current workbook.

Save Workbook If available, saves the current workbook using its current file name 

and location.

Save As Workbook If available, saves the current workbook with the specified file name 

and location.

Close Workbook and 

Go Home

Closes and saves the current workbook and returns to Home.

Close All Workbooks 

and Go Home

Closes all open workbooks (all applications) and returns to Home.

Import If available, imports an externally collected spectrum (.csv file or .tsv 

file) into the current Scan workbook.

Print Preview Shows the current report before printing, with the header and footer 

specified on the Report Master Page tab in Options.

Print Report Prints the current report to the default printer.

Use Current Settings 

as Default

Makes the current workbook settings and report configuration 

selections the default choices for a newly opened workbook for the 

application.
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

22 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The Math menu, when available, includes:

The Analyze menu, when available, includes:

The Operations menu, when available, includes:

The Help menu includes:

Save Workbook 

Settings as Template

If available, saves the current software settings as a template that can 

be used later by the specified user group.

E-mail Current 

Workbook

Automatically attaches the current workbook to a new e-mail 

message.

Command Description

Smooth Reduces noise in wavelength scan data. The smoothing algorithm uses 

the Savitzky-Golay method.

Derivative Converts scan data to a derivative.

Convert Spectra Converts wavelength scan data to another Y-axis format.

Add Adds two scan spectra.

Normalize Adjusts the Y scale of scan data so that a selected data point has the 

desired Y value.

Subtract Subtracts one scan spectrum from another.

Ratio Divides one scan spectrum by another.

Average Averages two or more scan spectra.

Factor Adds a constant to scan data, subtracts a constant, multiplies by a 

constant or divides by a constant.

Command Description

Peak Pick Finds peaks, valleys, or maximum and minimum values in a spectrum or 

region.

Value Level Finds the wavelengths where a spectrum crosses a specified ordinate value.

Command Description

Export Saves Measure Rate results in a file with the extension .xml. If opened in Excel®, 

the data is displayed with one column per spectrum, and one sample per sheet.

Command Description
2 INSIGHT Software

The INSIGHT Window

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 23

Related Topics

Navigation Pane

Right Pane

Instrument Status Monitors

Related Topics

Accessories

Accessories Tab for Fixed

Accessories Tab for Scan

Accessories Tab for Quant

Accessories Tab for Rate

Command Description

Help Displays the INSIGHT Help system, which can also be accessed from many 

software screens by pressing F1.

About Provides information about the software version and instrument type.

Various instrument status monitors may appear above the data display. 

They show information such as the current wavelength or readouts from 

installed accessories. One can double-click some status monitors to set 

operation parameters such as channel assignment. See Accessories for 

more information.

To specify the items to monitor, click this icon.

If the system is operating normally, a green check mark appears on the Instrument 

Status icon at the bottom of the INSIGHT window.

A yellow exclamation mark appears briefly on the icon when the system is busy 

performing an operation.

If a system problem occurs, a red X may appear on the icon. Click it to see 

information about the problem.
2 INSIGHT Software

Thermo Software IQ

24 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Thermo Software IQ

Thermo Software IQ performs Installation Qualification (IQ) for the software. IQ verifies 

that the correct software files were installed and can also be used to verify that these files have 

not been changed, deleted, or overwritten since they were installed. (For more information, 

see the Thermo Software IQ user guide available through the Help menu of the software.)

Y To start Thermo Software IQ

1. Click Start on the Windows taskbar.

2. Choose All Programs (or Programs) > Thermo > Thermo Software IQ.

Contact Information

For help with questions or problems with the software, see Contacting Us.

Operation

Measuring Samples

If the current application provides a Measure button in the navigation pane, use it to access 

data acquisition features for the application. The name of the application appears on the 

button; for example:

Clicking the button displays action buttons for starting sample measurement or other data 

acquisition. The provided buttons and their availability depend on the current application 

and whether necessary operations have been performed. See Action Buttons.

Contents

• Measuring Samples

• Performing a Quantitative Analysis

• Performing a Kinetics Measurement

• Using the Palette Tools and View Finder

• Setting Application Parameters

• Sharing Custom Templates

• Managing Data

• Math and Analysis Operations
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 25

Measurement results appear in the right pane.

See Setting Application Parameters for information about setting parameters that affect data 

acquisition, including those for controlling sampling accessories. See Accessories for 

information about using accessories.

Related Topics

Quantifying Sample Data

Performing Kinetics Measurements

Making Nucleic Acid Measurements

Making Nucleic Acid Labels Measurements

Making Protein A280 Measurements

Making Proteins and Labels Measurements

Making Pierce BCA Measurements

Making Protein Bradford Assay Measurements

Making Pierce Modified Lowry Assay Measurements

Making Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay Measurements

Making Protein Biuret Assay Measurements

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Click Quant in the right pane in Home to set up and 

perform quantitative analyses of sample data. The tasks 

buttons below become available.

To set Quant parameters, click Settings.

To access features for quantifying sample data, click 

Measure Quant.

To specify the predefined formulas, units and advanced 

equations to be available, click Options and use the 

Formulas & Units tab.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

26 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Quant

Quantifying Sample Data

Formulas and Units Tab

Quantifying Sample Data

Related Topics

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Data Display

Quantifying Samples Without Using Standards

Y To quantify samples without using standards

1. Click Measure Quant in Quant.

2. Click Measure.

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

4. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

Contents

• Quantifying Samples Without Using Standards

• Quantifying Samples Using Standards

Note Select Manually entered factor or Advanced without standards on the Type tab

before using this procedure.

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

click the Measure action button instead and skip to step 3.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 27

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

5. If only one sample will be measured, install it.

6. Click Continue.

7. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples tab, horizontal limit 

lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:

To copy this plot, right-click it and choose Copy to Clipboard.

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

sample selected in the table. (Right-click the data to access commands for customizing the 

display, including adding annotation.) See Data Display for more information.

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).

Related Topics

Quantifying Samples Using Standards

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Data Display
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

28 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Quant

Formulas and Units Tab

Quantifying Samples Using Standards

Y To quantify samples using standards

1. Click Measure Quant in Quant.

2. If standards need to be acquired, click Measure. If standards have already been acquired, 

skip to step 7 to acquire sample data.

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

4. When standards information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

If Standard averaging on the Standards tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the 

end of a standard name indicates the second measurement to be made of the standard. If 

Sample averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of standard names indicate 

the second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved standards information, use Import Standards.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each standard in the table.

To remove a standard, select it, right-click the table and choose Clear Standard. To 

remove all the standards, choose Clear Table.

To save standards information for later use, use Export Standards.

5. Click Continue.

6. Follow the instructions that appear, installing the specified standards.

Note Select Measure single standard, Standard curve, Standard curve with two 

wavelengths or Advanced standard curve on the Type tab before using this procedure.

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

start with the next step.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 29

The Standard Curve(s) tab displays the resulting standard curve (or curves). Specify the 

standards to use for the curve (or curves) by selecting Yes or No in the Use column in the 

table.

More:

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

If Standard averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of a standard name indicates 

the second measurement. If Standard averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” 

indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

To permanently remove an acquired standard from the analysis, right-click it and choose 

Remove. Its information is crossed out but not removed from the table.

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

standard selected in the table. To access commands for customizing the display, including 

adding annotation, right-click the data. See Data Display for more information.

7. Click Measure.

8. Follow the instructions that appear.

9. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each sample in the table.

More:

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

If a standard curve is not calibrated...

• Try selecting a different curve fit type.

• Try remeasuring a standard using the correct standard material: 

select the listed standard, right-click the table and choose 

Remeasure.

• Try changing the setting of Minimum r2 on the Standards tab and 

acquire the standards again in a new workbook.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

30 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

10. If only one sample will be measured, install it.

11. Click Continue.

12. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The sample results table contains the columns of information specified on the 

Configuration tab in Reports. If Sample averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement. If Sample averaging was set to 

Triplicate, “D” and “T” indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

The Standard Curve(s) tab shows graphically the relationship between the standard curve, 

measured spectral intensity and calculated concentration for the selected sample: A 

horizontal line connects the sample spectral intensity value on the Y-axis to the standard 

curve. A vertical line connects that point to the sample concentration value on the X-axis:

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. (If there are two analysis wavelengths, the concentration value is the average of 

the values for those wavelengths.) If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples 

tab, horizontal limit lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:

Note If there are two analysis wavelengths, the lines appear for each of the two 

standard curves.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 31

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).

To copy the data on the Standard Curve(s) tab or Run Chart tab, right-click the plot and 

choose Copy to Clipboard.

Related Topics

Quantifying Samples Without Using Standards

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Data Display

Quant

Formulas and Units Tab

Performing a Kinetics Measurement

Click Rate in the right pane in Home to set up and 

perform a kinetics measurement. The tasks buttons below 

become available.

To set Rate parameters, click Settings.

To access features for performing the measurement, 

click Measure Rate.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

32 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Performing Kinetics Measurements

Related Topics

Performing a Scan Kinetics Measurement

Data Display

Performing a Fixed Kinetics Measurement

Kinetics measurements can be made at one wavelength or at more than one wavelength 

simultaneously. This includes multicell kinetics, which allows running a fixed-wavelength 

measurement on several samples simultaneously using a sample changer.

Y To perform a fixed kinetics measurement

1. Make sure Single wavelength or Multiple wavelength is selected on the Type tab in 

Settings in Rate.

2. Click Measure Rate.

3. Click Zero.

4. In cell position 1 load the sample to use to measure the zero and choose OK.

5. Click Measure.

If necessary, the Zero action button can be used to remeasure the zero sample.

6. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

Contents

• Performing a Fixed Kinetics Measurement

• Performing a Scan Kinetics Measurement
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 33

Enter values in any special columns that were specified on the Samples tab in Settings. 

These values may appear in the rate data report.

7. Click Continue.

8. Follow the instructions that appear.

Each row on the Data tab shows the measurement results for a single sample, and each 

column is for one wavelength. Each plot on the tab shows a sample’s spectral intensity 

measured at a particular wavelength over time.

Scroll bars are provided if plots are out of view.

Right-click the Data tab to access features for changing the scale or adding annotation. 

See Data Display for more information.

The results table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab 

in Reports.

9. To perform rate calculations or modify existing rate calculations on the data in a plot, 

double-click it.

More:

A dialog box displays the plot and a table containing the default rate calculation values 

based on the Rate Calculations tab in Settings.

a. If desired, add or change sets of rate calculation values for the displayed data. Each set 

represents a curve that describes the rate behavior over the specified time period.

To delete a row from the table, right-click it and choose Delete Selected Row. To 

delete all the information from the table, right-click it and choose Clear Table.

b. Click Update to generate kinetic rate models, each of which appears as a line across 

the data.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

34 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

c. Specify how to apply the lines and then click Accept.

The dialog box closes, the lines appear across the specified plots, and the results table 

is updated with information about the model lines.

Related Topics

Rate

Data Display

Performing a Scan Kinetics Measurement

Performing a Scan Kinetics Measurement

Kinetics measurements can be made on several samples simultaneously using a sample 

changer or run in a sequential, manual mode.

Y To perform a scan kinetics measurement

1. Make sure Scan data acquisition is selected on the Type tab in Settings in Rate.

2. Click Measure Rate.

3. Click Zero.

This option... Applies the lines to...

This plot only The displayed data only.

All plots with this wavelength only All plots for the current wavelength.

All plots All plots.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 35

4. In cell position 1 load the sample to use to measure the zero and choose OK.

5. Click Measure.

If necessary, the Zero action button can be used to remeasure the zero sample.

6. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

Enter values in any special columns that were specified on the Samples tab in Settings. 

These values may appear in the rate data report.

7. Click Continue.

8. Follow the instructions that appear.

Each grid on the Data tab displays all the spectra acquired for a particular sample.

A scroll bar is provided if spectra are out of view.

Right-click the Data tab to access features for changing the scale or adding annotation. 

See Data Display for more information.

A result table appears below the spectra.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

36 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Rate

Data Display

Performing a Fixed Kinetics Measurement

Using the Palette Tools and View Finder

Using the Selection Tool

Use the selection tool (if present) to zoom in or move the spectrum.

To zoom in, draw a box and click inside it. To move the spectrum, drag it up or down.

Related Topics

Using the Spectral Cursor Tool

Using the Peak/Valley Measurement Tool

Using the Peak Area Tool

Using the Region-Threshold Tool

Using the View Finder

Using the Spectral Cursor Tool

Use the spectral cursor tool (if present) to view the X and Y values of a point in a spectrum.

Contents

• Using the Selection Tool

• Using the Spectral Cursor Tool

• Using the Peak/Valley Measurement Tool

• Using the Peak Area Tool

• Using the Region-Threshold Tool

• Using the View Finder

Note To display the palette, click .
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 37

Y To view the X and Y values of a point

1. Select the spectral cursor tool.

2. Click the data display.

Cross hairs appear. The X and Y coordinates of their intersection with the spectrum 

appear below the palette.

To move the cross hairs, drag across the pane or use the left and right arrow keys on the 

keyboard.

To remove the cross hairs from the display, select another tool such as the selection tool.

Related Topics

Using the Selection Tool

Using the Peak/Valley Measurement Tool

Using the Peak Area Tool

Using the Region-Threshold Tool

Using the View Finder

Using the Peak/Valley Measurement Tool

Use the peak/valley measurement tool (if present) to measure the height of a peak or depth of 

a valley from a specified baseline.

Y To measure a peak or valley

1. Select the peak/valley measurement tool.

2. Click the data display.

A vertical line appears. The X and Y coordinates of its intersection with the spectrum 

appear below the palette.

3. Drag the line by its diamond-shaped handle to the peak or valley to measure.

4. Drag the triangular baseline handles to the desired baseline endpoints.

The height or depth of the peak or valley appears below the palette.

Note To display the palette, click .

Note To display the palette, click .
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

38 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To annotate the spectrum with the measured value, right-click the spectrum, point to 

Annotate and choose Tool Value. See Working With Labels.

To remove the vertical line and baseline from the display, select another tool such as the 

selection tool.

Related Topics

Using the Selection Tool

Using the Spectral Cursor Tool

Using the Peak Area Tool

Using the Region-Threshold Tool

Using the View Finder

Using the Peak Area Tool

Use the peak area tool (if present) to measure the corrected area of a peak. This area is 

bordered by the spectrum, two vertical lines and a baseline.

Y To measure a peak

1. Select the peak area tool.

2. Click the data display.

Two vertical lines appear (see the illustration below). Their X values define the limits of 

the region to measure and appear in the Region readout.

3. Drag the lines by their triangular handles to the desired locations.

4. Drag the triangular baseline handles (see the illustration below) to the desired baseline 

endpoints.

The X values of the endpoints appear in the Baseline readout. The defined area is shaded, 

and its measurement appears in the Corrected area readout. Here is an example showing 

the region limits and baseline endpoints adjusted to measure the corrected area of a peak:

Note To display the palette, click .
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 39

To annotate the spectrum with the measured area, right-click the spectrum, point to 

Annotate and choose Tool Value. See Working With Labels.

To remove the vertical lines and baseline from the display, select another tool such as the 

selection tool.

Related Topics

Using the Selection Tool

Using the Spectral Cursor Tool

Using the Peak/Valley Measurement Tool

Using the Region-Threshold Tool

Using the View Finder

Using the Region-Threshold Tool

For data analysis operations such as locating peaks, use the region-threshold tool (if present) 

to limit the wavelength region.

Drag the vertical lines in the data display or drag horizontally between them to move both at 

once.

Related Topics

Using the Selection Tool

Using the Spectral Cursor Tool

Note To display the palette, click .
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

40 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Using the Peak/Valley Measurement Tool

Using the Peak Area Tool

Using the View Finder

Using the View Finder

For data analysis operations such as locating peaks, use the view finder (if present) to adjust 

the data display.

The currently displayed region is indicated by the region markers, the bold vertical lines.

Y To expand horizontally

Y To expand vertically

Y To expand or contract vertically while keeping the top or bottom of spectra in place

Y To display a different region of the same size

There are three ways to do this: 

• To move the spectrum to the right, click the top half of the Roll button.

Note To display the view finder, click .

Click the top half of the Horizontal Expand/Contract button. To contract 

horizontally, click the bottom half.

Click the left half of the Vertical Expand/Contract button. To contract vertically, 

click the right half.

To expand vertically while keeping the bottom of the spectra in place, click the 

symbol at the top of this button.

To expand vertically while keeping the top of the spectra in place, click the symbol 

at the right.

To contract vertically while keeping the bottom of the spectra in place, click the 

symbol at the bottom.

To contract vertically while keeping the top of the spectra in place, click the symbol 

at the left.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 41

To roll to the left, click the bottom half.

• Drag between the region markers.

• Click to the left of the left region marker or to the right of the right region marker.

Y To change the display limits by moving the region markers

Drag a region marker left or right.

Y To display the entire spectrum 

Double-click between the region markers.

Related Topics

Using the Selection Tool

Using the Spectral Cursor Tool

Using the Peak/Valley Measurement Tool

Using the Peak Area Tool

Using the Region-Threshold Tool

Setting Application Parameters

The tabs in the right pane (and their features) depend on the application.

If appears on a tab, point to it and read the information to correct the problem.

Action buttons for the current application may include:

To set parameters that determine how data will be 

acquired or quantified with the current application, click 

Settings.

Button Description

Displays data acquisition features for the application and starts an acquisition.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

42 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Fixed

Instrument Tab for Fixed

Accessories Tab for Fixed

Samples Tab for Fixed

Change Fixed workbook settings as desired before making sample measurements. All Fixed 

measurements are saved in a workbook that includes the data acquisition settings.

Instrument Tab for Fixed

Resets the parameters on all the tabs to their default values. For Quant and Rate, 

also steps through each tab in sequence.

Makes the parameters on all the tabs available, closes the current workbook, and 

creates a new workbook.

Button Description

To set data acquisition parameters for a Fixed workbook, 

click Settings to access:

Click Settings in Fixed to display the Instrument tab in 

the right pane.

Feature Description

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each measured 

wavelength. Increasing the integration time improves the 

signal-to-noise ratio.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can improve 

the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral bandwidth 

decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral features.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 43

Result mode Determines how results are calculated and displayed:

Normal displays the results in the units specified in the Data mode 

setting (see above).

Peak Height calculates the peak height with respect to a sloping 

baseline defined by two wavelengths adjacent to the center peak:

The lowest of the three measured wavelengths defines the start of 

the sloping baseline, the middle wavelength defines the peak 

location, and the highest wavelength defines the end point of the 

sloping baseline.

Wavelength 1 + Wavelength 2 adds the Y values at the two 

measured wavelengths.

Wavelength 1 - Wavelength 2 subtracts the Y value at the second 

measured wavelength from the Y value at the first.

Wavelength 1 / Wavelength 2 divides the Y value at the first 

measured wavelength by the Y value at the second.

Reference wavelength 

correction

If available and selected, subtracts the background intensity at the 

specified reference wavelength from the sample intensity at all 

measured wavelengths. The reference wavelength value appears in 

red in the table of wavelengths.

Use control limits If available and selected, specifies the control limits for each 

wavelength in the table. The limits, shown as triangular markers in 

the data display (and listed in the table to the right of the display), 

indicate whether each measured data point is within specification.

Enter the desired upper and lower limits for each wavelength in the 

table, using the appropriate units for the selected data mode.

Feature Description
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

44 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Setting Application Parameters

Fixed

Accessories Tab for Fixed

Samples Tab for Fixed

Accessories Tab for Fixed

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements.

Related Topics

Accessories

Setting Application Parameters

Fixed

Instrument Status Monitors

Instrument Tab for Fixed

Samples Tab for Fixed

Table of wavelengths Wavelengths at which measurements will be made, plus the 

corresponding control limits if specified (see above). The number 

of required wavelengths depends on the setting of Result mode (see 

above). To enter or change the value in a table cell, click it and 

type. To order the list by wavelength, lower control limit or upper 

control limit, click the appropriate column heading.

Autoscale Autoscale automatically adjusts the Y-axis scale for optimal viewing 

of data during a measurement.

Ordinate Y scale To specify the Y-axis display limits, deselect Autoscale and set Max

and Min to the desired maximum and minimum Y values, 

respectively, in the range 400 to -400.

Description (optional) Description of the template.

Click Settings in Fixed to display the Accessories tab in 

the right pane. The available parameters depend on the 

installed accessories. See Accessories for details.

Feature Description
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 45

Samples Tab for Fixed

Related Topics

Setting Application Parameters

Fixed

Instrument Tab for Fixed

Accessories Tab for Fixed

Click Settings in Fixed to display the Samples tab in the 

right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the samples table.

Increment sample name 

from selected row

For creating sequentially numbered sample names in the samples 

table if Number of samples (see above) is set to 2 or greater:

1. Select Increment sample name from selected row.

2. Click the cell in the Sample Name column for starting the 

sequence.

3. Type a new sample name.

4. Press Enter.

Load Samples For locating and selecting a .tsv (tab separated values) file or .csv 

(comma separated values) file containing sample names and 

descriptions, which are entered in the samples table.

Save Samples Saves the contents of the samples table in a .tsv (tab separated 

values) file, .csv (comma separated values) file, or .xml 

(extensible markup language) file in a specified location.

Samples table Lists samples by their names and descriptions, up to a maximum 

of 1000. To change a sample name, click its cell and edit the text. 

To enter or change text in a table cell, click it and type. To order 

the list by sample name or description, click the appropriate 

column heading.

If the table contains just one sample and data is acquired with an 

accessory that automatically changes samples, sample names are 

incremented.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

46 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Scan

Instrument Tab for Scan

Measurement Tab for Scan

Correction Tab for Scan

Accessories Tab for Scan

Samples Tab for Scan

Instrument Tab for Scan

To set data acquisition parameters for a Scan workbook, 

click Settings to access:

Click Settings in Scan to display the Instrument tab in 

the right pane.

Feature Description

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

For Abs*Factor, set Factor to a value by which to multiply measured 

absorbance values.

Smooth Select the desired degree of smoothing (if available for the selected 

data mode and Derivative setting). Smoothing reduces noise in the 

data but can also remove some spectral features such as small peaks, 

valleys and shoulders. For more information, see About Smoothing.

Derivative Select the desired derivative order for acquired data (if available for 

the selected data mode).

Start wavelength 

and End wavelength

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can improve the 

signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral bandwidth decreases 

the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral features, especially in 

scanning measurements.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data interval. 

Increasing the integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but 

reduces the scan speed.

Data interval Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 47

Related Topics

Setting Application Parameters

Scan

Measurement Tab for Scan

Correction Tab for Scan

Samples Tab for Scan

Accessories Tab for Scan

Measurement Tab for Scan

Related Topics

Setting Application Parameters

Scan

Estimated time Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration time 

increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely with scan 

speed.

Autoscale Auto scale automatically adjusts the Y-axis scale for optimal viewing 

of data during a measurement.

Ordinate Y scale To specify the Y-axis display limits, deselect Autoscale and set Max

and Min to the desired maximum and minimum Y values, 

respectively, in the range 400 to -400.

Description 

(optional)

Description of the template.

When setting up a Scan workbook, click Settings to 

display the Measurement tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Result Data analysis operation to perform automatically after sample measurement.

Select Off to not perform any operation.

The parameters for a selected operation appear to the right. See Finding Peaks in 

Scan Data or Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data for information on 

setting them and how results are displayed.

Feature Description
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

48 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Instrument Tab for Scan

Correction Tab for Scan

Samples Tab for Scan

Accessories Tab for Scan

Correction Tab for Scan

Click Settings in Scan to display the Correction tab in 

the right pane. Three baseline correction types are 

available:

Type Description

100%T baseline Standard baseline correction. The data may be acquired 

using an empty holder or using solvent.

0%T or 0%R baseline Corrects for any inherent variations in the electronic zero 

line of the instrument.

More:

This can be more of a factor at lower light energy levels 

present in a DRA (Diffuse Reflectance Accessory) and when 

working at high absorbance levels.

For more information, see ASTM method E903. The 

calculation in transmission performed in the instrument is:

 or 

Requires a previously acquired 100%T baseline.

S - 0%T

100%T - 0%T

--------------------------------- S - 0%R

100%R - 0%R

----------------------------------
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 49

Select Standard reference correction with 0%R or 0%T baseline to display additional 

features:

Related Topics

Setting Application Parameters

Scan

Instrument Tab for Scan

Measurement Tab for Scan

Samples Tab for Scan

Standard reference correction 

with 0%R or 0%T baseline

Applies a 100%T baseline correction and a zero line 

correction (0%R baseline) to a sample measured with a 

reflectance accessory that is not absolute (for example, a 

Diffuse Reflectance Accessory).

More:

The software multiplies the scan result at each data point by 

the corresponding value in the table (explained below).

The calculation in reflectance performed in the instrument 

is:

Requires a previously acquired 100%T baseline.

Correct single beam 

substitution error

Allows the ratioed spectrum acquired with the single-beam 

sphere to be corrected as if it were acquired with a 

double-beam instrument (where the baseline is collected in 

the integrating sphere). Requires that Data mode on the 

Instrument tab be set to Absorbance, % Transmittance, 

% Reflectance or Log(1/R).

Feature Description

Clear Table Clears information from the table.

Load Table Fills the table with wavelength and intensity values from a .tsv (tab separated 

values) file or .csv (comma separated values) file containing X delimiter Y 

pairs.

Save Table Saves in a .tsv file, .csv file, or .xml (extensible markup language) file the 

wavelength and intensity values in the table.

Type Description

S - 0%R

100%T - 0%R

---------------------------------- Std. Ref. ×
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

50 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Accessories Tab for Scan

Accessories Tab for Scan

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements.

Related Topics

Accessories

Setting Application Parameters

Scan

Instrument Status Monitors

Instrument Tab for Scan

Measurement Tab for Scan

Correction Tab for Scan

Samples Tab for Scan

Samples Tab for Scan

Click Settings in Scan to display the Accessories tab in 

the right pane. The available parameters depend on the 

installed accessories. See Accessories for details.

Click Settings in Scan to display the Samples tab in the 

right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the samples table.

Increment sample name 

from selected row

For creating sequentially numbered sample names in the samples 

table if Number of samples (see above) is set to 2 or greater:

1. Select Increment sample name from selected row.

2. Click the cell in the Sample Name column for starting the 

sequence.

3. Type a new sample name.

4. Press Enter.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 51

Related Topics

Setting Application Parameters

Scan

Instrument Tab for Scan

Measurement Tab for Scan

Correction Tab for Scan

Accessories Tab for Scan

Quant

Type Tab for Quant

Measurement Tab for Quant

Standards Tab for Quant

Instrument Tab for Quant

Accessories Tab for Quant

Samples Tab for Quant

Load Samples For locating and selecting a .tsv (tab separated values) file or .csv 

(comma separated values) file containing sample names and 

descriptions, which are entered in the samples table.

Save Samples Saves the contents of the samples table in a .tsv (tab separated 

values) file, .csv (comma separated values) file, or .xml 

(extensible markup language) file in a specified location.

Samples table Lists samples by their names and descriptions, up to a maximum 

of 1000. To change a sample name, click its cell and edit the text. 

To enter or change text in a table cell, click it and type. To order 

the list by sample name or description, click the appropriate 

column heading.

If the table contains just one sample and data is acquired with an 

accessory that automatically changes samples, sample names are 

incremented.

Feature Description

To set parameters that define a Quant template, click 

Settings to access: 
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

52 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Quant

Formulas and Units Tab

Quantifying Sample Data

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Type Tab for Quant

If only the Type tab appears, set its parameters. Click Next at the bottom 

of the tab to set parameters on the next tab, and so on. To return to the 

previous tab, click Previous. Click Finish when ready to complete the 

process. To cancel the operation, click Cancel.

Note Change Quant settings only before sample measurements. All Quant measurements 

saved in a workbook must be made with the same settings. See Setting Application 

Parameters for information about unlocking settings.

Click Settings in Quant to display the Type tab in the 

right pane.

Feature Description

Name (if present) User group name followed by the name of the template of settings 

(entered when the template was saved using Save Workbook Settings as 

Template in the File menu).

Description 

(optional)

Optional description of the template.

Quant Type Type of quantitative analysis (see the table below). An image 

representing the selected type appears to the right. The required tabs also 

appear (click the Reset action button to step through them).
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 53

Related Topics

Quant

Measurement Tab for Quant

Standards Tab for Quant

Instrument Tab for Quant

Samples Tab for Quant

Accessories Tab for Quant

Formulas and Units Tab

Quantifying Sample Data

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Measurement Tab for Quant

Type How the Type Calculates Sample Concentration

Manually entered 

factor

Uses the equation C = K * A, where C is the concentration of the 

analyte in the selected units, K is the entered factor, and A is the 

absorbance.

Measure single 

standard

Divides the sample absorbance value by the average absorbance value 

of a single standard. This is in effect a “Standard curve” quantification 

(see below) with just one standard.

Standard curve Uses a simple standard curve based on the absorbance of a set of 

standards at a specified wavelength.

Standard curve with 

two wavelengths

Takes the average of values determined by each of two standard curves 

associated with the specified wavelengths.

Advanced standard 

curve

Uses a standard curve generated from a specified equation.

Advanced without 

standards

Uses a “single result equation” specified on the Measurement tab. 

(Calculates the concentration or answer directly from this equation.)

Click Settings in Quant to display the Measurement tab 

in the right pane. The available features depend on the 

Quant Type setting on the Type tab. The features for 

each type are described in tables below.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

54 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Manually entered factor

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength(s) Wavelength(s) to use for the quantitative analysis.

Correction To use uncorrected data, select None.

Single point subtracts the sample absorbance at the entered 

wavelength from the absorbance at every data point.

Sloping baseline draws a line between the data points at the 

entered wavelengths, finds its Y value at the analytical 

wavelength, and subtracts it from the measured absorbance.

Component name Component to quantify.

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on 

the Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Use user-defined factor Calculates component concentration using the entered factor (K 

in the equation C = K *A), with the selected unit.

Use extinction coefficient Calculates component concentration with absorbance (A) equal 

to

where ε is the entered extinction coefficient (a constant 

dependent on the component and wavelength), c is 

concentration in the selected unit, and is 1 cm (the 

pathlength).

ε c l
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 55

Measure single standard

Molecular weight Molecular weight of the component. Available only if the units 

specified on this tab are different and require this value for a 

conversion.

Calculate additional 

results

For selecting or defining formulas for additional data 

processing, with the results appearing in the analysis report. The 

formulas are written in a form similar to that used in a 

command script language, with constants, mathematical 

functions, etc. (See “Operations and Functions” for definitions 

of operations and functions.) All functions are case-sensitive. 

Spaces are not allowed between a function name and “(”. After 

adding formulas, edit their information in the formula table as 

desired. To delete a table row, right-click it and choose Delete 

Row.

Instructions:

Y To use one or more predefined formulas

1. Click Select.

2. Select the desired formulas.

Hold down the Ctrl or Shift keys on the keyboard while 

making multiple selections. The available formulas depend 

on the Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

3. Choose OK.

Y To define a formula

1. Click Build.

2. To enter a formula in its entirety, set Equation type to User 

defined and type the equation. To use a provided formula, 

select it and enter values for the variables.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units 

tab settings.

3. Click OK.

4. For selected provided formulas, enter a name and 

concentration unit in the table.

The available units depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings.

Feature Description
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

56 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Standard curve

Standard curve with two wavelengths

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength(s) Wavelength(s) to use for the quantitative analysis.

Correction See Correction above.

Component name Component to quantify.

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on 

the Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Standard concentration Concentration of the single standard.

Calculate additional 

results

See Calculate additional results above.

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength(s) Wavelength(s) to use for the quantitative analysis.

Correction See Correction above.

Component name Component to quantify.

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

See Calculate additional results above.

Feature Description

Analysis wavelengths Wavelengths to use for the quantitative analysis.

Correction See Correction above.

Component name Component to quantify.

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings.

Calculate additional 

results

See Calculate additional results above.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 57

Advanced standard curve

Feature Description

Standard Curve Equation Equation used to quantify samples, written in a form similar to 

that used in a command script language, with constants, 

mathematical functions, etc. (See Operations and Functions for 

definitions of operations and functions.) All functions are not 

case-sensitive. Spaces are not allowed between a function name 

and “(”.

For this Quant type the equation defines the value for the Y-axis 

of the calibration curve.

Instructions:

Y To use a predefined equation

1. Click Select.

2. Select the desired equation and click OK.

The available equations depend on the Formulas & Units 

tab settings in Options.

Y To define an equation

1. Click Build.

2. To enter an equation in its entirety, set Equation type to 

User defined and type the equation. To use a provided 

equation, select it and enter values for the variables.

The available equations depend on the Formulas & Units 

tab settings.

3. Click OK.

Component name Component to quantify.

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on 

the Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

See Calculate additional results above.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

58 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Advanced without standards

Related Topics

Operations and Functions

Quant

Type Tab for Quant

Standards Tab for Quant

Instrument Tab for Quant

Samples Tab for Quant

Accessories Tab for Quant

Formulas and Units Tab

Quantifying Sample Data

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Operations and Functions

The tables below describe the operations and functions usable in Quant equations specified 

on the Measurement tab. Arithmetic operations (including functions) are performed first, 

followed by comparison operations, and finally logical operations.

Feature Description

Single Result Equation See Standard Curve Equation above for instructions.

For this Quant type the equation is used to obtain a single 

concentration result (without using standards).

Component name Component to quantify.

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on 

the Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

See Calculate additional results above.

Note The operators, arguments and functions are not case-sensitive.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 59

Arithmetic Operations

Comparison Operations

Logical Operations

The following equation functions produce a value based on one or more arguments you 

supply.

Operator Description Example Returned by Example Operation

+ Addition 2 + 6 + 4 12

- Subtraction 25 - 4 21

* Multiplication 25 * 4 100

/ Division 25 / 4 6.25

- Negation -4 + 25 21

mod Modulo division 

(returns remainder)

16 mod 5 1

& Text addition “abc” & “def” “abcdef”

Operator Description Example Result

>= Greater than or equal (3 + 2) >= 4 true

<= Less than or equal (3 + 2) <= 5 true

=, == Equals (2 + 2) = 4 true

!=, <> Does not equal (2 + 2) != 5 true

< Less than 5 < 4 false

> Greater than 5 > 4 true

true The value “true” (5 > 4) = true true

false The value “false” (5 > 4) = false false

Operator Description Example Result

AND If both sides of the AND are true, result is true 5 > 4 AND 2 = 3 false

OR If either side of the OR is true, result is true 5 > 4 OR 2 = 3 true
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

60 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Example Function Arguments

Arithmetic Functions

Logarithmic Functions

Argument Description

<number>, <angle>, <length>, 

<value>, <power>, <start>, <len>

An expression that yields a number.

<list> Any expression that yields a list of numbers.

<text>, <sub> An expression that yields a text.

Function Returned or Performed by Function

abs(<number>) Absolute value of a number.

ceiling(<number>) Smallest integer greater than or equal to <number>. Example:

Ceiling(2.2) is 3.0

floor(<number>) Largest integer less than or equal to <number>. Example:

Floor(2.7) is 2.0

random() Random fractional number between 0 and 1.

round(<number>) Rounds a double value to the nearest integer value.

sqrt(<number>) Square root of a number.

truncate(<number>) Truncated number. Everything to the right of the decimal point is 

removed, leaving only the integer portion of the number. The 

returned value is not rounded.

Function Returned by Function

exp(<number>) Result of the constant e (2.7182818) raised to the power of the 

specified number (e^<number>).

ln(<number>) Natural logarithm (base e logarithm) of a number.

log10(<number>)

log(<number>)

Base 10 logarithm of a specified number.

pow(<value>, <power>) Value raised to the power. Example:

pow(2,3) is 8.0
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 61

Trigonometric Functions

Statistical Functions

Text Functions

Note For functions acos and asin, <number> is an expression that yields a number in the 

range -1 to 1.

Note The formula for converting degrees to radians is radians = degrees * (pi/180).

Function Returned by Function

acos(<number>) Arccosine of a number in radians.

asin(<number>) Arcsine of a number in radians.

atan(<number>) Arctangent of a number in radians.

atan2(<number1>,<number2>) Arctangent of <number1> divided by <number2> in 

radians. The signs of both arguments are used to 

determine the quadrant of the returned value.

cos(<angle>) Cosine of an angle measured in radians.

cosh(<angle>) Hyperbolic cosine of an angle measured in radians.

pi() Ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter.

sin(<angle>) Sine of an angle measured in radians.

sinh(<angle>) Hyperbolic sine of an angle measured in radians.

tan(<angle>) Tangent of an angle measured in radians.

tanh(<angle>) Hyperbolic tangent of an angle measured in radians.

Function Returned by Function

average(<list>) Average of a list of numbers (sum divided by the number of items).

max(<list>) Highest value from two or more numbers.

min(<list>) Lowest value from two or more numbers.

sum(<list>) Sum of a list of numbers.

Function Returned by Function

FindTextIndex(<search>, 

<text>)

Index of the first occurrence of the <search> text in the 

specified text. If the text is not found, a -1 is returned.

Lowercase(<text>) Copy of the text converted to lower case using the casing rules 

of the current culture.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

62 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Measurement Functions

PassFail(<expression>) “Pass” in the language of the current culture if the expression 

evaluates to true; otherwise, “Fail”.

Quote Text containing the quote (“) character.

Return Text containing a carriage return.

TextLength(<text>) Number of characters, including spaces, in the specified text. 

A CRLF is counted as two characters.

ExtractText(<text>, <start>, 

<len>)

Portion of the specified text. The extracted text starts at the 

specified <start> index and has a specified length.

Tab Text containing the tab character.

ToNumber(<text>) Numeric representation of the text.

ToText(<number>) Text representation of the number.

Function Returned or Performed by Function

Y(location) Y-axis value at the given location.

Y(location, baseline) Y-axis value at the given location with a one-point baseline.

Y(location, baseline1, 

baseline2)

Y-axis value at the given location with a two-point baseline.

Area(start, end) Area between two spectral limits.

Area(start, end, 

baseline)

Area between two spectral limits using a one-point baseline.

Area(start, end, 

baseline1, baseline2)

Area between two spectral limits using a two-point baseline.

PMin(start, end) Minimum Y-axis value between two spectral limits.

PMax(start, end) Maximum Y-axis value between two spectral limits.

PMax(start, end, 

baseline)

Corrects the spectrum with a one-point baseline and then report the 

maximum Y-axis value between two spectral limits.

PMax(start, end, 

baseline1, baseline2)

Corrects the spectrum with a two-point baseline and then report the 

maximum Y-axis value between two spectral limits.

PLoc(start, end) Location (X-axis value) at which the maximum Y-axis value occurs 

between two spectral limits.

PLoc(start, end, 

baseline)

Corrects the spectrum with a one-point baseline and then report the 

location (X-axis value) at which the maximum Y-axis value occurs 

between two spectral limits.

Function Returned by Function
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 63

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Quant

Formulas and Units Tab

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Standards Tab for Quant

PLoc(start, end, 

baseline1, baseline2)

Corrects the spectrum with a two-point baseline and then report the 

location (X-axis value) at which the maximum Y-axis value occurs 

between two spectral limits.

PWidth(start, end, 

percent)

Determines the peak width between two spectral limits. Report the 

width at which the peak reaches a specified percentage of the peak 

maximum.

Pavg(start, end) Determines the average value of the spectrum between two spectral 

limits.

Pcut(start, end, 

percent)

Determines the location (X-axis value) of the cut-on or cut-off point 

in the specified spectral region. For example, for a region with 

increasing Y value, a cut-on point occurs where the increase reaches 

the specified percentage of total increase across the region. Here is an 

example showing a cut-on point with “percent” set to 60:

To display the Standards tab in the right pane, click 

Settings in Quant and then set Quant Type to Standard 

curve, Standard curve with two wavelengths, or 

Advanced standard curve.

Function Returned or Performed by Function
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

64 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Quant

Type Tab for Quant

Measurement Tab for Quant

Instrument Tab for Quant

Samples Tab for Quant

Accessories Tab for Quant

Formulas and Units Tab

Quantifying Sample Data

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Feature Description

Curve fit type Type of equation used to create the standard curve from standard 

concentration values.

Standard averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same standard or from multiple standards 

prepared under the same conditions. To average multiple 

measurements of the same standard, select Replicate and set Number 

of replicates to the total number of measurements. To average values 

from two or three similar standards, select Duplicate or Triplicate, 

respectively.

Minimum r2 The r2 value indicates how well the standard curve fits the standard 

data points, with 1.0 a perfect fit. If Minimum r2

 is selected, samples 

can be quantified only after that value is achieved for the standard 

curve.

Calculate from 

weight/volume

If available for the current unit, calculates concentration when the 

weight and volume of material used to prepare each standard is 

known. Enter the weight and volume for each standard in the 

appropriate table cells, or enter it later as part of running an analysis.

Standard Table Contains concentration and other information about the standards. 

To add information from a .csv (comma separated values) file or .tsv 

(tab separated values) file, click Import Standards. To save the 

information in a .csv file or .tsv file, click Export Standards.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 65

Instrument Tab for Quant

Related Topics

Quant

Click Settings in Quant to display the Instrument tab in 

the right pane.

Feature Description

Mode Specifies Scan or Fixed data acquisition.

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

For Abs*Factor (Scan only), set Factor to a value by which to 

multiply measured absorbance values.

Smooth (Scan only) Select the desired degree of smoothing (if available for the 

selected data mode and Derivative setting). Smoothing reduces 

noise in the data but can also remove some spectral features 

such as small peaks, valleys and shoulders. See About 

Smoothing.

Derivative (Scan only) Select the desired derivative order for acquired data (if available 

for the selected data mode).

Start wavelength and End 

wavelength (Scan only)

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for 

acquiring data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can 

improve the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral 

bandwidth decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral 

features.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data 

interval (for Scan) or at each measured wavelength (for Fixed). 

Increasing the integration time improves the signal-to-noise 

ratio but reduces the scan speed.

Data interval (Scan only) Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed (Scan only) Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.

Estimated time (Scan 

only)

Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration 

time increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely 

with scan speed.

Table of wavelengths 

(Fixed only)

Shows the analysis wavelength(s) entered on the Measurement 

tab.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

66 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Type Tab for Quant

Measurement Tab for Quant

Standards Tab for Quant

Samples Tab for Quant

Accessories Tab for Quant

Formulas and Units Tab

Quantifying Sample Data

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Accessories Tab for Quant

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements.

Related Topics

Quant

Accessories

Instrument Status Monitors

Type Tab for Quant

Measurement Tab for Quant

Standards Tab for Quant

Instrument Tab for Quant

Samples Tab for Quant

Formulas and Units Tab

Quantifying Sample Data

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Click Settings in Quant to display the Accessories tab in 

the right pane. The available parameters depend on the 

installed accessories. See Accessories for details.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 67

Samples Tab for Quant

Related Topics

Quant

Type Tab for Quant

Measurement Tab for Quant

Standards Tab for Quant

Instrument Tab for Quant

Accessories Tab for Quant

Formulas and Units Tab

Quantifying Sample Data

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Click Settings in Quant to display the Samples tab in 

the right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the analysis.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended. For example, the names of three sample spectra 

using the base name “dye” would be dye1, dye2 and dye3.

Sample averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same sample or from multiple samples. To 

average multiple measurements of the same sample, select Replicate

and set Number of replicates to the total number of measurements. 

To average values from two or three samples, select Duplicate or 

Triplicate, respectively.

Use concentration 

limits

Displays high and low limit lines on the Run Chart tab to show 

whether sample concentrations are within the specified limits.

Use weight/volume 

correction

If available for the current unit, corrects sample concentrations using 

the entered target weight and volume:

corrected concentration = measured concentration * (actual weight / 

target weight) * (target volume / actual volume)
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

68 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Rate

Type Tab for Rate

Measurement Tab for Rate

Instrument Tab for Rate

Accessories Tab for Rate

Samples Tab for Rate

Rate Calculations Tab for Rate

Related Topics

Rate

Performing a Kinetics Measurement

Type Tab for Rate

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Rate

Instrument Tab for Rate

Accessories Tab for Rate

Samples Tab for Rate

Rate Calculations Tab for Rate

Performing a Kinetics Measurement

To set parameters for the current Rate workbook, click 

Settings to access: 

Click Settings in Rate to display the Type tab in the 

right pane.

Feature Description

Name User group name followed by the name of the template of settings (entered 

when the template was saved using Save Workbook Settings as Template in 

the File menu).

Description Description of the template.

Rate Type Type of kinetics measurement to perform.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 69

Measurement Tab for Rate

Click Settings in Rate to display the Measurement tab in 

the right pane.

Feature Description

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data to obtain each data 

point at each measured wavelength for single and multicell 

experiments or at each data interval for scan experiments.

Dwell time How long the sample remains in the light beam.

Use this setting to vary the number of data points collected per cell 

per cycle. Dwell time is always a multiple of integration time (see 

above). Dwell time can be very useful when performing multicell 

rate measurements. This is because the cell changer accessory will 

position a cell in the light beam for a specified period of time (dwell 

time), rather than moving back and forth between cells and 

increasing the time between measurements (when no sample is in 

the light beam).

For example, if the integration time is 0.1 second and dwell time is 

0.5 second, five data points will be recorded for each cell before the 

cell changer moves to the next cell. For fairly fast reactions, multiple 

samples can be measured, with over ten times as many data points 

acquired within a short time. This can improve the accuracy of rate 

calculations for faster multicell rate measurements.

Time unit Determines the time unit used in the stages table (see below).

Allow multiple stages Allows the use of the specified number of measurement stages, over 

which the frequency of data acquisition can be determined. For 

example, if a reaction has two components, the first component 

could be fast and require a high data density. The second component 

could be much slower and longer lived, therefore requiring a lower 

data density. Defining multiple stages enables the use of the proper 

data density over a given period of time.

For single and multiple wavelength experiments only.

Stages table Defines for each stage the start time, end time and interval (how 

frequently a measurement is made). For example, using an interval 

of 10 seconds would measure the sample every 10 seconds from the 

start time to the end time. In a multicell experiment the interval 

setting is the measurement interval for each sample.

For single and multiple wavelength experiments only.

Cycle time Time between each measurement cycle. For scan experiments only.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

70 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Type Tab for Rate

Instrument Tab for Rate

Accessories Tab for Rate

Samples Tab for Rate

Rate Calculations Tab for Rate

Performing a Kinetics Measurement

Instrument Tab for Rate

Number of cycles Number of measurement cycles. For scan experiments only.

Duration Length of the experiment, calculated by multiplying the cycle time 

by the number of cycles (see above). For scan experiments only.

Click Settings in Rate to display the Instrument tab in 

the right pane.

Feature Description

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

For Abs*Factor, set Factor to a value by which to multiply measured 

absorbance values. For scan experiments only.

Smooth Select the desired degree of smoothing. Smoothing reduces noise in 

the data but can also remove some spectral features such as small 

peaks, valleys and shoulders. For more information, see About 

Smoothing. For scan experiments only.

Derivative Select the desired derivative order for acquired data. For scan 

experiments only.

Start wavelength 

and End wavelength

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring 

data. For scan experiments only.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can improve the 

signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral bandwidth decreases 

the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral features, especially in 

scanning measurements.

Feature Description
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 71

Related Topics

Type Tab for Rate

Measurement Tab for Rate

Accessories Tab for Rate

Samples Tab for Rate

Rate Calculations Tab for Rate

Performing a Kinetics Measurement

Accessories Tab for Rate

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements.

Related Topics

Accessories

Instrument Status Monitors

Type Tab for Rate

Measurement Tab for Rate

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data interval. 

Increasing the integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but 

reduces the scan speed. For scan experiments only.

Data interval Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points. For 

scan experiments only.

Scan speed Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases. For scan 

experiments only.

Estimated time Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration time 

increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely with scan 

speed. For scan experiments only.

Wavelength table Wavelengths to monitor during the reaction. For single and multiple 

wavelength experiments only.

Click Settings in Rate to display the Accessories tab in 

the right pane. The available parameters depend on the 

installed accessories. See Accessories for details.

Feature Description
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

72 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Instrument Tab for Rate

Samples Tab for Rate

Rate Calculations Tab for Rate

Performing a Kinetics Measurement

Samples Tab for Rate

Related Topics

Type Tab for Rate

Measurement Tab for Rate

Instrument Tab for Rate

Accessories Tab for Rate

Rate Calculations Tab for Rate

Performing a Kinetics Measurement

Rate Calculations Tab for Rate

Click Settings in Rate to display the Samples tab in the 

right pane. To

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the experiment.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended.

Set up sample table 

columns

Specifies the columns of sample information to be entered during the 

experiment. To add a column, type the desired name in an empty cell 

and press the Tab key. To delete a column (except the Sample Title 

column), right-click it and choose Delete Column. To delete all the 

columns (except the Sample Title column), right-click the table and 

choose Delete All Columns.

Click Settings in Rate to display the Rate Calculations 

tab in the right pane (for single and multiple wavelength 

experiments only).
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 73

Related Topics

Type Tab for Rate

Measurement Tab for Rate

Instrument Tab for Rate

Accessories Tab for Rate

Samples Tab for Rate

Performing a Kinetics Measurement

Sharing Custom Templates

To share a custom template, paste a copy of it into the desired folder, such as:

C:\Users\Public\Documents\Thermo\Insight\Custom Methods

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Thermo\Insight\Custom 

Methods

Feature Description

Calculate rate constants 

automatically at end of 

data acquisition

Calculates rate constants automatically at the end of the 

experiment.

Calculate Rate For each measurement stage, enter the starting and ending times 

of the rate vector, the rate scaling factor, and the order of the 

reaction. The factor is a constant that is multiplied by a calculated 

kinetics parameter to give physical significance to the 

measurement.

To enter different settings for individual wavelengths, select 

Specify settings for individual wavelengths (available only if 

Rate Type on the Type tab is set to Multiple wavelength). In the 

Wavelength column, select or type the desired wavelength for each 

row of settings. The available wavelengths are those entered on the 

Instrument tab.

To delete a row of information from the table, right-click the row 

and choose Delete Selected Row. To delete all the information 

from the table, right-click it and choose Clear Table.

Note “Shared Documents” may appear in a path instead of “Documents”.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

74 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Managing Data

My Data 

Use these tabs to select items to open or delete:

Use the links below the buttons to display archived workbooks. Click Active workbook 

library to view the directory where a workbook was last saved. To change the path to the 

default workbook, right-click My favorite workbook library and choose Edit Link.

Related Topics

Managing Data

Contents

• My Data

• Reports

Use My Data to access saved workbooks, templates and 

Performance Verification (PV) result reports. Drag the 

borders of the panes to change their size and shape.

Tab Description

Workbooks Select a folder in the tree to list its workbooks. Select a listed workbook to see 

its spectra. To zoom in on the displayed spectra, draw a box and click inside it 

or use the view finder. To view the full data range, double-click the spectral 

display.

Templates Select a group folder in the tree to list its templates.

PV Reports Select the listed result reports of interest. To select multiple reports, hold 

down Shift or Ctrl. (One window will display all the opened results.)

Click Open to open the selected workbook or 

template (and associated application) or the 

selected PV reports. Alternatively, double-click the 

item to open it. Additional measurements can be 

appended to an opened workbook. Opened PV 

results can be printed and copied from the report 

window.

Click Delete to delete the selected workbook or 

template.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 75

Reports

A report contains a table of sample data and other specified information.

These action buttons appear in Reports:

The export formats include:

These tabs appear in the Reports right pane:

To configure or view the report after opening a 

workbook or measuring a sample, click Reports.

Button Description

Shows the current report before printing, with the header and footer specified 

on the Report Master Page tab in Options.

Prints the current report on the specified printer.

Saves the current report in the specified format (see the table below).

Format Description

Report, Excel XML 

Spreadsheet (*.xml)

Can be opened in Excel®. Only the columns displayed in the 

report are saved. Configure the report to display the desired 

information before exporting.

Report, Tab Separated 

Values (*.tsv)

Can be opened in Notepad or Excel. Only the columns 

displayed in the report are saved. Configure the report to display 

the desired information before exporting.

Wavelength Curve, Excel 

XML Spreadsheet (*.xml)

Saves the absorbance values along with the corresponding 

wavelengths for a highlighted sample. If multiple samples are 

highlighted, the corresponding absorbance values for each 

wavelength are saved onto separate worksheets within one Excel 

file.

Wavelength Curve, Tab 

Separated Values (*.tsv)

Saves absorbance values along with the corresponding 

wavelengths for highlighted samples in a format that can be 

opened in Notepad or Excel. Multiple samples are saved 

sequentially in one column.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

76 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The Print tab includes:

Tab Description

Report Displays the sample data archived in the opened workbook. To sort the 

information in the table, click the desired column heading.

To view particular data, select it in the table. For most applications this 

displays a sample spectrum. For fixed Rate data, this displays spectral data 

points for the indicated wavelength and the line resulting from the rate 

calculations, if specified. For scan Rate data, all of the sample’s spectra 

appear.

See Data Display for information on using features made available by 

right-clicking the displayed data.

To view, print or copy data acquisition and other information about data, 

right-click it in the list and choose Properties.

To change a sample ID, click its cell and type a new ID.

Configuration Specifies the report columns to include and their order. The available 

columns depend on the current application and workbook settings.

To include a column, select it in the Available Columns list and click 

.

To remove an included column, select it in the Reported Columns list and 

click .

To move an included column up, select it and click .

To move an included column down, select it and click .

To restore the most recent configuration, click .

Only the information associated with selected columns will be included in 

exported files. See the information on exporting reports above.

Print Specifies the items to include in printed reports (see the table below).

Feature Description

Header/Footer Includes a header and footer in the printout.

Header Items Title and subtitle to appear in the header. Use the Font buttons to specify 

their fonts.

Table Includes a table of sample information. Use the Font button to specify the 

font for the information.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 77

If the computer is not mapped to recognize that .xml files should be opened with Excel, open 

the exported file from within Excel.

Math and Analysis Operations

Smoothing Scan Data

Use Smooth in the Math menu to reduce noise in wavelength scan data. The smoothing 

algorithm uses the Savitzky-Golay method. For more information, see About Smoothing.

Settings info Includes a table of workbook settings. Use the Font button to specify the 

font for the information.

Graphs Includes spectra and other data plots in printed reports. See “Print report 

graphs” below for more information.

Page Setup Specifies the paper size, orientation and other printing attributes.

Print report 

graphs

Select Overlay to print data plots overlaid. Select Separate to print data 

plots separately, with the specified number of plots on a page. These are 

available only if Graphs is selected (see above).

Note We recommend first defining a master page on the Report Master Page tab in 

Options.

Feature Description

Contents

• Smoothing Scan Data

• Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

• Converting Scan Data to Other Units

• Adding Two Scan Spectra

• Normalizing Scan Data

• Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

• Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

• Averaging Scan Spectra

• Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

• Finding Peaks in Scan Data

• Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

78 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To smooth data

1. Choose Math (menu) > Smooth.

The selected spectrum appears in the Operands pane.

The workbook spectra are listed at the left. To add others:

a. Click Browse.

b. Select a folder in the left pane (use the features above it to navigate), a workbook in 

the middle pane, and spectra in the upper-right pane. To select multiple spectra, hold 

down Shift or Ctrl. Selected spectra appear in the lower-right pane.

c. Click OK. Each added spectrum is listed with asterisks at the beginning of its name 

to indicate the data is not in the current workbook.

2. Select any other listed spectra to smooth and click Add.

To remove a spectrum from the Operands pane, click it and click Remove. To remove all 

the spectra, click Clear All.

3. Select the polynomial order.

4. Specify the degree of smoothing (number of points in the smoothing formula) by 

dragging the slider:

5. To perform a math operation on the smoothed result, click Operate on Result and 

choose an operation. Otherwise, go to the next step.

Perform the operation as explained in the appropriate related topic below.

To return to the previous window, click Back.

To perform additional math operations, repeat this step.

6. To save the result in the current workbook, click Workbook and name the spectrum or 

spectra when prompted.

The data is added to the list and is available for operations.

To add the result to the list without saving it, click Temporary. Asterisks at the beginning 

of a spectrum name indicate the data is not saved.

7. Click Close to close each displayed math window.

Note To use the result in another Smooth operation, use Workbook or Temporary

to add it to the list (see step 6), click Add to make it an operand, and continue with 

step 2.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 79

Related Topics

About Smoothing

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Converting Scan Data to Other Units

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Normalizing Scan Data

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Averaging Scan Spectra

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

About Smoothing

The smoothing feature of INSIGHT software uses a Savitzky-Golay algorithm modified to 

reduce high frequency breakthrough; that is, to reduce noise in the spectrum. The algorithm 

is based on performing a least-squares linear regression fit of a polynomial of order k over at 

least k+1 data points around each point in the spectrum.

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Use Derivative in the Math menu to convert scan data to the first, second, third or fourth 

derivative.

Y To convert scan data to a derivative

1. Choose Math (menu) > Derivative.

The selected spectrum appears in the Operands pane.

The workbook spectra are listed at the left. To add others:

a. Click Browse.

b. Select a folder in the left pane (use the features above it to navigate), a workbook in 

the middle pane, and spectra in the upper-right pane. To select multiple spectra, hold 

down Shift or Ctrl. Selected spectra appear in the lower-right pane.

c. Click OK. Each added spectrum is listed with asterisks at the beginning of its name 

to indicate the data is not in the current workbook.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

80 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

2. Select any other listed spectra to convert and click Add.

To remove a spectrum from the Operands pane, click it and click Remove. To remove all 

the spectra, click Clear All.

3. Select the derivative order.

4. Select the polynomial order of the derivative formula.

5. Specify the number of points in the derivative formula by dragging the slider:

6. To perform a math operation on the converted result, click Operate on Result and 

choose an operation. Otherwise, go to the next step.

Perform the operation as explained in the appropriate related topic below.

To return to the previous window, click Back.

To perform additional math operations, repeat this step.

7. To save the result in the current workbook, click Workbook and name the spectrum or 

spectra when prompted.

The data is added to the list and is available for operations.

To add the result to the list without saving it, click Temporary. Asterisks at the beginning 

of a spectrum name indicate the data is not saved.

8. Click Close to close each displayed math window.

Related Topics

Smoothing Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to Other Units

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Normalizing Scan Data

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Note To use the result in another Derivative operation, use Workbook or 

Temporary to add it to the list (see step 7), click Add to make it an operand, and 

continue with step 2.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 81

Averaging Scan Spectra

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to Other Units

Use Convert Spectra in the Math menu to convert scan data to another Y-axis format.

Y To convert scan data to another format

1. Choose Math (menu) > Convert Spectra.

The selected spectrum appears in the Operands pane.

The workbook spectra are listed at the left. To add others:

a. Click Browse.

b. Select a folder in the left pane (use the features above it to navigate), a workbook in 

the middle pane, and spectra in the upper-right pane. To select multiple spectra, hold 

down Shift or Ctrl. Selected spectra appear in the lower-right pane.

c. Click OK. Each added spectrum is listed with asterisks at the beginning of its name 

to indicate the data is not in the current workbook.

2. Select any other listed spectra to convert and click Add.

To remove a spectrum from the Operands pane, click it and click Remove. To remove all 

the spectra, click Clear All.

3. Select the desired Y-axis format.

4. To perform a math operation on the converted result, click Operate on Result and 

choose an operation. Otherwise, go to the next step.

Perform the operation as explained in the appropriate related topic below.

To return to the previous window, click Back.

To perform additional math operations, repeat this step.

5. To save the result in the current workbook, click Workbook and name the spectrum or 

spectra when prompted.

Note To use the result in another Convert Spectra operation, use Workbook or 

Temporary to add it to the list (see step 5), click Add to make it an operand, and 

continue with step 2.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

82 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The data is added to the list and is available for operations.

To add the result to the list without saving it, click Temporary. Asterisks at the beginning 

of a spectrum name indicate the data is not saved.

6. Click Close to close each displayed math window.

Related Topics

Smoothing Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Normalizing Scan Data

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Averaging Scan Spectra

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Use Add in the Math menu to add two scan spectra.

Y To add two scan spectra

1. Choose Math (menu) > Add.

The selected spectrum appears in the Operand 1 pane. To use a different listed spectrum, 

select it and click Add in the Operand 1 box.

The list includes only current workbook spectra. To add others:

a. Click Browse.

b. Select a folder in the left pane (use the features above it to navigate), a workbook in 

the middle pane, and spectra in the upper-right pane. To select multiple spectra, hold 

down Shift or Ctrl. Selected spectra appear in the lower-right pane.

c. Click OK. Each added spectrum is listed with asterisks at the beginning of its name 

to indicate the data is not in the current workbook.

2. Select the second spectrum to add and click Add in the Operand 2 box.

3. To multiply the second spectrum by a factor other than 1, drag the slider or use Factor.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 83

Type a value in the Factor text box or use its up and down arrow buttons. Use Increment

to set the amount of change these buttons make to the factor when clicked. For example, 

with Factor set to 1.000 and Increment set to 0.500, clicking the Factor up arrow button 

changes the factor to 1.500. 

4. To perform a math operation on the addition result, click Operate on Result and choose 

an operation. Otherwise, go to the next step.

Perform the operation as explained in the appropriate related topic below.

To return to the previous window, click Back.

To perform additional math operations, repeat this step.

5. To save the result in the current workbook, click Workbook and name the spectrum 

when prompted.

The data is added to the list and is available for operations.

To add the result to the list without saving it, click Temporary. Asterisks at the beginning 

of a spectrum name indicate the data is not saved.

6. Click Close to close each displayed math window.

Related Topics

Smoothing Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Normalizing Scan Data

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Averaging Scan Spectra

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

Note To use the result in another Add operation, use Workbook or Temporary to 

add it to the list (see step 5), click Add in the Operand 1 box, and continue with step 

2.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

84 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Normalizing Scan Data

Use Normalize in the Math menu to adjust the Y scale of a scan spectrum so that a selected 

data point has the desired Y value.

Y To normalize scan data

1. Choose Math (menu) > Normalize.

The selected spectrum appears in the Operands pane.

The workbook spectra are listed at the left. To add others:

a. Click Browse.

b. Select a folder in the left pane (use the features above it to navigate), a workbook in 

the middle pane, and spectra in the upper-right pane. To select multiple spectra, hold 

down Shift or Ctrl. Selected spectra appear in the lower-right pane.

c. Click OK. Each added spectrum is listed with asterisks at the beginning of its name 

to indicate the data is not in the current workbook.

2. Select any other listed spectra to normalize and click Add.

To remove a spectrum from the Operands pane, click it and click Remove. To remove all 

the spectra, click Clear All.

3. Select the desired Y value for the data point specified in the next step.

4. Select the wavelength of the data point.

5. To perform a math operation on the normalized result, click Operate on Result and 

choose an operation. Otherwise, go to the next step.

Perform the operation as explained in the appropriate related topic below.

To return to the previous window, click Back.

To perform additional math operations, repeat this step.

6. To save the result in the current workbook, click Workbook and name the spectrum or 

spectra when prompted.

The data is added to the list and is available for operations.

To add the result to the list without saving it, click Temporary. Asterisks at the beginning 

of a spectrum name indicate the data is not saved.

Note To use the result in another Normalize operation, use Workbook or 

Temporary to add it to the list (see step 6), click Add to make it an operand, and 

continue with step 2.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 85

7. Click Close to close each displayed math window.

Related Topics

Smoothing Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Converting Scan Data to Other Units

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Averaging Scan Spectra

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Use Subtract in the Math menu to subtract a scan spectrum from another.

Y To subtract a scan spectrum

1. Choose Math (menu) > Subtract.

The selected spectrum appears in the Operand 1 pane. To use a different listed spectrum, 

select it and click Add in the Operand 1 box.

The list includes only current workbook spectra. To add others:

a. Click Browse.

b. Select a folder in the left pane (use the features above it to navigate), a workbook in 

the middle pane, and spectra in the upper-right pane. To select multiple spectra, hold 

down Shift or Ctrl. Selected spectra appear in the lower-right pane.

c. Click OK. Each added spectrum is listed with asterisks at the beginning of its name 

to indicate the data is not in the current workbook.

2. Select the spectrum to subtract and click Add in the Operand 2 box.

3. To multiply the second spectrum by a factor other than 1, drag the slider or use Factor.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

86 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Type a value in the Factor text box or use its up and down arrow buttons. Use Increment

to set the amount of change these buttons make to the factor when clicked. For example, 

with Factor set to 1.000 and Increment set to 0.500, clicking the Factor up arrow button 

changes the factor to 1.500.

4. To perform a math operation on the subtraction result, click Operate on Result and 

choose an operation. Otherwise, go to the next step.

Perform the operation as explained in the appropriate related topic below.

To return to the previous window, click Back.

To perform additional math operations, repeat this step.

5. To save the result in the current workbook, click Workbook and name the spectrum 

when prompted.

The data is added to the list and is available for operations.

To add the result to the list without saving it, click Temporary. Asterisks at the beginning 

of a spectrum name indicate the data is not saved.

6. Click Close to close each displayed math window.

Related Topics

Smoothing Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Converting Scan Data to Other Units

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Averaging Scan Spectra

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

Note To use the result in another Subtract operation, use Workbook or Temporary

to add it to the list (see step 5), click Add in the Operand 1 box, and continue with 

step 2.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 87

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Use Ratio in the Math menu to divide a scan spectrum by another.

Y To ratio two scan spectra

1. Choose Math (menu) > Ratio.

The selected spectrum appears in the Operand 1 pane. To use a different listed spectrum, 

select it and click Add in the Operand 1 box.

The list includes only current workbook spectra. To add others:

a. Click Browse.

b. Select a folder in the left pane (use the features above it to navigate), a workbook in 

the middle pane, and spectra in the upper-right pane. To select multiple spectra, hold 

down Shift or Ctrl. Selected spectra appear in the lower-right pane.

c. Click OK. Each added spectrum is listed with asterisks at the beginning of its name 

to indicate the data is not in the current workbook.

2. Select the spectrum by which to divide the first and click Add in the Operand 2 box.

3. To multiply the second spectrum by a factor other than 1, drag the slider or use Factor.

Type a value in the Factor text box or use its up and down arrow buttons. Use Increment

to set the amount of change these buttons make to the factor when clicked. For example, 

with Factor set to 1.000 and Increment set to 0.500, clicking the Factor up arrow button 

changes the factor to 1.500.

4. To perform a math operation on the division result, click Operate on Result and choose 

an operation. Otherwise, go to the next step.

Perform the operation as explained in the appropriate related topic below.

To return to the previous window, click Back.

To perform additional math operations, repeat this step.

5. To save the result in the current workbook, click Workbook and name the spectrum 

when prompted.

The data is added to the list and is available for operations.

To add the result to the list without saving it, click Temporary. Asterisks at the beginning 

of a spectrum name indicate the data is not saved.

Note To use the result in another Ratio operation, use Workbook or Temporary to 

add it to the list (see step 5), click Add in the Operand 1 box, and continue with step 

2.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

88 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

6. Click Close to close each displayed math window.

Related Topics

Smoothing Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Converting Scan Data to Other Units

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Averaging Scan Spectra

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

Averaging Scan Spectra

Use Average in the Math menu to find the average of two or more scan spectra.

Y To use Average

1. Choose Math (menu) > Average.

The selected spectrum appears in the Operands pane.

The workbook spectra are listed at the left. To add others:

a. Click Browse.

b. Select a folder in the left pane (use the features above it to navigate), a workbook in 

the middle pane, and spectra in the upper-right pane. To select multiple spectra, hold 

down Shift or Ctrl. Selected spectra appear in the lower-right pane.

c. Click OK. Each added spectrum is listed with asterisks at the beginning of its name 

to indicate the data is not in the current workbook.

2. Select any other listed spectra to average and click Add.

To remove a spectrum from the Operands pane, click it and click Remove. To remove all 

the spectra, click Clear All.

3. To perform a math operation on the result, click Operate on Result and choose an 

operation. Otherwise, go to the next step.

Note A spectrum appears in the Result pane only if two or more spectra are in the 

Operands pane.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 89

Perform the operation as explained in the appropriate related topic below.

To return to the previous window, click Back.

To perform additional math operations, repeat this step.

4. To save the result in the current workbook, click Workbook and name the spectrum 

when prompted.

The data is added to the list and is available for operations.

To add the result to the list without saving it, click Temporary. Asterisks at the beginning 

of a spectrum name indicate the data is not saved.

5. Click Close to close each displayed math window.

Related Topics

Smoothing Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Converting Scan Data to Other Units

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Normalizing Scan Data

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Use Factor in the Math menu to add a constant to the Y value of scan data, subtract a 

constant, multiply by a constant or divide by a constant.

Y To use Factor

1. Choose Math (menu) > Factor.

Note To use the result in another Average operation, use Workbook or Temporary

to add it to the list (see step 4), click Add to make it an operand, and continue with 

step 2.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

90 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The selected spectrum appears in the Operands pane.

The workbook spectra are listed at the left. To add others:

a. Click Browse.

b. Select a folder in the left pane (use the features above it to navigate), a workbook in 

the middle pane, and spectra in the upper-right pane. To select multiple spectra, hold 

down Shift or Ctrl. Selected spectra appear in the lower-right pane.

c. Click OK. Each added spectrum is listed with asterisks at the beginning of its name 

to indicate the data is not in the current workbook.

2. Select any other listed spectra to operate on and click Add.

To remove a spectrum from the Operands pane, click it and click Remove. To remove all 

the spectra, click Clear All.

3. Select the arithmetic operation to perform on the Y value of every data point.

4. Specify the factor: type a value, click the up and down arrow buttons, or drag the slider.

5. To perform a math operation on the result, click Operate on Result and choose an 

operation. Otherwise, go to the next step.

Perform the operation as explained in the appropriate related topic below.

To return to the previous window, click Back.

To perform additional math operations, repeat this step.

6. To save the result in the current workbook, click Workbook and name the spectrum or 

spectra when prompted.

The data is added to the list and is available for operations.

To add the result to the list without saving it, click Temporary. Asterisks at the beginning 

of a spectrum name indicate the data is not saved.

Note To use the result in another Factor operation, use Workbook or Temporary to 

add it to the list (see step 6), click Add to make it an operand, and continue with step 

2.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 91

7. Click Close to close each displayed math window.

Related Topics

Smoothing Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Converting Scan Data to Other Units

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Normalizing Scan Data

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Averaging Scan Spectra

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Use Peak Pick in the Analyze menu to find peaks, valleys, zero crossings, or maximum and 

minimum values in a spectrum or region.

Y To locate peaks

1. Choose Analyze (menu) > Peak Pick.

2. Set the parameters and adjust the data display as desired.

Note Peaks can be found automatically after data acquisition. See Measurement Tab for 

Scan.

Parameter Description

Find Specifies whether to find peaks, valleys, both peaks and 

valleys, or maximum and minimum Y values.

Max number of peaks (or 

valleys, or peaks and valleys)

Maximum number of items to find.

Sort peaks (or valleys, or 

peaks and valleys) by

Order for labeling and listing found items in the results 

table.

Sensitivity How readily small peaks or valleys are found. To 

optimize the sensitivity, select Auto. To set it manually, 

deselect Auto and drag the slider.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

92 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To adjust the data display, use the view finder. To zoom in or move the spectrum, use the 

selection tool:

The results appear in the data display pane and the table below it:

Wavelength Range Wavelength range in which to find items. To use the 

entire range, select Full. To limit the range, deselect Full 

and type the desired limits or use the region-threshold 

tool:

Use threshold Specifies whether to find only those peaks whose Y values 

are greater than or equal to a specified value, the 

threshold. (For % transmittance, the software finds 

valleys less than or equal to the threshold.) To optimize 

the threshold value, select Auto. To set it manually, 

deselect Auto and set Threshold by typing a value or 

dragging the horizontal line in the data display.

Smooth spectrum Specifies whether or not to smooth the data before 

finding peaks or valleys. This tends to reduce the number 

of small peaks, valleys and shoulders. (For more 

information, see About Smoothing.) The (blue) 

smoothed spectrum is overlaid on the original. To 

optimize the degree of smoothing, select Auto. To adjust 

it manually, deselect Auto and drag the slider.

Parameter Description
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 93

3. Click OK.

The found peaks have labels, and the peak results are listed at the right.

The settings are saved in the workbook and will be used for measuring samples with 

Result on the Measurement tab set to Peak Pick.

Related Topics

Smoothing Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Converting Scan Data to Other Units

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Averaging Scan Spectra

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

Finding Value Level Crossings in Scan Data

Use Value Level in the Analyze menu to find the wavelengths where a spectrum crosses a 

specified ordinate value.

Results table Peak label
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

94 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To locate value level crossings

1. Choose Analyze (menu) > Value Level.

2. Set the parameters and adjust the data display as desired.

To adjust the data display, use the view finder. To zoom in or move the spectrum, use the 

selection tool:

The results appear in the data display pane and the table below it:

Note Crossings can be found automatically after data acquisition. See Measurement Tab 

for Scan.

Parameter Description

Level for crossing Specifies the ordinate (Y) value. One can also drag the horizontal 

line in the data display.

Sort crossings by Order for listing crossings in the results table.

Wavelength Range Wavelength range in which to find crossings. To use the entire 

range, select Full. To limit the range, deselect Full and type the 

desired limits or use the region-threshold tool:

Sensitivity How readily small-amplitude crossings are detected. To optimize 

the sensitivity, select Auto. To set it manually, deselect Auto and 

drag the slider. A high sensitivity finds locations where the 

spectrum crosses the horizontal line only a short distance.
2 INSIGHT Software

Operation

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 95

3. Click OK.

The found crossings have labels, and the crossing results are listed at the right.

The settings are saved in the workbook and will be used for measuring samples with 

Result on the Measurement tab set to Value Level.

Related Topics

Smoothing Scan Data

Converting Scan Data to a Derivative

Converting Scan Data to Other Units

Adding Two Scan Spectra

Subtracting a Scan Spectrum

Ratioing Two Scan Spectra

Averaging Scan Spectra

Adding, Subtracting, Multiplying or Dividing Scan Data by a Factor

Finding Peaks in Scan Data

Results table Crossing label
2 INSIGHT Software

Options

96 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Options

Applications Tab

Report Master Page Tab

Preferences Tab

Data Store Tab

Formulas and Units Tab

Applications Tab

Y To add a new group

Enter the desired group name in the Groups box and click Add.

Y To customize the current group

Drag the desired applications from the Applications list to the buttons at the right. To 

remove an application from the group, drag it from its button to the Applications list.

Y To delete the current group

Click Delete Group and then click Yes when prompted.

Y To reset the application buttons for the current group

Click Clear App Buttons and then click Yes when prompted.

Y To make custom templates available for groups other than Classic

Drag the List of Templates application to one of the top nine menu buttons.

Report Master Page Tab

These are available in Options:

Click Options to display the Applications tab in the 

right pane. Use it to add new user groups and give them 

access to particular applications. The Group drop-down 

list box shows the name of the current group.

Click Options to display the Report Master Page tab in 

the right pane. Use it to define the appearance of all 

printed reports.
2 INSIGHT Software

Options

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 97

Preferences Tab

Data Store Tab

Feature Description

Company name Enter a company name and press Enter. Select an orientation for the 

name, and use Font to specify the font.

Date Date of the report creation. Use Font to specify the font for Date and 

Time.

Time Time of the report creation. Use Font to specify the font for Time and 

Date.

Logo Select an orientation for the logo, and use Browse to locate and select a 

logo image file.

Footer text Text at the bottom of the report. Use Font to specify the font for the 

footer.

Page number Format for page numbers. Select None to not include page numbers.

Click Options to display the Preferences tab in the right 

pane.

Feature Description

Data Value Digits Specify the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to use 

for X and Y values for spectral data.

Triggering Starting data acquisition normally requires a response to a prompt 

(displayed by Measure or another action button). To start acquisition 

automatically a specified number of seconds after the prompt appears, 

select Enable auto input trigger and set the number of seconds.

Use Output trigger to specify whether and when to produce a signal 

that triggers an installed accessory to begin an operation.

Support DYMO® 

label printer

Select this to use a standalone device to print reports on various sized 

labels.

Directories The paths used for saving template files, Performance Verification 

reports, and workbooks. Type a path for each or click the button to 

specify a path.

Click Options to display the Data Store tab in the right 

pane. Use it to specify how to save workbooks, export 

data and e-mail results.
2 INSIGHT Software

Options

98 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Formulas and Units Tab

In the appropriate table, select in the Show column the items to be available.

To add an item, enter it (or the appropriate information) in the row that starts with a plus (+) 

sign.

To delete an item, right-click it and choose Delete Row. Items with a lock icon cannot be 

edited or deleted.

To return to the default selections, click Reset.

Related Topics

Quanto

Quantifying Sample Data

Performing a Quantitative Analysis

Feature Description

Workbook Save Options To be prompted to save data before acquiring it, select Data 

saved on each measure. Save Workbook and Save As Workbook 

will not be available in the File menu.

To save acquired data only by using Save Workbook or Save As 

Workbook, select Data saved only by Save Workbook in File 

menu. (A prompt to save appears when INSIGHT software is 

closed if the current workbook has not been saved.)

Convert Data Select Auto export data to automatically save acquired data 

using the selected format in the specified location. To change the 

location, type a new path or use Browse.

E-mail Select Auto e-mail result (workbook) to automatically e-mail 

the current workbook. Enter the desired recipient address, 

subject and message.

Click Options to display the Formulas and Units tab in 

the right pane. Use it to specify the default formulas, 

units and advanced equations for setting up quantitative 

analyses.
2 INSIGHT Software

System Settings

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 99

System Settings

Alignment Tab

Calibrations Tab

Lamp Tab

System Tab

Diagnostics tab

Alignment Tab

Use the Alignment tab in System Settings to view sample and reference detector intensities 

while aligning an accessory.

Y To perform an alignment

1. To measure intensities using a green light (510 nm), select Green. To use no filter, select 

White.

The correct setting depends on the installed accessory. See Accessories.

2. Set Bandwidth as desired.

The available settings depend on the instrument.

3. Click Start.

Every half second the sample and reference detector intensities are plotted and displayed 

by the Sample beam and Reference readouts.

These are available in System Settings:

Note The Diagnostics tab is for our use only.
2 INSIGHT Software

System Settings

100 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To overlay the plots instead of stacking them, deselect Stack.

The Time readout shows the elapsed time. Intensities can be measured and plotted for up 

to 15 minutes without restarting the process.

If the plot of sample detector intensity is not at the desired position for viewing, adjust 

the detector gain by dragging the Gain slider up or down.

To adjust the display, use the view finder. To zoom in, draw a box and click inside it. To 

return to full display, double-click the pane.

4. Align the accessory to achieve the desired sample detector intensity (see Accessories).

5. When finished, click Stop.

Related Topics

Calibrations Tab

Lamp Tab

System Tab

Calibrations Tab

Use the Calibrations tab in System Settings to calibrate the instrument wavelength or 

accessories. To calibrate using a particular lamp, click its Calibrate button and follow the 

instructions that appear. See Mercury Lamp for instructions for using a mercury lamp safely.

Note If the instrument has variable slit wheels, the start of intensity measurement is 

delayed while they move to their 2 nm position.
2 INSIGHT Software

Keyboard Shortcuts

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 101

Related Topics

Alignment Tab

Lamp Tab

System Tab

Lamp Tab

The Lamp tab in System Settings displays status information about the xenon lamp.

Related Topics

Alignment Tab

Calibrations Tab

System Tab

System Tab

The System tab in System Settings includes:

Related Topics

Alignment Tab

Calibrations Tab

Lamp Tab

Keyboard Shortcuts

These are available in INSIGHT software:

Feature Description

Instrument Control Switches instrument control between the Local Control option and 

INSIGHT software running on an external computer. Select the 

desired setting and respond appropriately to the message that appears.

Firmware Update Click Load Update to install the selected instrument firmware. 

Follow the instructions that appear.

Instrument Boot 

Record

Click Display to view the instrument’s power-up boot record, which 

can be saved or copied.
2 INSIGHT Software

Keyboard Shortcuts

102 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Keyboard Shortcut Description

Alt+F4 Exits INSIGHT software.

Ctrl+F (from Home) Displays Fixed.

Ctrl+Q (from Home) Displays Quant.

Ctrl+R (from Home) Displays Rate.

F1 Displays Help.

F2 Displays Home.

F4 Displays the Measure screen for the current application.

F5 Acquires zero or baseline data.

F6 Chooses the Measure button.

F7 Prints the Measure screen.

F8 Prints the report.

F9 Displays My Data.

F10 Creates a new workbook.

F11 (from Home) Displays Performance Verification.

F12 Chooses the Stop button.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Safety Considerations

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 103

Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

The EvolutionTM 200 series UV-visible spectrophotometers include three models:

• Evolution 201

• Evolution 220

• Evolution 260 Bio (includes life science applications).

Safety Considerations

Each person using the spectrophotometer should read the general safety information in the 

Site and Safety Information guide (see the documentation CD) and the instrument-specific 

safety information provided here.

Languages

Contents

• Safety Considerations

• Operating Precautions

• Spectrophotometer Basics

• Accessories

• Using the Spectrophotometer

• Maintenance

• Ordering Parts

Contents

• Safety Label Locations

• Lifting or Moving the Instrument

WARNING Do not operate this system without following the safety precautions 

described in this manual and the documentation that came with your system.

WARNING n'utilisez le système qu'en suivant les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans 

ce manuel et dans la documentation accompagnant le système.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Safety Considerations

104 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Safety Label Locations

This section shows the locations of safety labels on the spectrophotometer. Contact us if there 

are questions or problems with the safety labels. See Contacting Us.

Back view

WARNING Betreiben Sie dieses System nur unter Beachtung der Sicherheitshinweise in 

diesem Handbuch und in der im Lieferumfang des Systems enthaltenen Dokumentation.

WARNING Non utilizzare questo sistema senza seguire le norme di sicurezza 

descritte in questo manuale e nella documentazione di accompagnamento del 

sistema.

WARNING No opere este sistema sin seguir las precauciones de seguridad descritas 

en este manual y en la documentación proporcionada con el sistema.

Compliance label
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Safety Considerations

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 105

Right side view

Left side view

Related Topics

Mercury Lamp

Removing and Installing the Detector Module

UV radiation warning label (under mercury lamp access cover)

UV radiation warning label (under detector access cover)
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Operating Precautions

106 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Lifting or Moving the Instrument

To avoid risk of injury, use proper techniques when lifting or moving the instrument or other 

system components.

Operating Precautions

The spectrophotometer contains precise optical components. Handle it carefully and follow 

these precautions:

• Do not allow moisture to leak into the instrument interior.

• Wipe off spilled chemicals immediately.

• Do not drop the instrument.

• Protect the instrument from mechanical shock.

• Protect the instrument from dust.

Spectrophotometer Basics

Spectrophotometer Components

The following illustration identifies major components visible on the outside of a typical 

spectrophotometer. (Some components may not be present on all instruments.)

Hand hold

Hand hold

Contents

• Spectrophotometer Components

• Connectors

• Removable Panels

• Corrosion Protection
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 107

The z-height (distance from the bottom of the cell to the center of the light beam) for the 

spectrophotometer is 8.5 mm.

Related Topics

Opening and Closing the Sample and Reference Compartment Doors

Local Control or Computer Control

INSIGHT Software

Keypad

Touchscreen

Opening and Closing the Sample and Reference Compartment Doors

To open the sample compartment, press the button on its door. To close the compartment, 

slide the door forward until it latches.

To access the reference compartment, lift or lower the door.

Related Topics

Sample Compartment Front Panel

Tubing Access Panel

Optional touchscreen Sample compartment

Keypad

Reference compartment
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

108 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Local Control or Computer Control

The spectrophotometer can be run from the optional touchscreen (Local Control) or from a 

Windows®-compatible computer connected to the instrument (Computer Control). Local 

Control instruments include an embedded computer preloaded with software. Computer 

Control instruments must be connected to an external computer with the proper software 

installed.

Related Topics

Local Control Instruments

Computer Control Instruments

INSIGHT Software

All instruments include our INSIGHTTM software for data collection and analysis. See 

INSIGHT Software.

Keypad

All instruments include the keypad shown below. For a list of keypad functions, see Using the 

Spectrophotometer.

Related Topics

Keypad Operation

Touchscreen

The touchscreen is included only on Local Control versions of the spectrophotometer.

Related Topics

Touchscreen keyboard

Cleaning the Touchscreen

Connectors

This section shows the locations of the connectors inside and outside the spectrophotometer.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 109

Outside Cover

This illustration shows the connectors on the instrument outside cover.

Back view

Contents

• Outside Cover

• Inside the Sample Compartment

Purge

USB

USB

Computer

Power

Power switch

Hg lamp

Trigger

Label Function

Computer Dedicated USB port for connecting an external computer. See 

Computer Control Instruments.

Hg lamp Connects to optional Mercury Lamp.

Power Connects to main power cord.

Power switch System power On/Off switch.

Purge Connects to optional purge source. See Purging the Sample 

Compartment.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

110 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The system supports these USB devices:

• External USB mouse

• External USB keyboard

• Portable USB memory

• Windows-compatible USB printer

To ensure proper shielding of USB devices, install a Ferrite ring (samples provided) on the end 

of any USB cable connected to the instrument. Loop the cable once and clamp the ring over 

the loop as shown below.

Related Topics

Triggering

Trigger Connects to optional accessories that accommodate external trigger 

input or output. See Attaching Cables and Probes.

INSIGHT can be used to send a 3.3V TTL output signal that triggers 

an installed accessory to begin an operation. The signal can be sent at the 

start or end of a measurement. See Options > Preferences > Triggering.

INSIGHT accepts a contact closure input trigger (equivalent to pressing 

Run on the instrument keypad).

USB General purpose USB connectors (Local Control systems only). See 

below for proper shielding of USB cables.

Label Function

WARNING Avoid shock hazard. Power off the spectrophotometer and disconnect the 

power cord from the wall outlet or power strip before disconnecting the power cord from 

the spectrophotometer.

Note The spectrophotometer does not support high power USB devices.

Ferrite ring
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 111

Purging the Sample Compartment

Mercury Lamp

Attaching Cables and Probes

Computer Control Instruments

Inside the Sample Compartment

This illustration identifies the connectors inside the sample compartment.

Related Topics

Installing a Smart Accessory

Removable Panels

This section covers panels that can be removed to allow access to features on the instrument.

Smart Accessory 

connector

Contents

• Sample Compartment Front Panel

• Tubing Access Panel

• Mercury Lamp Access Cover

• Detector Access Cover

• Detector Access Panel
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

112 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Sample Compartment Front Panel

To remove the front panel, open the sample compartment door and then pull the panel 

forward and up to free it.

To replace the panel, align the tab on the bottom edge with the slot in the instrument cover 

and press the panel in place.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Installing a Liquid Thermostatted Accessory

Installing a Smart Accessory

Tubing Access Panel

To access external ports for routing fluid from a recirculator to the instrument, remove the 

panel below the sample compartment.

Removable panel

Tab
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 113

Internal fluid ports for routing fluid from the instrument to an installed accessory are located 

inside the sample compartment.

The connectors fit 1/4-inch internal diameter tubing. An adapter may be required to connect 

the tubing to the accessory or recirculator. Purchase adapters separately.

Cords and cables for installed accessories can also be routed behind this panel. Push the cord 

through the foam and the opening below it. The panel itself can be removed temporarily to 

accommodate a large connector. To remove the panel, loosen the screw.

Related Topics

Installing a Liquid Thermostatted Accessory

Mercury Lamp Access Cover

Languages

External fluid ports

Internal fluid ports Screw

Foam

WARNING Avoid UV radiation hazard in the mercury lamp compartment. Protect eyes 

and skin from exposure.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

114 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Lift the cover to install the optional Mercury Lamp.

Right side view

Related Topics

Mercury Lamp

Detector Access Cover

Some accessories require removing the instrument detector module. The module is beneath 

the detector access cover shown below. Avoid UV radiation hazard in the detector 

compartment. Protect eyes and skin from exposure.

AVERTISSEMENT Évitez tout risque de rayonnement à l’intérieur du compartiment de la 

lampe à vapeur de mercure. Protéger vos yeux et votre peau de toute exposition au 

rayonnement.

WARNUNG Gefährliche UV-Strahlung im Gehäuse der Quecksilberlampe ist zu 

vermeiden. Augen und Haut müssen vor der Strahlung geschützt werden. 

AVVERTENZA Evitare il rischio di radiazione UV nel vano della lampada al mercurio. 

Proteggere occhi e pelle dall’esposizione.

ADVERTENCIA Evite el riesgo de radiación ultravioleta en el compartimento de la 

lámpara de mercurio. Proteja sus ojos y la piel de la exposición.

Mercury lamp access cover
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 115

Languages

Left side view

Related Topics

Removing and Installing the Detector Module

Detector Access Panel

CAUTION Safety glasses with side shields or goggles with solid side pieces are the only 

equipment that provides adequate eye protection against direct and reflected UV light.

CAUTION Seules les lunettes de sécurité avec écrans latéraux ou les lunettes 

protectrices avec parties latérales solides protègent les yeux de façon adéquate 

contre la lumière UV directe et réfléchie.

CAUTION Sicherheitsbrillen mit seitlichem Schutz bzw. Schutzbrillen mit festen 

Seitenteilen bieten als einzige Ausrüstungsgegenstände adäquaten Schutz der 

Augen gegen direkte und reflektierte UV-Strahlung.

CAUTION Gli occhiali protettivi con schermi laterali o con schermi laterali 

monolente sono l'unica attrezzatura che fornisce un'adeguata protezione degli 

occhi dalla luce UV diretta e riflessa.

CAUTION Las gafas protectoras con protección lateral de seguridad o con piezas 

laterales sólidas son el único equipo que proporciona la protección para los ojos 

adecuada contra la luz ultravioleta directa y reflejada.

Detector access cover
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

116 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Detector Access Panel

To remove the panel between the detector and sample compartment, remove the sample 

compartment window and then loosen the thumbscrew.

To replace the panel, hook the tabs on the bottom edge over the slots in the sample 

compartment side wall and tighten the thumbscrew.

Related Topics

Removing and Installing the Detector Module

Detector Access Cover

Installing Sample Compartment Windows

Corrosion Protection

The spectrophotometer contains precise optical components that may be damaged by a 

corrosive environment. Before using the instrument to analyze volatile, corrosive or caustic 

samples, install the optional sample compartment windows and, if necessary, purge the sample 

compartment.

Related Topics

Installing Sample Compartment Windows

Purging the Sample Compartment

Installing Sample Compartment Windows

The optional windows attach to the sample compartment side walls using magnets.

Removable panel

Thumbscrew

Window (optional)
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Spectrophotometer Basics

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 117

Related Topics

Purging the Sample Compartment

Purging the Sample Compartment

Purging the sample compartment removes moisture from the sampling area for subambient 

temperature-controlled measurements. When purging the instrument, install sample 

compartment windows in addition to purge.

Related Topics

Installing Sample Compartment Windows

Selecting a Purge Gas

Installing Purge

Selecting a Purge Gas

Use dry air or dry nitrogen to reduce or eliminate condensation. The purge gas must be free of 

moisture, oil and other reactive materials. To remove particulate matter and oil, install a 

10-micrometer filter.

Languages

NOTICE The warranty does not cover damage to internal optics or electronics caused by 

failure to use sample compartment windows.

Sample compartment window (2)

WARNING Never use a flammable gas to purge the instrument.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Accessories

118 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Installing Sample Compartment Windows

Installing Purge

Installing Purge

Use 1/4-inch internal diameter tubing to connect a purge gas source to the purge fitting on 

the back of the spectrophotometer.

Related Topics

Installing Sample Compartment Windows

Selecting a Purge Gas

Accessories

Standard Cell Holders

The instrument includes one sample and one reference cell holder. For a list of optional cell 

holders and other accessories, see Accessories.

Related Topics

10 mm Rectangular Sample Cell Holder

AVERTISSEMENT N'utilisez jamais de gaz inflammable pour purger l'instrument.

WARNUNG Verwenden Sie niemals entflammbares Gas zum Spülen des Instru¬ments.

AVVERTENZA Non utilizzare mai un gas infiammabile per spurgare lo strumento.

ADVERTENCIA Nunca use un gas inflamable para purgar el instrumento.

Contents

• Standard Cell Holders

• Installing a Manual Accessory

• Installing a Smart Accessory

• Installing a Liquid Thermostatted Accessory

• Installing a Reference Cell Holder
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Accessories

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 119

Rectangular Reference Cell Holder

10 mm Rectangular Sample Cell Holder

This single-cell holder is mounted on the standard baseplate and accommodates standard 

10 mm pathlength cells. See Installing a Manual Accessory.

Use the cell lifter to raise the cell for easy removal. This cell holder allows fine adjustment of 

the vertical and horizontal position of the cell. This feature is useful for aligning reduced 

volume and microcuvettes with the light beam. See z-height.

Related Topics

Rectangular Reference Cell Holder

Sample Position Cell Holders

Reference Cell Holders

Spectrophotometer Z-height

Rectangular Reference Cell Holder

For measurements with a reference sample, install a reference cell holder in the reference 

position. See Installing a Reference Cell Holder.

The standard reference holder accommodates rectangular reference cells with these 

pathlengths: 10 mm, 20 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 100 mm.

Cell lifter and vertical alignment

Horizontal alignment
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Accessories

120 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

10 mm Rectangular Sample Cell Holder

Sample Position Cell Holders

Reference Cell Holders

Installing a Manual Accessory

Manual sampling accessories are mounted on a common baseplate. The kinematic mount 

ensures correct alignment of the accessory within the instrument.

It is not necessary to power off the instrument while installing or removing a manual 

accessory.

Sample compartment top view

Y To install a manual accessory

1. Open the sample compartment door. See Opening and Closing the Sample and 

Reference Compartment Doors.

Alignment pins

Toggle

A B
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Accessories

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 121

2. Remove any accessory from the compartment (see the instructions below).

3. Position the accessory so the two alignment holes on its baseplate fit over pins A and B in 

the sample compartment.

4. Gently push down on the front edge of the baseplate until it snaps in place under the 

toggle.

5. Close the sample compartment door. See Opening and Closing the Sample and Reference 

Compartment Doors.

For operating instructions and installation details, see the accessory name under Accessories.

Y To remove a manual accessory

1. Use the handle or finger hole on the accessory baseplate to release the plate from the 

toggle.

2. Lift the plate off the alignment pins and remove the accessory from the sample 

compartment.

Related Topics

Installing a Liquid Thermostatted Accessory

Installing a Smart Accessory

Installing a Reference Cell Holder

Installing a Smart Accessory

Smart Accessories include cell changers and sample holders that feature auto recognition, 

smart alignment and serial number reporting. Smart Accessories ensure software methods are 

properly configured.

These accessories install in the sample compartment. A connector under the accessory 

baseplate provides data communication and power.

It is not necessary to power off the instrument while installing or removing a Smart Accessory.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Accessories

122 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Sample compartment top view

Y To install a Smart Accessory

1. Open the sample compartment door. See Opening and Closing the Sample and 

Reference Compartment Doors.

2. Remove the sample compartment front panel. See Sample Compartment Front Panel.

3. Remove any cell holder or accessory. See To remove a Smart Accessory.

4. Insert the accessory.

a. Grasp the accessory by the handles and lower it into the sample compartment 

aligning the connector under the baseplate with the connector in the sample 

compartment floor.

Use the alignment pins on either side of the connector as guides.

Alignment pins

Toggle

A B

Smart Accessory connector

Alignment pins
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Accessories

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 123

b. Line up the two holes at the back of the accessory with pins A and B in the sample 

compartment.

c. Press down on the front of the accessory to secure the connection.

The software displays a prompt to initialize the accessory.

Languages

Alignment pins

Smart Accessory connector

Smart Accessory

Connector (under baseplate)

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory 

during initialization.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. Gardez vos mains, ainsi que tout objet, à 

l’écart de l’accessoire pendant l’initialisation.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während der 

Initialisierung vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’inizializzazione.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos lejos del alcance 

del accesorio durante la inicialización.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Accessories

124 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

5. Replace the sample compartment front panel. See Sample Compartment Front Panel.

6. Close the sample compartment door. See Opening and Closing the Sample and Reference 

Compartment Doors.

7. Click OK to initialize the accessory.

Initialization reads information about the accessory and, for cell changers, moves it to 

position 1.

For operating instructions and installation details, see the accessory name under Accessories.

Y To remove a Smart Accessory

1. Open the sample compartment door. See Opening and Closing the Sample and 

Reference Compartment Doors.

2. Remove the sample compartment front panel. See Sample Compartment Front Panel.

3. Grasp the handles and pull the accessory up and out of the sample compartment.

The software confirms the accessory has been removed.

4. Replace the sample compartment front panel. See Sample Compartment Front Panel.

5. Close the sample compartment door. See Opening and Closing the Sample and Reference 

Compartment Doors.

Related Topics

Installing a Liquid Thermostatted Accessory

Installing a Manual Accessory

Installing a Reference Cell Holder

Installing a Liquid Thermostatted Accessory

A liquid thermostatted accessory has ports and internal chambers for circulating fluids 

through the unit for temperature-controlled measurements. Other accessories circulate fluids 

to cool heated components.

The Recirculator Tubing Kit provides parts for connecting an accessory to a fluid recirculator.

Y To install a thermostatted accessory

1. Install the accessory.

See Installing a Manual Accessory or Installing a Smart Accessory.

2. Remove the tubing access panel. See Tubing Access Panel.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Accessories

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 125

3. Use 1/4-inch internal diameter tubing to connect the water supply or recirculator to the 

external fluid ports on the instrument.

If the connectors on the recirculator are a different size, use a tubing adapter.

4. Use additional tubing and adapters (not included), if necessary, to connect the fluid ports 

inside the sample compartment to the ports on the accessory.

For a cell changer, set the changer to position 1 before connecting the tubing to the ports 

on the accessory. Use just enough tubing to allow the cell changer to move through all 

possible positions. This requires approximately 10 inches (25 cm) of tubing for each port.

Related Topics

Installing a Smart Accessory

Installing a Manual Accessory

Installing a Reference Cell Holder

Note Ensure the tubing does not obstruct the light beam or prevent the sample 

compartment door from closing. If necessary, secure the tubing using the supplied 

clips.

External fluid ports

Internal fluid ports
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Using the Spectrophotometer

126 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Installing a Reference Cell Holder

Y To install a reference cell holder

1. Open the reference compartment cover. See Opening and Closing the Sample and 

Reference Compartment Doors.

2. Grasp the cell holder by the handle and lower it into the reference compartment.

3. Insert the pin in the alignment hole and press the holder in place.

4. Close the reference compartment cover.

For operating instructions, see Reference Cell Holders.

Related Topics

Installing a Smart Accessory

Installing a Manual Accessory

Installing a Liquid Thermostatted Accessory

Using the Spectrophotometer

This section explains how to set up a Computer Control or Local Control spectrophotometer 

and perform basic operations using the keypad.

Computer Control Instruments

Computer Control instruments must be connected to an external computer with the proper 

software installed.

Handle

Contents

• Computer Control Instruments

• Local Control Instruments
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Using the Spectrophotometer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 127

All instrument features can be run from the computer using our INSIGHT software. Basic 

operations such as powering the spectrophotometer on and off, measuring a sample or 

baseline and running predefined macros can also be performed from the instrument keypad 

(see Keypad Operation).

Related Topics

Setting up a Computer Control Instrument

Turning off a Computer Control Instrument

Local Control Instruments

Setting up a Computer Control Instrument

Y To set up a Computer Control instrument

1. Connect the supplied USB cable to the Computer port on the back of the 

spectrophotometer.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the USB port on the back of the computer.

3. Turn on the spectrophotometer main power switch (on the back panel).

4. If the main power switch is already on, press the Power button on the keypad.

Wait for the system to initialize. This may take several minutes. The power indicator on 

the keypad stops blinking when initialization is complete.

5. Turn on the remote computer.

6. Double-click the INSIGHT desktop icon to start the software.

Related Topics

Turning off a Computer Control Instrument

Local Control Instruments

Turning off a Computer Control Instrument

Y To turn off the instrument

1. Close INSIGHT software.

2. Hold down the Power button on the keypad for 4 seconds.

Note If the instrument fails to initialize, the power indicator blinks rapidly. Contact us.

Tip For routine use, leave the power switch on the instrument back panel in the On 

position and use the Power button on the keypad to turn the instrument on and off (press 

and hold the keypad Power button 4 seconds to power off).
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Using the Spectrophotometer

128 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

3. If necessary, turn off the spectrophotometer main power switch (on the back panel).

Related Topics

Setting up a Computer Control Instrument

Local Control Instruments

Local Control Instruments

Local Control instruments include a touchscreen and an embedded computer preloaded with 

INSIGHT software. Follow these steps to set up a Local Control instrument to run from the 

touchscreen or from a remote computer.

All instrument features can be run from the touchscreen or remote computer. Basic operations 

such as powering the spectrophotometer on and off, measuring a sample or baseline and 

running predefined macros can also be performed from the instrument keypad (see Keypad 

Operation).

Related Topics

Setting up a Local Control instrument for touchscreen operation

Setting up a Local Control instrument for remote operation

Turning off a Local Control Instrument

Computer Control Instruments

Setting up a Local Control instrument for touchscreen operation

Y To set up a Local Control instrument (no computer connected to the instrument)

1. Turn on the spectrophotometer main power switch (on the back panel).

2. Press the Power button on the keypad.

Wait for the system to initialize. The power indicator on the keypad stops blinking when 

initialization is complete. INSIGHT software starts automatically and appears on the 

touchscreen.

Related Topics

Setting up a Local Control instrument for remote operation

Turning off a Local Control Instrument

Tip For routine use, leave the power switch on the instrument back panel in the On 

position and use the Power button on the keypad to turn the instrument on and off.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Using the Spectrophotometer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 129

Computer Control Instruments

Touchscreen keyboard

Setting up a Local Control instrument for remote operation

Y To set up a Local Control instrument to run from a remote computer

1. Connect the supplied USB cable to the Computer port on the back of the 

spectrophotometer.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the USB port on the back of the computer.

3. Turn on the spectrophotometer main power switch (on the back panel).

4. Press the Power button on the keypad.

Wait for the system to initialize. The power indicator on the keypad stops blinking when 

initialization is complete. INSIGHT software starts automatically and appears on the 

touchscreen.

5. Make sure the remote computer is on.

6. Do one of the following:

• Hold down the Function 4 and Function 2 keys on the instrument keypad for 

4 seconds.

• From the INSIGHT software displayed on the touchscreen, choose System Settings 

> System. In the Instrument Control group, select Computer.

7. Double-click the INSIGHT desktop icon on the remote computer to start the software.

Related Topics

Setting up a Local Control instrument for touchscreen operation

Turning off a Local Control Instrument

Computer Control Instruments

Note To return control to the touchscreen, from the INSIGHT software displayed on the 

remote computer:

1. Do one of the following:

• Choose System Settings > System. In the Instrument Control group, select

Instrument Local.

• Hold down the Function 4 and Function 1 keys on the instrument keypad for 

4 seconds.

2. Double-click the INSIGHT desktop icon on the touchscreen to start the software.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Using the Spectrophotometer

130 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Turning off a Local Control Instrument

Y To turn off the instrument

1. Close INSIGHT software.

2. Press the Power button on the keypad.

3. Respond to the prompt to shut down Windows software.

4. If necessary, turn off the spectrophotometer main power switch (on the back panel).

Related Topics

Setting up a Local Control instrument for touchscreen operation

Setting up a Local Control instrument for remote operation

Computer Control Instruments

Keypad Operation

Use the keypad to perform the following operations.

Tip For routine use, leave the power switch on the instrument back panel in the On 

position and use the Power button on the keypad to turn the instrument off.

Button Label Function

Enter Confirm highlighted choices in menus and text entry boxes.

Run Perform the measurements specified using the current settings.

When the Loading Guide is displayed, pressing Run is equivalent 

to clicking the OK button in the software.

Stop Stop the current operation.

When the Loading Guide is displayed, pressing Stop is equivalent 

to clicking the Cancel button in the software.

Zero/Base Perform a zero measurement or baseline scan.

Power Turn the instrument on or off (press and hold 4 seconds to power 

off).

Function Start an assigned program or CUE script. See Assigning CUE 

Scripts to Function Keys. Use the CUE application to edit scripts. 

See the CUE on-line help for details.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Maintenance

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 131

Keypad Shortcuts

Maintenance

Routine Maintenance

Clean the instrument regularly using approved methods (wipe off spilled chemicals 

immediately).

Related Topics

Cleaning the Instrument

Cleaning the Touchscreen

Removing and Installing the Detector Module

Cleaning the Instrument

Clean the exterior of the instrument and the sample and reference compartment interior 

periodically. These compartments have a port to allow small amounts of liquid to drain from 

the instrument.

To clean the touchscreen, see Cleaning the Touchscreen.

Action Keypad Shortcut

For Local Control instruments:

• Switch INSIGHT control from touchscreen 

to remote computer

• Switch INSIGHT control from remote 

computer to touchscreen

Function 4/Function 2 

(hold down 4 seconds)

Function 4/Function 1 

(hold down 4 seconds)

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Cleaning the Instrument

• Cleaning the Touchscreen

• Removing and Installing the Detector Module

NOTICE Do not allow moisture to leak into the instrument interior.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Maintenance

132 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To clean the instrument exterior and the sample or reference compartment interior

1. Use a lint-free cloth dampened with a weak solution of detergent and water to wipe the 

surface as necessary.

2. Repeat using a cloth dampened with plain water.

3. Dry the surface with another cloth.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Cleaning the Touchscreen

Removing and Installing the Detector Module

Cleaning the Touchscreen

Clean the instrument touchscreen as needed to remove dust, fingerprints and other materials.

Y To clean the touchscreen

1. Press the Power button on the keypad to turn off the spectrophotometer.

2. Wipe the screen gently with a soft, lint-free cloth dampened (not wet) with distilled 

water.

To remove stubborn materials or oil, use a standard screen cleaner kit that includes 

antistatic wipes. Spray a little solution on the wipe and rub it gently across the screen.

3. Dry the screen with a clean, lint-free cloth.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Cleaning the Instrument

Removing and Installing the Detector Module

Removing and Installing the Detector Module

Some accessories have a dedicated detector and require removing the instrument detector 

module before they can be installed.

Avoid UV radiation hazard in the detector compartment. Protect eyes and skin from 

exposure.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Maintenance

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 133

Languages

Y To remove the detector module

1. Turn off the spectrophotometer main power switch (on the back panel).

2. Remove the detector access cover. See Detector Access Cover.

3. Loosen the thumbscrew that attaches the detector module to the instrument, and 

carefully lift the module straight up.

CAUTION Safety glasses with side shields or goggles with solid side pieces are the only 

equipment that provides adequate eye protection against direct and reflected UV light.

CAUTION Seules les lunettes de sécurité avec écrans latéraux ou les lunettes 

protectrices avec parties latérales solides protègent les yeux de façon adéquate 

contre la lumière UV directe et réfléchie.

CAUTION Sicherheitsbrillen mit seitlichem Schutz bzw. Schutzbrillen mit festen 

Seitenteilen bieten als einzige Ausrüstungsgegenstände adäquaten Schutz der 

Augen gegen direkte und reflektierte UV-Strahlung.

CAUTION Gli occhiali protettivi con schermi laterali o con schermi laterali 

monolente sono l'unica attrezzatura che fornisce un'adeguata protezione degli 

occhi dalla luce UV diretta e riflessa.

CAUTION Las gafas protectoras con protección lateral de seguridad o con piezas 

laterales sólidas son el único equipo que proporciona la protección para los ojos 

adecuada contra la luz ultravioleta directa y reflejada.

NOTICE Avoid touching the connector pins on the bottom of the detector module.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Maintenance

134 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

.

4. Replace the detector access cover.

5. Store the detector module in a secure, dust-free location.

Y To install the detector module

1. Turn off the spectrophotometer. See Using the Spectrophotometer.

2. Remove the detector access cover. See Detector Access Cover.

3. Unplug the accessory detector cable if necessary.

4. Position the detector module so its thumbscrew faces left.

5. Line up the connector on the bottom of the detector module with the connector in the 

detector compartment, and then press down on the module to secure the connection.

6. Tighten the thumbscrew by hand.

7. Replace the detector access cover.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Cleaning the Instrument

Cleaning the Touchscreen

Thumbscrew

Detector module

Thumbscrew
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Ordering Parts

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 135

Detector Access Cover

Detector Access Panel

Ordering Parts

To order replacement parts, see Contacting Us.
3 Evolution 200 Series Spectrophotometers

Ordering Parts

136 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 137

4

Life Science Applications

About the Life Science Applications

There are two types of protein assay methods included, direct UV and colorimetric assays. 

The colorimetric assays include several assays that are similar. Likewise, the direct protein 

methods are also very similar. Use the table below to find the appropriate assay procedure. 

Click the links to access complete information about the assays.

Below are the default values for the methods. Wavelengths are in nanometers.

Contents

• About the Life Science Applications

• Nucleic Acid

• Nucleic Acid Labels

• Protein A280

• Proteins and Labels

• Pierce BCA

• Protein Bradford

• Pierce Modified Lowry

• Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Direct UV Assays Colorimetric Assays

Protein A280 Protein A280

Proteins and Labels Protein Bradford

Pierce BCA

Pierce Modified Lowry

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Protein Biuret
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

138 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

This page is intentionally blank.

Nucleic Acid

Overview

See Unique Screen Features for information about the results the application calculates. See 

Nucleic Acid Concentration Calculations for information about the calculations.

Method

Analytical 

Wavelength 

(Quant)

Reference 

Wavelength

Start 

(Scan)

Stop 

(Scan) Bandwidth

Integration 

Time (sec) 

(Fixed, Scan)

Data 

Interval 

(Scan)

Scan 

Speed 

(nm/min)

Nucleic Acid 340 220 350 1.0 1.0, 0.08 0.50 375

Nucleic Acid 

Labels

340 220 850 1.0 1.0, 0.16 1.00 375

Protein A280 340 220 850 1.0 1.0, 0.08 0.5 375

Proteins & Labels 340 220 850 1.0 1.0, 0.16 1.0 375

Pierce BCA 562 340 750 450 1.0 1.0, 0.12 1.00 500

Protein Bradford 595 340 750 450 1.0 1.0, 0.12 1.00 500

Pierce Modified 

Lowry

750 405 900 600 1.0 1.5, 0.12 1.00 500

Pierce 660 nm 

Protein Assay

660 340 850 550 1.0 1.5, 0.12 1.00 500

Protein Biuret 550 340 750 450 1.0 1.0, 0.12 1.00 500

Contents

• Overview

• Nucleic Acid Concentration Calculations

• Application Settings

• Unique Screen Features

• Making Nucleic Acid Measurements

• Oligo Calculator

Use the Nucleic Acid application to measure nucleic acid 

samples for concentration and purity.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 139

Related Topics

Nucleic Acid Concentration Calculations

Application Settings

Unique Screen Features

Making Nucleic Acid Measurements

Oligo Calculator

Nucleic Acid Concentration Calculations

The Nucleic Acid application is used for determining the concentration and purity of nucleic 

acid samples. The nucleic acid concentration is determined by multiplying the absorbance at 

260 nm by a factor (default, 50). This factor is essentially the extinction coefficient in units of 

ng-cm/ml. Using this coefficient gives the manipulated equation

where c is the nucleic acid concentration in ng/microliter, A is the absorbance in AU, ε is the 

wavelength-dependent extinction coefficient in ng-cm/microliter, and is the pathlength in 

centimeters. 

The generally accepted extinction coefficients for nucleic acids are:

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Unique Screen Features

Making Nucleic Acid Measurements

Oligo Calculator

Nucleic Acid Purity Measurements

The 260/280 nm ratio assay determines the purity of nucleic acids based on the 260/280 

ratio.

Coefficient Value

Double-stranded DNA 50 ng-cm/μl

Single-stranded DNA 33 ng-cm/μl

RNA 40 ng-cm/μl

c = (A * ε )/ l
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

140 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The 260/230 ratio assay determines the purity of nucleic acids in the presence of phenol, 

which absorbs strongly at 230 nm.

A ratio of approximately 1.8 is generally accepted as “pure” for DNA, approximately 2.0 for 

RNA. If either ratio is appreciably lower, protein, phenol or other contaminants that absorb 

strongly near 280 nm may be present.

The 260/230 values for a “pure” nucleic acid are often higher than the respective 260/280 

values and are commonly in the range 1.8 to 2.2. If the ratio is appreciably lower, copurified 

contaminants may be present.

Application Settings

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid

Related Topics

Overview

Nucleic Acid Concentration Calculations

Unique Screen Features

Making Nucleic Acid Measurements

Oligo Calculator

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid

To set data acquisition parameters for a Nucleic Acid

workbook, click Settings to access: 

Click Settings in Nucleic Acid to display the Type tab in 

the right pane.

Feature Description

Name Application name.

Description (optional) Description of the template.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 141

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid

Nucleic Acid Type Type of analysis to perform.

ssDNA is for single-stranded DNA.

Oligo DNA and Oligo RNA use the appropriate extinction 

coefficient based on entered DNA or RNA base sequence. The 

entry will appear on the Oligo Calculator tab.

For Custom, enter a factor (extinction coefficient) by which to 

multiply the measured absorbance. The factor used for other types 

cannot be changed.

Pathlength Distance the light travels through the sample.

Feature Description

Click Settings in Nucleic Acid to display the 

Measurement tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength Wavelength(s) to use for the analysis.

Correction Specifies bichromatic normalization of the absorbance data.

To use uncorrected data, select None. Without baseline correction, 

spectra may be offset from the baseline. If this offset is significant, the 

calculated protein concentration may be higher than the true value.

Single point subtracts the sample absorbance at the entered 

wavelength from the absorbance at every data point.

Sloping baseline draws a line between the data points at the entered 

wavelengths, finds its absorbance value at the analytical wavelength, 

and subtracts it from the measured absorbance.

Component name Component to quantify.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

142 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

For selecting or defining formulas for additional data processing, with 

the results appearing in the analysis report. The formulas are written 

in a form similar to that used in a command script language, with 

constants, mathematical functions, etc. All functions are not 

case-sensitive. Spaces are not allowed between a function name and 

“(”. After adding formulas, edit their information in the formula table 

as desired. To delete a table row, right-click it and choose Delete Row. 

Some information in the table cannot be modified or deleted.

Instructions:

Y To add one or more predefined formulas

1. Click Select.

2. For each desired formula, select it in the list and click Add.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings in Options.

3. Click Close.

Y To define a formula

1. Click Build.

2. To enter a formula in its entirety, set Equation type to User 

defined and type the equation. To use a provided formula, select 

it and enter values for the variables.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings.

3. Click OK.

4. For selected provided formulas, enter a name and concentration 

unit in the table.

The available units depend on the Formulas & Units tab settings.

Feature Description
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 143

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid

Related Topics

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid

Click Settings in Nucleic Acid to display the Instrument 

tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Mode Specifies Scan or Fixed data acquisition.

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

Start wavelength and End 

wavelength (Scan only)

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring 

data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can 

improve the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral 

bandwidth decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral 

features.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data 

interval (for scanning measurements) or at each measured 

wavelength (for fixed-wavelength measurements). Increasing the 

integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but reduces 

the scan speed.

Data interval (Scan only) Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed (Scan only) Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.

Estimated time (Scan 

only)

Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration 

time increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely 

with scan speed.

Table of wavelengths 

(Fixed only)

Shows the analysis wavelength(s) entered on the Measurement 

tab.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

144 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements. See Instrument Status 

Monitors.

Related Topics

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid

Related Topics

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid

Click Settings in Nucleic Acid to display the Accessories 

tab in the right pane. The available parameters depend 

on the installed accessories. See Accessories for details.

Click Settings in Nucleic Acid to display the Samples 

tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the analysis.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended. For example, the names of three sample spectra 

using the base name “dye” would be dye1, dye2 and dye3.

Sample averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same sample or from multiple samples. To 

average multiple measurements of the same sample, select Replicate

and set Number of replicates to the total number of measurements. 

To average values from two or three samples, select Duplicate or 

Triplicate, respectively.

Use concentration 

limits

Displays high and low limit lines on the Run Chart tab to show 

whether sample concentrations are within the specified limits.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 145

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid

Unique Screen Features

The spectral display shows data for the current sample. 

These features are to the right of the spectral display:

The right pane in Measure Nucleic Acid displays 

workbook parameters specific to the application. Task 

buttons in the left pane are described in Task Buttons.

Feature Description

Type Type of analysis to perform. To the right is the factor value from the 

Type tab.

Conc. Concentration determined by multiplying the absorbance at 260 nm 

by a factor (default, 50) after correction is applied. Beer’s law is used to 

calculate the nucleic acid concentration (see Nucleic Acid 

Concentration Calculations).

A260 Absorbance at 260 nm.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

146 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Overview

Nucleic Acid Concentration Calculations

Application Settings

Making Nucleic Acid Measurements

Oligo Calculator

Making Nucleic Acid Measurements

While performing this procedure, click here for information about features to the right of the 

spectral display.

Y To measure nucleic acids

1. Click Measure Nucleic Acid in Nucleic Acid.

2. Click Measure.

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

Use the appropriate buffer for the blank, generally the same buffer used to prepare or 

dissolve the sample. The buffer should be the same pH and of a similar ionic strength as 

the sample solution.

A280 Absorbance at 280 nm.

260/280 Ratio of sample absorbance at 260 nm and 280 nm, used to assess the 

purity of DNA and RNA. A ratio of about 1.8 is generally accepted as 

“pure” for DNA, about 2.0 for RNA. If either ratio is appreciably 

lower, protein, phenol or other contaminants that absorb strongly 

near 280 nm may be present. See Nucleic Acid Purity Measurements

for more information.

260/230 Ratio of absorbance at 260 nm and 230 nm, a secondary measure of 

nucleic acid purity.

Feature Description

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

click the Measure action button instead and skip to step 3.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 147

4. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

5. If only one sample will be measured, insert it.

6. Click Continue.

7. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples tab, horizontal limit 

lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:

To copy this plot, right-click it and choose Copy to Clipboard.

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

sample selected in the table. (Right-click the data to access commands for customizing the 

display, including adding annotation. See Data Display for more information.)

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid

148 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Overview

Nucleic Acid Concentration Calculations

Application Settings

Unique Screen Features

Data Display

Oligo Calculator

Oligo Calculator

Y To use Oligo Calculator 

1. Enter a base sequence on the Oligo Calculator tab.

More:

Use:

• The buttons below the Base Sequence box.

• The A, C, G, T and U keys on the keyboard.

• Copy and paste a base sequence (A, C, G, T and U only) from another application.

To clear the sequence, click Clear. Individual bases can be deleted only manually.

2. Select the nucleic acid type to analyze.

3. Select the degree of phosphorylation if applicable: mono-phosphate for DNA; mono- or 

tri-phosphate for RNA.

4. Select Double-stranded if applicable. The complementary base sequence will be 

included in the analysis.

Use Oligo Calculator to calculate molecular weight, 

extinction coefficients, concentration factors and 

melting points for specific nucleic acid sequences. 

Clicking this task button displays:

Tab Description

Oligo Calculator For entering sequences of interest and selecting appropriate sample type 

variables.

Melting Displays the calculated melting points of a DNA strand. Available only 

for DNA sequences.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 149

5. Enter the molecular weights of any additions to the base sequence in the Modification

box.

The calculated results appear:

Y To calculate the melting point of a DNA sequence

1. Enter the base sequence on the Oligo Calculator tab.

2. Enter appropriate values on the Melting tab:

The calculated results appear:

Nucleic Acid Labels

Result Description

Molecular weight Calculated base sequence molecular weight.

Molar extinction 

coefficient

Calculated 260 nm extinction coefficient in ng-cm/microliter.

Concentration factor Factor, based on the extinction coefficient, used to calculate the 

concentration of the base sequence.

Number of bases Number of bases in the entered sequence.

% GC Percentage of the total number of bases made up by guanine 

and cytosine.

Parameter Description

Oligo molarity Concentration of the Oligo in molar units.

Cation molarity Concentration of cations in the sample.

% Formamide Percentage concentration of formamide in the sample.

Result Description

Salt-adjusted Calculated melting point of the base sequence, corrected for the 

concentration of cation in the sample. This method does not 

account for the effect of interaction between neighboring bases.

Nearest-neighbor Melting point of the base sequence when the effect of interaction 

between neighboring bases is taken into account.

Contents
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

150 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Overview

Related Topics

Dye/Chromophore Editor

Application Settings

Unique Screen Features

Making Nucleic Acid Labels Measurements

Oligo Calculator

Dye/Chromophore Editor

To enter a new dye, type its information in the appropriate cells of the bottom row of the table 

and select a unit. Refer to the dye manufacturer for appropriate correction factors. The 

260 nm corrections will be used for nucleic acid sample concentration calculations. Entered 

information is saved automatically.

To delete a user-defined dye, right-click its row and choose Delete Row. Predefined dyes, 

identified by the lock icon, cannot be edited or deleted.

• Overview

• Dye/Chromophore Editor

• Application Settings

• Unique Screen Features

• Making Nucleic Acid Labels Measurements

• Oligo Calculator

Use the Nucleic Acid Labels application to measure 

nucleic acid samples for concentration and purity.

Use the Dye Chromophore Editor to select predefined 

dyes, modify existing dyes for protocols, or enter new 

dyes.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 151

Application Settings

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Related Topics

Overview

Dye/Chromophore Editor

Unique Screen Features

Making Nucleic Acid Labels Measurements

Oligo Calculator

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

To set data acquisition parameters for a Nucleic Acid 

Labels workbook, click Settings to access: 

Click Settings in Nucleic Acid Labels to display the Type 

tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Name Application name.

Description (optional) Description of the template.

Nucleic Acid Type Type of analysis to perform.

ssDNA is for single-stranded DNA.

Oligo DNA and Oligo RNA use the appropriate extinction 

coefficient based on the entered DNA or RNA base sequence. The 

entry will appear on the Oligo Calculator tab.

For Custom, enter a factor (extinction coefficient) by which to 

multiply the measured absorbance. The factor used for other types 

cannot be changed.

Set Dye 1 and Dye 2 to the fluorescent dyes whose absorbance will 

be used in concentration correction calculations.

Pathlength Distance the light travels through the sample.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

152 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Click Settings in Nucleic Acid Labels to display the 

Measurement tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength Wavelength(s) to use for the analysis.

Correction Specifies bichromatic normalization of the absorbance data.

To use uncorrected data, select None. Without baseline correction, 

spectra may be offset from the baseline. If this offset is significant, the 

calculated protein concentration may be higher than the true value.

Single point subtracts the sample absorbance at the entered 

wavelength from the absorbance at every data point.

Sloping baseline draws a line between the data points at the entered 

wavelengths, finds its absorbance value at the analytical wavelength, 

and subtracts it from the measured absorbance.

Component name Component to quantify.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 153

Related Topics

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

For selecting or defining formulas for additional data processing, with 

the results appearing in the analysis report. The formulas are written 

in a form similar to that used in a command script language, with 

constants, mathematical functions, etc. All functions are not 

case-sensitive. Spaces are not allowed between a function name and 

“(”. After adding formulas, edit their information in the formula table 

as desired. To delete a table row, right-click it and choose Delete Row. 

Some information in the table cannot be modified or deleted.

Instructions:

Y To add one or more predefined formulas

1. Click Select.

2. For each desired formula, select it in the list and click Add.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings in Options.

3. Click Close.

Y To define a formula

1. Click Build.

2. To enter a formula in its entirety, set Equation type to User 

defined and type the equation. To use a provided formula, select 

it and enter values for the variables.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings.

3. Click OK.

4. For selected provided formulas, enter a name and concentration 

unit in the table.

The available units depend on the Formulas & Units tab settings.

Feature Description
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

154 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Related Topics

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Click Settings in Nucleic Acid Labels to display the 

Instrument tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Mode Specifies Scan or Fixed data acquisition.

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

Start wavelength and End 

wavelength (Scan only)

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring 

data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can 

improve the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral 

bandwidth decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral 

features.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data 

interval (for scanning measurements) or at each measured 

wavelength (for fixed-wavelength measurements). Increasing the 

integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but reduces 

the scan speed.

Data interval (Scan only) Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed (Scan only) Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.

Estimated time (Scan 

only)

Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration 

time increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely 

with scan speed.

Table of wavelengths 

(Fixed only)

Shows the analysis wavelength(s) entered on the Measurement 

tab.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 155

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements. See Instrument Status 

Monitors.

Related Topics

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Samples Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Related Topics

Type Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Measurement Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Click Settings in Nucleic Acid Labels to display the 

Accessories tab in the right pane. The available 

parameters depend on the installed accessories. See 

Accessories for details.

Click Settings in Nucleic Acid Labels to display the 

Samples tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the analysis.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended. For example, the names of three sample spectra 

using the base name “dye” would be dye1, dye2 and dye3.

Sample averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same sample or from multiple samples. To 

average multiple measurements of the same sample, select Replicate

and set Number of replicates to the total number of measurements. 

To average values from two or three samples, select Duplicate or 

Triplicate, respectively.

Use concentration 

limits

Displays high and low limit lines on the Run Chart tab to show 

whether sample concentrations are within the specified limits.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

156 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Instrument Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Accessories Tab for Nucleic Acid Labels

Unique Screen Features

Related Topics

Overview

Dye/Chromophore Editor

Application Settings

Making Nucleic Acid Labels Measurements

Oligo Calculator

The right pane in Measure Nucleic Acid Labels 

includes: 

Feature Description

Type Type of analysis to perform. To the right is the factor value from the 

Type tab.

Conc. Concentration based on absorbance at 260 nm, the default or 

user-defined extinction coefficient, and the specified pathlength. (The 

extinction coefficient is reported for a 10 mm pathlength.) Beer’s law 

is used to calculate the nucleic acid concentration (see Nucleic Acid 

Concentration Calculations).

The displayed A260 value is baseline corrected. The A260 value 

actually used to calculate the concentration takes into account the 

appropriate dye correction factors and any absorbance correction due 

to the selected analysis correction wavelength.

A260 Absorbance at 260 nm.

260/280 Ratio of sample absorbance at 260 nm and 280 nm, used to assess the 

purity of DNA and RNA. A ratio of ~1.8 is generally accepted as 

“pure” for DNA, ~2.0 for RNA. If either ratio is appreciably lower, 

protein, phenol or other contaminants that absorb strongly near 

280 nm may be present. See Nucleic Acid Purity Measurements for 

more information.

Dye(s) Conc. Concentration of the user-selected dye(s).
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 157

Making Nucleic Acid Labels Measurements

While performing this procedure, click here for information about features to the right of the 

spectral display.

Y To make a Nucleic Acid Labels measurement

1. Click Measure Nucleic Acid Labels in Nucleic Acid Labels.

2. Click Measure.

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

Use the appropriate buffer for the blank, generally the same buffer used to prepare or 

dissolve the sample. The buffer should be the same pH and of a similar ionic strength as 

the sample solution.

4. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

5. If only one sample will be measured, insert it.

6. Click Continue.

7. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples tab, horizontal limit 

lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

click the Measure action button instead and skip to step 3.

Note Use a fresh aliquot of sample for each measurement.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

158 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To copy this plot, right-click it and choose Copy to Clipboard.

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

sample selected in the table. (Right-click the data to access commands for customizing the 

display, including adding annotation. See Data Display for more information.)

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).

Related Topics

Overview

Dye/Chromophore Editor

Application Settings

Unique Screen Features

Data Display

Oligo Calculator

After the Measurement

• When using the cuvette option, remove the cuvette, rinse thoroughly and dry between 

samples.
4 Life Science Applications

Nucleic Acid Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 159

Oligo Calculator

Y To use Oligo Calculator 

1. Enter a base sequence on the Oligo Calculator tab.

More:

Use:

• The buttons below the Base Sequence box.

• The A, C, G, T and U keys on the keyboard.

• Copy and paste a base sequence (A, C, G, T and U only) from another application.

To clear the sequence, click Clear. Individual bases can be deleted only manually.

2. Select the nucleic acid type to analyze.

3. Select the degree of phosphorylation if applicable: mono-phosphate for DNA; mono- or 

tri-phosphate for RNA.

4. Select Double-stranded if applicable. The complementary base sequence will be 

included in the analysis.

5. Enter the molecular weights of any additions to the base sequence in the Modification

box.

The calculated results appear:

Use Oligo Calculator to calculate molecular weight, 

extinction coefficients, concentration factors and 

melting points for specific nucleic acid sequences. 

Clicking this task button displays:

Tab Description

Oligo Calculator For entering sequences of interest and selecting appropriate sample type 

variables.

Melting Displays the calculated melting points of a DNA strand. Available only 

for DNA sequences.

Result Description

Molecular weight Calculated base sequence molecular weight.

Molar extinction 

coefficient

Calculated 260 nm extinction coefficient in ng-cm/microliter.

Concentration factor Factor, based on the extinction coefficient, used to calculate the 

concentration of the base sequence.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein A280

160 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To calculate the melting point of a DNA sequence

1. Enter the base sequence on the Oligo Calculator tab.

2. Enter appropriate values on the Melting tab:

The calculated results appear:

Protein A280

Overview

Number of bases Number of bases in the entered sequence.

% GC Percentage of the total number of bases made up by guanine 

and cytosine.

Parameter Description

Oligo molarity Concentration of the Oligo in molar units.

Cation molarity Concentration of cations in the sample.

% Formamide Percentage concentration of formamide in the sample.

Result Description

Salt-adjusted Calculated melting point of the base sequence, corrected for the 

concentration of cation in the sample. This method does not 

account for the effect of interaction between neighboring bases.

Nearest-neighbor Melting point of the base sequence when the effect of interaction 

between neighboring bases is taken into account.

Result Description

Contents

• Overview

• Application Settings

• Unique Screen Features

• Making Protein A280 Measurements

The Protein A280 method is used to quantify proteins on 

the basis of their absorbance at 280 nm.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein A280

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 161

Tyrosine, tryptophan, phenylalanine and to a small extent lysine and Cys-Cys disulphide 

bonds have an absorbance peak around 280 nm. This method does not require generation of 

a standard curve and is ready for protein sample quantitation at software startup. Colorimetric 

assays such as Pierce BCA, Pierce 660 nm, Bradford and Lowry are more commonly used for 

uncharacterized protein solutions and cell lysates.

The Protein A280 application displays the UV spectrum, measures the protein’s absorbance at 

280 nm (A280), and calculates the concentration (mg/ml).

Related Topics

Application Settings

Unique Screen Features

Making Protein A280 Measurements

Application Settings

Type Tab for Protein A280

Measurement Tab for Protein A280

Instrument Tab for Protein A280

Accessories Tab for Protein A280

Samples Tab for Protein A280

Related Topics

Overview

Unique Screen Features

Making Protein A280 Measurements

Type Tab for Protein A280

To set data acquisition parameters for a Protein A280

workbook, click Settings to access: 

Click Settings in Protein A280 to display the Type tab in 

the right pane.

Feature Description

Name Application name.

Description (optional) Description of the template.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein A280

162 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Protein A280

Instrument Tab for Protein A280

Accessories Tab for Protein A280

Samples Tab for Protein A280

Measurement Tab for Protein A280

Protein A280 Type Type of analysis to perform.

1 Abs = 1 mg / mL is a general reference setting based on a 0.1% 

(1 mg/ml) protein solution. It produces an absorbance of 1.0 A at 

280 nm (where the pathlength is 10 mm, or 1 cm).

BSA is a Bovine Serum Albumin reference. Protein concentrations 

are calculated using the mass extinction coefficient of 6.7 at 

280 nm for a 1% (10 mg/ml) BSA solution.

IgG is an IgG reference. Protein concentrations are calculated using 

the mass extinction coefficient of 13.7 at 280 nm for a 1% 

(10 mg/ml) IgG solution.

For Lysozyme, protein concentrations are calculated using the mass 

extinction coefficient of 26.4 at 280 nm for a 1% (10 mg/ml) 

Lysozyme solution.

Other protein (ε & MW) is the entered molar extinction 

coefficient (M-1 cm-1) and molecular weight (MW) in kilodaltons 

(kDa) for the respective protein reference. The maximum values are 

99999000 for ε and 9999000 for MW.

Other protein (ε 1%) is the mass extinction coefficient (l g-1 cm-1) 

for a 10 mg/ml (1%) solution of the respective reference protein. 

Enter an ε/1000 value.

Pathlength Distance the light travels through the sample.

Feature Description

Click Settings in Protein A280 to display the 

Measurement tab in the right pane.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein A280

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 163

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength Wavelength(s) to use for the analysis.

Correction Specifies bichromatic normalization of the absorbance data.

To use uncorrected data, select None. Without baseline correction, 

spectra may be offset from the baseline. If this offset is significant, the 

calculated protein concentration may be higher than the true value.

Single point subtracts the sample absorbance at the entered 

wavelength from the absorbance at every data point.

Sloping baseline draws a line between the data points at the entered 

wavelengths, finds its absorbance value at the analytical wavelength, 

and subtracts it from the measured absorbance.

Component name Component to quantify.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein A280

164 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein A280

Instrument Tab for Protein A280

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

For selecting or defining formulas for additional data processing, with 

the results appearing in the analysis report. The formulas are written 

in a form similar to that used in a command script language, with 

constants, mathematical functions, etc. All functions are not 

case-sensitive. Spaces are not allowed between a function name and 

“(”. After adding formulas, edit their information in the formula table 

as desired. To delete a table row, right-click it and choose Delete Row. 

Some information in the table cannot be modified or deleted.

Instructions:

Y To add one or more predefined formulas

1. Click Select.

2. For each desired formula, select it in the list and click Add.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings in Options.

3. Click Close.

Y To define a formula

1. Click Build.

2. To enter a formula in its entirety, set Equation type to User 

defined and type the equation. To use a provided formula, select 

it and enter values for the variables.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings.

3. Click OK.

4. For selected provided formulas, enter a name and concentration 

unit in the table.

The available units depend on the Formulas & Units tab settings.

Feature Description
4 Life Science Applications

Protein A280

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 165

Accessories Tab for Protein A280

Samples Tab for Protein A280

Instrument Tab for Protein A280

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein A280

Measurement Tab for Protein A280

Accessories Tab for Protein A280

Samples Tab for Protein A280

Click Settings in Protein A280 to display the Instrument 

tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Mode Specifies Scan or Fixed data acquisition.

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

Start wavelength and End 

wavelength (Scan only)

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring 

data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can 

improve the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral 

bandwidth decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral 

features.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data 

interval (for scanning measurements) or at each measured 

wavelength (for fixed-wavelength measurements). Increasing the 

integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but reduces 

the scan speed.

Data interval (Scan only) Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed (Scan only) Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.

Estimated time (Scan 

only)

Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration 

time increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely 

with scan speed.

Table of wavelengths 

(Fixed only)

Shows the analysis wavelength(s) entered on the Measurement 

tab.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein A280

166 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Accessories Tab for Protein A280

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements. See Instrument Status 

Monitors.

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein A280

Measurement Tab for Protein A280

Instrument Tab for Protein A280

Samples Tab for Protein A280

Samples Tab for Protein A280

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein A280

Measurement Tab for Protein A280

Instrument Tab for Protein A280

Click Settings in Protein A280 to display the Accessories 

tab in the right pane. The available parameters depend 

on the installed accessories. See Accessories for details.

Click Settings in Protein A280 to display the Samples 

tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the analysis.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended. For example, the names of three sample spectra 

using the base name “dye” would be dye1, dye2 and dye3.

Sample averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same sample or from multiple samples. To 

average multiple measurements of the same sample, select Replicate

and set Number of replicates to the total number of measurements. 

To average values from two or three samples, select Duplicate or 

Triplicate, respectively.

Use concentration 

limits

Displays high and low limit lines on the Run Chart tab to show 

whether sample concentrations are within the specified limits.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein A280

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 167

Accessories Tab for Protein A280

Unique Screen Features

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Making Protein A280 Measurements

Making Protein A280 Measurements

While performing this procedure, click here for information about features to the right of the 

spectral display.

Y To make a Protein A280 measurement

1. Click Measure Protein A280 in Protein A280.

2. Click Measure.

The right pane in Measure Protein A280 may include: 

Feature Description

Type Type of analysis to perform.

ε/1000 and Molecular 

Weight (kDa)

ε/1000 and molecular weight for the Other protein (ε & 

MW) sample type.

Ext. Coeff, ε 1% (L/g-cm) Extinction coefficient and ε 1% for the Other protein (ε 

1%) sample type.

Conc. Concentration based on absorbance at 280 nm, after 

correction is applied, and the selected extinction coefficient.

A280 Absorbance at 280 nm for the protein sample being 

measured.

260/280 Ratio of absorbance at 260 nm and 280 nm.

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

click the Measure action button instead and skip to step 3.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein A280

168 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

Use the appropriate buffer for the blank, generally the same buffer used to prepare or 

dissolve the sample. The buffer should be the same pH and of a similar ionic strength as 

the sample solution.

4. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

5. If only one sample will be measured, insert it.

6. Click Continue.

7. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples tab, horizontal limit 

lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:

To copy this plot, right-click it and choose Copy to Clipboard.
4 Life Science Applications

Proteins and Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 169

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

sample selected in the table. (Right-click the data to access commands for customizing the 

display, including adding annotation. See Data Display for more information.)

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Unique Screen Features

Data Display

Proteins and Labels

Overview

Related Topics

Dye/Chromophore Editor

Contents

• Overview

• Dye/Chromophore Editor

• Application Settings

• Unique Screen Features

• Making Proteins and Labels Measurements

The Proteins & Labels application determines protein 

concentration using the protein’s intrinsic absorption at 

280 nm as well as the concentration of a fluorescent dye 

modification (protein array conjugates). It can also 

measure the purity of metalloproteins (such as 

hemoglobin) using wavelength ratios.
4 Life Science Applications

Proteins and Labels

170 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Application Settings

Unique Screen Features

Making Proteins and Labels Measurements

Dye/Chromophore Editor

To enter a new dye, type its information in the appropriate cells of the bottom row of the table 

and select a unit. Refer to the dye manufacturer for appropriate correction factors. The 

260 nm corrections will be used for nucleic acid sample concentration calculations. Entered 

information is saved automatically.

To delete a user-defined dye, right-click its row and choose Delete Row. Predefined dyes, 

identified by the lock icon, cannot be edited or deleted.

Application Settings

Type Tab for Proteins and Labels

Measurement Tab for Proteins and Labels

Instrument Tab for Proteins and Labels

Accessories Tab for Proteins and Labels

Samples Tab for Proteins and Labels

Related Topics

Overview

Dye/Chromophore Editor

Unique Screen Features

Making Proteins and Labels Measurements

Type Tab for Proteins and Labels

Use the Dye Chromophore Editor to select predefined 

dyes, modify existing dyes for protocols, or enter new 

dyes.

To set data acquisition parameters for a Proteins and 

Labels workbook, click Settings to access: 

Click Settings in Proteins and Labels to display the Type 

tab in the right pane.
4 Life Science Applications

Proteins and Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 171

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Proteins and Labels

Instrument Tab for Proteins and Labels

Accessories Tab for Proteins and Labels

Samples Tab for Proteins and Labels

Feature Description

Name Application name.

Description (optional) Description of the template.

Type Type of analysis to perform.

1 Abs = 1 mg / mL is a general reference setting based on a 0.1% 

(1 mg/ml) protein solution. It produces an absorbance of 1.0 A at 

280 nm (where the pathlength is 10 mm, or 1 cm).

BSA is a Bovine Serum Albumin reference. Protein concentrations 

are calculated using the mass extinction coefficient of 6.7 at 

280 nm for a 1% (10 mg/ml) BSA solution.

IgG is an IgG reference. Protein concentrations are calculated 

using the mass extinction coefficient of 13.7 at 280 nm for a 1% 

(10 mg/ml) IgG solution.

For Lysozyme, protein concentrations are calculated using the 

mass extinction coefficient of 26.4 at 280 nm for a 1% 

(10 mg/ml) Lysozyme solution.

Other protein (ε & MW) is the entered molar extinction 

coefficient (M-1 cm-1) and molecular weight (MW) in kilodaltons 

(kDa) for the respective protein reference. The maximum values 

are 99999 X 1000 for ε and 9999 X 1000 for MW

Other protein (ε 1%) is the mass extinction coefficient 

(l g-1 cm-1) for a 10 mg/ml (1%) solution of the respective 

reference protein.

Dye 1 and Dye 2 Fluorescent dyes whose absorbance will be used in concentration 

correction calculations.

Pathlength Distance the light travels through the sample.
4 Life Science Applications

Proteins and Labels

172 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Measurement Tab for Proteins and Labels

Click Settings in Proteins and Labels to display the 

Measurement tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength Wavelength(s) to use for the analysis.

Correction Specifies bichromatic normalization of the absorbance data.

To use uncorrected data, select None. Without baseline correction, 

spectra may be offset from the baseline. If this offset is significant, the 

calculated protein concentration may be higher than the true value.

Single point subtracts the sample absorbance at the entered 

wavelength from the absorbance at every data point.

Sloping baseline draws a line between the data points at the entered 

wavelengths, finds its absorbance value at the analytical wavelength, 

and subtracts it from the measured absorbance.

Component name Component to quantify.
4 Life Science Applications

Proteins and Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 173

Related Topics

Type Tab for Proteins and Labels

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

For selecting or defining formulas for additional data processing, with 

the results appearing in the analysis report. The formulas are written 

in a form similar to that used in a command script language, with 

constants, mathematical functions, etc. All functions are not 

case-sensitive. Spaces are not allowed between a function name and 

“(”. After adding formulas, edit their information in the formula table 

as desired. To delete a table row, right-click it and choose Delete Row. 

Some information in the table cannot be modified or deleted.

Instructions:

Y To add one or more predefined formulas

1. Click Select.

2. For each desired formula, select it in the list and click Add.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings in Options.

3. Click Close.

Y To define a formula

1. Click Build.

2. To enter a formula in its entirety, set Equation type to User 

defined and type the equation. To use a provided formula, select 

it and enter values for the variables.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings.

3. Click OK.

4. For selected provided formulas, enter a name and concentration 

unit in the table.

The available units depend on the Formulas & Units tab settings.

Feature Description
4 Life Science Applications

Proteins and Labels

174 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Instrument Tab for Proteins and Labels

Accessories Tab for Proteins and Labels

Samples Tab for Proteins and Labels

Instrument Tab for Proteins and Labels

Related Topics

Type Tab for Proteins and Labels

Measurement Tab for Proteins and Labels

Accessories Tab for Proteins and Labels

Click Settings in Proteins and Labels to display the 

Instrument tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Mode Specifies Scan or Fixed data acquisition.

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

Start wavelength and End 

wavelength (Scan only)

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring 

data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can 

improve the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral 

bandwidth decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral 

features.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data 

interval (for scanning measurements) or at each measured 

wavelength (for fixed-wavelength measurements). Increasing the 

integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but reduces 

the scan speed.

Data interval (Scan only) Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed (Scan only) Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.

Estimated time (Scan 

only)

Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration 

time increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely 

with scan speed.

Table of wavelengths 

(Fixed only)

Shows the analysis wavelength(s) entered on the Measurement 

tab.
4 Life Science Applications

Proteins and Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 175

Samples Tab for Proteins and Labels

Accessories Tab for Proteins and Labels

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements. See Instrument Status 

Monitors.

Related Topics

Type Tab for Proteins and Labels

Measurement Tab for Proteins and Labels

Instrument Tab for Proteins and Labels

Samples Tab for Proteins and Labels

Samples Tab for Proteins and Labels

Related Topics

Type Tab for Proteins and Labels

Click Settings in Proteins and Labels to display the 

Accessories tab in the right pane. The available 

parameters depend on the installed accessories. See 

Accessories for details.

Click Settings in Proteins and Labels to display the 

Samples tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the analysis.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended. For example, the names of three sample spectra 

using the base name “dye” would be dye1, dye2 and dye3.

Sample averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same sample or from multiple samples. To 

average multiple measurements of the same sample, select Replicate

and set Number of replicates to the total number of measurements. 

To average values from two or three samples, select Duplicate or 

Triplicate, respectively.

Use concentration 

limits

Displays high and low limit lines on the Run Chart tab to show 

whether sample concentrations are within the specified limits.
4 Life Science Applications

Proteins and Labels

176 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Measurement Tab for Proteins and Labels

Instrument Tab for Proteins and Labels

Accessories Tab for Proteins and Labels

Unique Screen Features

Related Topics

Overview

Dye/Chromophore Editor

Application Settings

Making Proteins and Labels Measurements

Making Proteins and Labels Measurements

While performing this procedure, click here for information about features to the right of the 

spectral display.

Y To make a Proteins and Labels measurement

1. Click Measure Proteins & Labels in Proteins and Labels.

The right pane in Measure Protein & Labels includes:

Feature Description

Type Type of analysis to perform.

ε/1000 and Molecular Weight 

(kDa)

ε/1000 and molecular weight for the Other protein (ε & 

MW) sample type.

Ext. Coeff, ε 1% (L/g-cm) Extinction coefficient and ε 1% for the Other protein (ε 

1%) sample type.

Conc. Concentration based on absorbance at 280 nm, after 

correction is applied, and the selected extinction 

coefficient.

Dye(s) Conc. Concentration of the user-selected dye(s).

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

click the Measure action button instead and skip to step 3.
4 Life Science Applications

Proteins and Labels

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 177

2. Click Measure.

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

Use the appropriate buffer for the blank, generally the same buffer used to prepare or 

dissolve the sample. This solution should be the same pH and of a similar ionic strength 

as the sample solution.

4. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

5. If only one sample will be measured, insert it.

6. Click Continue.

7. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples tab, horizontal limit 

lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:

To copy this plot, right-click it and choose Copy to Clipboard.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

178 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

sample selected in the table. (Right-click the data to access commands for customizing the 

display, including adding annotation. See Data Display for more information.)

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

The A280 value in the result table is the value using the absorbance at 750 nm as the 

baseline. The A280 value used to calculate the protein concentration takes into account 

the appropriate dye correction factors and any absorbance correction due to the selected 

analysis correction nm. Therefore, the displayed A280 value is not the value used to 

calculate the sample concentration.

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).

Related Topics

Overview

Dye/Chromophore Editor

Application Settings

Unique Screen Features

Data Display

Pierce BCA

Contents

• Overview

• Application Settings

• Working With Standard Curves

• Making Pierce BCA Measurements
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 179

Overview

Related Topics

Application Settings

Working With Standard Curves

Making Pierce BCA Measurements

BCA Kits and Protocols

Commercial BCA Protein kit manufacturers typically outline procedures for two different 

protein concentration ranges:

• A regular assay uses a 20:1 reagent/sample volume ratio.

• A mini assay uses a 1:1 reagent/sample volume ratio. To prepare sufficient volume of these 

1:1 mixtures for cuvette measurements, use a sample volume of at least 3 ml and 3 ml of 

BCA reagent. 

Follow the assay kit manufacturer’s recommendations for all standards and samples 

(unknowns). Ensure each is subjected to the same timing and temperature throughout the 

assay.

Protein standards (BSA) for generating a standard curve may also be provided by the 

manufacturer for the BCA assay.

The BCA Protein Assay, which was patented by Pierce 

Biotechnology, part of Thermo Fisher Scientific, remains a 

cornerstone for accurately measuring protein 

concentration in biological samples. The method uses 

bicinchoninic acid (BCA) as the detection reagent for 

Cu+

, which is formed when Cu2+ is reduced by protein in 

an alkaline environment. A purple-colored reaction 

product is formed by the chelation of two molecules of 

BCA with one cuprous ion (Cu+

). The resulting Cu-BCA 

chelate formed in the presence of protein is measured at 

562 nm. While this assay is linear over a wide 

concentration range, the calibration curves are best 

represented as second order. Preformulated reagents of 

BCA and CuSO4 are available in kit form from us.

Note If running the assay at 60 °C, doubling the volumes may afford greater insurance 

against skewed results from evaporation/condensation within the sealed reaction tube.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

180 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Application Settings

Type Tab for Pierce BCA

Measurement Tab for Pierce BCA

Standards Tab for Pierce BCA

Instrument Tab for Pierce BCA

Accessories Tab for Pierce BCA

Samples Tab for Pierce BCA

Related Topics

Overview

Working With Standard Curves

Making Pierce BCA Measurements

Type Tab for Pierce BCA

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Pierce BCA

Standards Tab for Pierce BCA

Instrument Tab for Pierce BCA

Accessories Tab for Pierce BCA

Samples Tab for Pierce BCA

To set data acquisition parameters for a Pierce BCA

workbook, click Settings to access: 

Click Settings in Pierce BCA to display the Type tab in 

the right pane.

Feature Description

Name Application name.

Description (optional) Description of the template.

Standard curve Type of quantitative analysis used.

Pathlength Distance the light travels through the sample.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 181

Measurement Tab for Pierce BCA

Click Settings in Pierce BCA to display the 

Measurement tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength Wavelength(s) to use for the analysis.

Correction Specifies bichromatic normalization of the absorbance data.

To use uncorrected data, select None. Without baseline correction, 

spectra may be offset from the baseline. If this offset is significant, the 

calculated protein concentration may be higher than the true value.

Single point subtracts the sample absorbance at the entered 

wavelength from the absorbance at every data point.

Sloping baseline draws a line between the data points at the entered 

wavelengths, finds its absorbance value at the analytical wavelength, 

and subtracts it from the measured absorbance.

Component name Component to quantify.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

182 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce BCA

Standards Tab for Pierce BCA

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

For selecting or defining formulas for additional data processing, with 

the results appearing in the analysis report. The formulas are written 

in a form similar to that used in a command script language, with 

constants, mathematical functions, etc. All functions are not 

case-sensitive. Spaces are not allowed between a function name and 

“(”. After adding formulas, edit their information in the formula table 

as desired. To delete a table row, right-click it and choose Delete Row. 

Some information in the table cannot be modified or deleted.

Instructions:

Y To add one or more predefined formulas

1. Click Select.

2. For each desired formula, select it in the list and click Add.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings in Options.

3. Click Close.

Y To define a formula

1. Click Build.

2. To enter a formula in its entirety, set Equation type to User 

defined and type the equation. To use a provided formula, select 

it and enter values for the variables.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings.

3. Click OK.

4. For selected provided formulas, enter a name and concentration 

unit in the table.

The available units depend on the Formulas & Units tab settings.

Feature Description
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 183

Instrument Tab for Pierce BCA

Accessories Tab for Pierce BCA

Samples Tab for Pierce BCA

Standards Tab for Pierce BCA

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce BCA

Measurement Tab for Pierce BCA

Instrument Tab for Pierce BCA

Accessories Tab for Pierce BCA

Click Settings in Pierce BCA to display the Standards 

tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Curve fit type Type of equation used to create the standard curve from standard 

concentration values.

Standard averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same standard or from multiple standards 

prepared under the same conditions. To average multiple 

measurements of the same standard, select Replicate and set Number 

of replicates to the total number of measurements. To average values 

from two or three similar standards, select Duplicate or Triplicate, 

respectively.

Minimum r2 The r2

 value indicates how well the standard curve fits the standard 

data points, with 1.0 a perfect fit. If Minimum r2

 is selected, samples 

can be quantified only after that value is achieved for the standard 

curve.

Calculate from 

weight/volume

If available for the current unit, calculates concentration when the 

weight and volume of material used to prepare each standard is 

known. Enter the weight and volume for each standard in the 

appropriate table cells, or enter it later as part of running an analysis.

Standard Table Contains concentration and other information about the standards. 

To add information from a .csv (comma separated values) file or .tsv 

(tab separated values) file, click Import Standards. To save the 

information in a .csv file or .tsv file, click Export Standards.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

184 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Samples Tab for Pierce BCA

Instrument Tab for Pierce BCA

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce BCA

Measurement Tab for Pierce BCA

Standards Tab for Pierce BCA

Accessories Tab for Pierce BCA

Samples Tab for Pierce BCA

Click Settings in Pierce BCA to display the Instrument 

tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Mode Specifies Scan or Fixed data acquisition.

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

Start wavelength and End 

wavelength (Scan only)

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring 

data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can 

improve the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral 

bandwidth decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral 

features.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data 

interval (for scanning measurements) or at each measured 

wavelength (for fixed-wavelength measurements). Increasing the 

integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but reduces 

the scan speed.

Data interval (Scan only) Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed (Scan only) Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.

Estimated time (Scan 

only)

Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration 

time increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely 

with scan speed.

Table of wavelengths 

(Fixed only)

Shows the analysis wavelength(s) entered on the Measurement 

tab.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 185

Accessories Tab for Pierce BCA

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements. See Instrument Status 

Monitors.

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce BCA

Measurement Tab for Pierce BCA

Standards Tab for Pierce BCA

Instrument Tab for Pierce BCA

Samples Tab for Pierce BCA

Samples Tab for Pierce BCA

Click Settings in Pierce BCA to display the Accessories 

tab in the right pane. The available parameters depend 

on the installed accessories. See Accessories for details.

Click Settings in Pierce BCA to display the Samples tab 

in the right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the analysis.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended. For example, the names of three sample spectra 

using the base name “dye” would be dye1, dye2 and dye3.

Sample averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same sample or from multiple samples. To 

average multiple measurements of the same sample, select Replicate

and set Number of replicates to the total number of measurements. 

To average values from two or three samples, select Duplicate or 

Triplicate, respectively.

Use concentration 

limits

Displays high and low limit lines on the Run Chart tab to show 

whether sample concentrations are within the specified limits.

Use weight/volume 

correction

If available for the current unit, corrects sample concentrations using 

the entered target weight and volume:

corrected concentration = measured concentration * (actual weight / 

target weight) * (target volume / actual volume)
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

186 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce BCA

Measurement Tab for Pierce BCA

Standards Tab for Pierce BCA

Instrument Tab for Pierce BCA

Accessories Tab for Pierce BCA

Working With Standard Curves

A standard curve is required for colorimetric protein analysis. 

• A standard curve can be generated using two or more standards.

• The multipoint curve capability allows multiple replicates for each standards. Standards 

can be run in any order; however, best practice dictates that the standards be measured 

from the lowest concentration to the highest. 

• Determine whether or not to use a standard when analyzing samples against the standard 

curve.

• Establishing a new standard curve requires creating a new workbook.

• If a previously saved workbook is used, all concentration calculations for newly measured 

samples will be based on the standard absorbance values saved in the workbook.

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Making Pierce BCA Measurements

Making Pierce BCA Measurements

Sample and Standards Preparation

• See the manufacturers’ guidelines and recommendations for standard and sample 

preparation. 

• Prepare both standards and unknowns in the same manner. Use a diluent of the same pH 

and ionic strength for all blanks, standards and unknown samples.

Note Each workbook will archive only one standard curve.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 187

Procedure

Y To make a Pierce BCA measurement

1. Click Measure Pierce BCA in Pierce BCA.

2. If standards need to be acquired, click Measure. If standards have already been acquired, 

skip to step 7 to acquire sample data.

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

Use the appropriate buffer for the blank. See the reagent directions for details.

4. When the standards information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

If Standard averaging on the Standards tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the 

end of a standard name indicates the second measurement to be made of the standard. If 

Sample averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of standard names indicate 

the second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved standards information, use Import Standards.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each standard in the table.

To remove a standard, select it, right-click the table and choose Clear Standard. To 

remove all the standards, choose Clear Table.

To save standards information for later use, use Export Standards.

5. Click Continue.

6. Follow the instructions that appear, installing the specified standards.

Note Standards diluted from a stock standard must cover the expected range of the 

unknown samples. Protein concentrations are not extrapolated beyond measured 

standard concentrations.

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

click the Measure action button instead and skip to step 3.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

188 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The Standard Curve(s) tab displays the resulting standard curve (or curves). Specify the 

standards to use for the curve (or curves) by selecting Yes or No in the Use column in the 

table.

More:

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

If Standard averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of a standard name indicates 

the second measurement. If Standard averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” 

indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

To permanently remove an acquired standard from the analysis, right-click it and choose 

Remove. Its information is crossed out but not removed from the table.

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

standard selected in the table. To access commands for customizing the display, including 

adding annotation, right-click the data. See Data Display for more information.

7. Click Measure.

8. Follow the instructions that appear.

9. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each sample in the table.

More:

If a standard curve is not calibrated...

• Try selecting a different curve fit type.

• Try remeasuring a standard using the correct standard material: 

select the listed standard, right-click the table and choose 

Remeasure.

• Try changing the setting of Minimum r2 on the Standards tab and 

acquire the standards again in a new workbook.

This is only an indicator that the required minimum number of points 

have been established for the selected curve fit type. It does not validate 

the integrity of the curve. For example, additional standards may be 

required to cover the expected assay concentration range.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce BCA

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 189

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

10. If only one sample will be measured, install it.

11. Click Continue.

12. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The sample results table contains the columns of information specified on the 

Configuration tab in Reports. If Sample averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement. If Sample averaging was set to 

Triplicate, “D” and “T” indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

The Standard Curve(s) tab shows graphically the relationship between the standard curve, 

measured spectral intensity and calculated concentration for the selected sample: A 

horizontal line connects the sample spectral intensity value on the Y-axis to the standard 

curve. A vertical line connects that point to the sample concentration value on the X-axis:

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples tab, horizontal limit 

lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

190 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).

To copy the data on the Standard Curve(s) tab or Run Chart tab, right-click the plot and 

choose Copy to Clipboard.

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Data Display

Protein Bradford

Overview

Contents

• Overview

• Application Settings

• Bradford Standard Curves

• Making Protein Bradford Assay Measurements

The Protein Bradford assay measures absorbance at 

595 nm; it determines concentration for either standard or 

micro sample concentrations.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 191

This assay is commonly used for determining protein concentration. It is often used for more 

dilute protein solutions where lower detection sensitivity is needed and/or in the presence of 

components that also have significant UV (280 nm) absorbance. Like the other colorimetric 

assays, the Bradford assay requires generating a standard curve before measuring sample 

proteins. 

The Bradford procedure uses the protein-induced absorbance shift of Coomassie Blue dye to 

595 nm to measure protein concentration. The bound protein-dye complex is measured at 

595 nm and normalized at 750 nm. A single stabilized reagent mixture containing Coomassie 

Blue dye, alcohol, and surfactant in kit form is available from numerous manufacturers.

Related Topics

Application Settings

Bradford Standard Curves

Making Protein Bradford Assay Measurements

Bradford Reagent Kits and Protocols

Follow the assay kit manufacturer’s recommendations for all standards and samples 

(unknowns), ensuring they are subjected to the same timing and temperature throughout the 

assay.

Protein standards (BSA) for generating a standard curve may also be provided by the Bradford 

assay manufacturer.

Application Settings

Type Tab for Protein Bradford

Measurement Tab for Protein Bradford

Standards Tab for Protein Bradford

Instrument Tab for Protein Bradford

Accessories Tab for Protein Bradford

Samples Tab for Protein Bradford

Related Topics

Overview

Bradford Standard Curves

Making Protein Bradford Assay Measurements

To set data acquisition parameters for a Protein Bradford

workbook, click Settings to access: 
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

192 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Type Tab for Protein Bradford

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Protein Bradford

Standards Tab for Protein Bradford

Instrument Tab for Protein Bradford

Accessories Tab for Protein Bradford

Samples Tab for Protein Bradford

Measurement Tab for Protein Bradford

Click Settings in Protein Bradford to display the Type 

tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Name Application name.

Description (optional) Description of the template.

Standard curve Type of quantitative analysis used.

Pathlength Distance the light travels through the sample.

Click Settings in Protein Bradford to display the 

Measurement tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength Wavelength(s) to use for the analysis.

Correction Specifies bichromatic normalization of the absorbance data.

To use uncorrected data, select None. Without baseline correction, 

spectra may be offset from the baseline. If this offset is significant, the 

calculated protein concentration may be higher than the true value.

Single point subtracts the sample absorbance at the entered 

wavelength from the absorbance at every data point.

Sloping baseline draws a line between the data points at the entered 

wavelengths, finds its absorbance value at the analytical wavelength, 

and subtracts it from the measured absorbance.

Component name Component to quantify.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 193

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein Bradford

Standards Tab for Protein Bradford

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

For selecting or defining formulas for additional data processing, with 

the results appearing in the analysis report. The formulas are written 

in a form similar to that used in a command script language, with 

constants, mathematical functions, etc. All functions are not 

case-sensitive. Spaces are not allowed between a function name and 

“(”. After adding formulas, edit their information in the formula table 

as desired. To delete a table row, right-click it and choose Delete Row. 

Some information in the table cannot be modified or deleted.

Instructions:

Y To add one or more predefined formulas

1. Click Select.

2. For each desired formula, select it in the list and click Add.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings in Options.

3. Click Close.

Y To define a formula

1. Click Build.

2. To enter a formula in its entirety, set Equation type to User 

defined and type the equation. To use a provided formula, select 

it and enter values for the variables.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings.

3. Click OK.

4. For selected provided formulas, enter a name and concentration 

unit in the table.

The available units depend on the Formulas & Units tab settings.

Feature Description
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

194 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Instrument Tab for Protein Bradford

Accessories Tab for Protein Bradford

Samples Tab for Protein Bradford

Standards Tab for Protein Bradford

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein Bradford

Measurement Tab for Protein Bradford

Instrument Tab for Protein Bradford

Accessories Tab for Protein Bradford

Click Settings in Protein Bradford to display the 

Standards tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Curve fit type Type of equation used to create the standard curve from standard 

concentration values.

Standard averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same standard or from multiple standards 

prepared under the same conditions. To average multiple 

measurements of the same standard, select Replicate and set Number 

of replicates to the total number of measurements. To average values 

from two or three similar standards, select Duplicate or Triplicate, 

respectively.

Minimum r2 The r2

 value indicates how well the standard curve fits the standard 

data points, with 1.0 a perfect fit. If Minimum r2

 is selected, samples 

can be quantified only after that value is achieved for the standard 

curve.

Calculate from 

weight/volume

If available for the current unit, calculates concentration when the 

weight and volume of material used to prepare each standard is 

known. Enter the weight and volume for each standard in the 

appropriate table cells, or enter it later as part of running an analysis.

Standard Table Contains concentration and other information about the standards. 

To add information from a .csv (comma separated values) file or .tsv 

(tab separated values) file, click Import Standards. To save the 

information in a .csv file or .tsv file, click Export Standards.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 195

Samples Tab for Protein Bradford

Instrument Tab for Protein Bradford

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein Bradford

Measurement Tab for Protein Bradford

Standards Tab for Protein Bradford

Accessories Tab for Protein Bradford

Samples Tab for Protein Bradford

Click Settings in Protein Bradford to display the 

Instrument tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Mode Specifies Scan or Fixed data acquisition.

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

Start wavelength and End 

wavelength (Scan only)

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring 

data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can 

improve the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral 

bandwidth decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral 

features.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data 

interval (for scanning measurements) or at each measured 

wavelength (for fixed-wavelength measurements). Increasing the 

integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but reduces 

the scan speed.

Data interval (Scan only) Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed (Scan only) Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.

Estimated time (Scan 

only)

Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration 

time increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely 

with scan speed.

Table of wavelengths 

(Fixed only)

Shows the analysis wavelength(s) entered on the Measurement 

tab.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

196 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Accessories Tab for Protein Bradford

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements. See Instrument Status 

Monitors.

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein Bradford

Measurement Tab for Protein Bradford

Standards Tab for Protein Bradford

Instrument Tab for Protein Bradford

Samples Tab for Protein Bradford

Samples Tab for Protein Bradford

Click Settings in Protein Bradford to display the 

Accessories tab in the right pane. The available 

parameters depend on the installed accessories. See 

Accessories for details.

Click Settings in Protein Bradford to display the 

Samples tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the analysis.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended. For example, the names of three sample spectra 

using the base name “dye” would be dye1, dye2 and dye3.

Sample averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same sample or from multiple samples. To 

average multiple measurements of the same sample, select Replicate

and set Number of replicates to the total number of measurements. 

To average values from two or three samples, select Duplicate or 

Triplicate, respectively.

Use concentration 

limits

Displays high and low limit lines on the Run Chart tab to show 

whether sample concentrations are within the specified limits.

Use weight/volume 

correction

If available for the current unit, corrects sample concentrations using 

the entered target weight and volume:

corrected concentration = measured concentration * (actual weight / 

target weight) * (target volume / actual volume)
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 197

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein Bradford

Measurement Tab for Protein Bradford

Standards Tab for Protein Bradford

Instrument Tab for Protein Bradford

Accessories Tab for Protein Bradford

Bradford Standard Curves

A standard curve is required for colorimetric protein analysis. 

• A standard curve can be generated using two or more standards.

• The multipoint curve capability allows multiple replicates for each standards. Standards 

can be run in any order; however, best practice dictates that the standards be measured 

from the lowest concentration to the highest. 

• Determine whether or not to use a standard when analyzing samples against the standard 

curve.

• Establishing a new standard curve requires creating a new workbook.

• If a previously saved workbook is used, all concentration calculations for newly measured 

samples will be based on the standard absorbance values saved in the workbook.

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Bradford Standard Curves

Making Protein Bradford Assay Measurements

Making Protein Bradford Assay Measurements

See Sample and Standards Preparation for more information.

Note Each workbook will archive only one standard curve.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

198 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To make Bradford assay measurements

1. Click Measure Protein Bradford in Protein Bradford.

2. If standards need to be acquired, click Measure. If standards have already been acquired, 

skip to step 7 to acquire sample data.

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

Use the appropriate buffer for the blank. See the reagent directions for details.

4. When the standards information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

If Standard averaging on the Standards tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the 

end of a standard name indicates the second measurement to be made of the standard. If 

Sample averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of standard names indicate 

the second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved standards information, use Import Standards.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each standard in the table.

To remove a standard, select it, right-click the table and choose Clear Standard. To 

remove all the standards, choose Clear Table.

To save standards information for later use, use Export Standards.

5. Click Continue.

6. Follow the instructions that appear, installing the specified standards.

The Standard Curve(s) tab displays the resulting standard curve (or curves). Specify the 

standards to use for the curve (or curves) by selecting Yes or No in the Use column in the 

table.

More:

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

click the Measure action button instead and skip to step 3.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 199

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

If Standard averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of a standard name indicates 

the second measurement. If Standard averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” 

indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

To permanently remove an acquired standard from the analysis, right-click it and choose 

Remove. Its information is crossed out but not removed from the table.

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

standard selected in the table. To access commands for customizing the display, including 

adding annotation, right-click the data. See Data Display for more information.

7. Click Measure.

8. Follow the instructions that appear.

9. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each sample in the table.

More:

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

If a standard curve is not calibrated...

• Try selecting a different curve fit type.

• Try remeasuring a standard using the correct standard material: 

select the listed standard, right-click the table and choose 

Remeasure.

• Try changing the setting of Minimum r2 on the Standards tab and 

acquire the standards again in a new workbook.

This is only an indicator that the required minimum number of points 

have been established for the selected curve fit type. It does not validate 

the integrity of the curve. For example, additional standards may be 

required to cover the expected assay concentration range.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Bradford

200 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

10. If only one sample will be measured, install it.

11. Click Continue.

12. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The sample results table contains the columns of information specified on the 

Configuration tab in Reports. If Sample averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement. If Sample averaging was set to 

Triplicate, “D” and “T” indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

The Standard Curve(s) tab shows graphically the relationship between the standard curve, 

measured spectral intensity and calculated concentration for the selected sample: A 

horizontal line connects the sample spectral intensity value on the Y-axis to the standard 

curve. A vertical line connects that point to the sample concentration value on the X-axis:

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples tab, horizontal limit 

lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 201

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).

To copy the data on the Standard Curve(s) tab or Run Chart tab, right-click the plot and 

choose Copy to Clipboard.

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Bradford Standard Curves

Data Display

Pierce Modified Lowry

Overview

This assay is an alternative method for determining protein concentration based on the widely 

used and cited Lowry procedure for protein quantitation. Like the other colorimetric assays, 

the Lowry assay requires generating a standard curve before measuring sample proteins. 

The Pierce Modified Lowry procedure involves reaction of protein with cupric sulfate in 

alkaline solution, resulting in formation of tetradentate copper-protein complexes. The 

Folin-Ciocalteu Reagent is effectively reduced in proportion to the chelated 

copper-complexes, resulting in a water-soluble blue product that is measured at 650 nm and 

normalized at 405 nm. Preformulated reagents, used in the assay, are available in kit form 

from numerous manufacturers.

Contents

• Overview

• Application Settings

• Lowry Standard Curves

• Making Pierce Modified Lowry Assay Measurements

The Pierce Modified Lowry assay measures absorbance at 

750 nm to determine concentration.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

202 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Application Settings

Lowry Standard Curves

Making Pierce Modified Lowry Assay Measurements

Modified Lowry Kits and Protocols

Follow the assay kit manufacturer’s recommendations for all standards and samples 

(unknowns). Ensure each is subjected to the same timing and temperature throughout the 

assay.

Protein standards (BSA) for generating a standard curve may also be provided by the 

manufacturer for the Lowry assay.

Application Settings

Type Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Measurement Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Standards Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Instrument Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Accessories Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Samples Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Related Topics

Overview

Lowry Standard Curves

Making Pierce Modified Lowry Assay Measurements

Type Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

To set data acquisition parameters for a Pierce Modified 

Lowry workbook, click Settings to access: 

Click Settings in Pierce Modified Lowry to display the 

Type tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Name Application name.

Description (optional) Description of the template.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 203

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Standards Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Instrument Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Accessories Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Samples Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Measurement Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Standard curve Type of quantitative analysis used.

Pathlength Distance the light travels through the sample.

Feature Description

Click Settings in Protein Lowry to display the 

Measurement tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength Wavelength(s) to use for the analysis.

Correction Specifies bichromatic normalization of the absorbance data.

To use uncorrected data, select None. Without baseline correction, 

spectra may be offset from the baseline. If this offset is significant, the 

calculated protein concentration may be higher than the true value.

Single point subtracts the sample absorbance at the entered 

wavelength from the absorbance at every data point.

Sloping baseline draws a line between the data points at the entered 

wavelengths, finds its absorbance value at the analytical wavelength, 

and subtracts it from the measured absorbance.

Component name Component to quantify.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

204 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Standards Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

For selecting or defining formulas for additional data processing, with 

the results appearing in the analysis report. The formulas are written 

in a form similar to that used in a command script language, with 

constants, mathematical functions, etc. All functions are not 

case-sensitive. Spaces are not allowed between a function name and 

“(”. After adding formulas, edit their information in the formula table 

as desired. To delete a table row, right-click it and choose Delete Row. 

Some information in the table cannot be modified or deleted.

Instructions:

Y To add one or more predefined formulas

1. Click Select.

2. For each desired formula, select it in the list and click Add.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings in Options.

3. Click Close.

Y To define a formula

1. Click Build.

2. To enter a formula in its entirety, set Equation type to User 

defined and type the equation. To use a provided formula, select 

it and enter values for the variables.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings.

3. Click OK.

4. For selected provided formulas, enter a name and concentration 

unit in the table.

The available units depend on the Formulas & Units tab settings.

Feature Description
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 205

Instrument Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Accessories Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Samples Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Standards Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Measurement Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Instrument Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Accessories Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Click Settings in Pierce Modified Lowry to display the 

Standards tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Curve fit type Type of equation used to create the standard curve from standard 

concentration values.

Standard averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same standard or from multiple standards 

prepared under the same conditions. To average multiple 

measurements of the same standard, select Replicate and set Number 

of replicates to the total number of measurements. To average values 

from two or three similar standards, select Duplicate or Triplicate, 

respectively.

Minimum r2 The r2

 value indicates how well the standard curve fits the standard 

data points, with 1.0 a perfect fit. If Minimum r2

 is selected, samples 

can be quantified only after that value is achieved for the standard 

curve.

Calculate from 

weight/volume

If available for the current unit, calculates concentration when the 

weight and volume of material used to prepare each standard is 

known. Enter the weight and volume for each standard in the 

appropriate table cells, or enter it later as part of running an analysis.

Standard Table Contains concentration and other information about the standards. 

To add information from a .csv (comma separated values) file or .tsv 

(tab separated values) file, click Import Standards. To save the 

information in a .csv file or .tsv file, click Export Standards.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

206 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Samples Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Instrument Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Measurement Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Standards Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Accessories Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Samples Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Click Settings in Pierce Modified Lowry to display the 

Instrument tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Mode Specifies Scan or Fixed data acquisition.

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

Start wavelength and End 

wavelength (Scan only)

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring 

data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can 

improve the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral 

bandwidth decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral 

features.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data 

interval (for scanning measurements) or at each measured 

wavelength (for fixed-wavelength measurements). Increasing the 

integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but reduces 

the scan speed.

Data interval (Scan only) Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed (Scan only) Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.

Estimated time (Scan 

only)

Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration 

time increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely 

with scan speed.

Table of wavelengths 

(Fixed only)

Shows the analysis wavelength(s) entered on the Measurement 

tab.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 207

Accessories Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements. See Instrument Status 

Monitors.

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Measurement Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Standards Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Instrument Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Samples Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Samples Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Click Settings in Pierce Modified Lowry to display the 

Accessories tab in the right pane. The available 

parameters depend on the installed accessories. See 

Accessories for details.

Click Settings in Pierce Modified Lowry to display the 

Samples tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the analysis.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended. For example, the names of three sample spectra 

using the base name “dye” would be dye1, dye2 and dye3.

Sample averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same sample or from multiple samples. To 

average multiple measurements of the same sample, select Replicate

and set Number of replicates to the total number of measurements. 

To average values from two or three samples, select Duplicate or 

Triplicate, respectively.

Use concentration 

limits

Displays high and low limit lines on the Run Chart tab to show 

whether sample concentrations are within the specified limits.

Use weight/volume 

correction

If available for the current unit, corrects sample concentrations using 

the entered target weight and volume:

corrected concentration = measured concentration * (actual weight / 

target weight) * (target volume / actual volume)
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

208 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Measurement Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Standards Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Instrument Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Accessories Tab for Pierce Modified Lowry

Lowry Standard Curves

A standard curve is required for colorimetric protein analysis. 

• A standard curve can be generated using two or more standards.

• The multipoint curve capability allows multiple replicates for each standards. Standards 

can be run in any order; however, best practice dictates that the standards be measured 

from the lowest concentration to the highest. 

• Determine whether or not to use a standard when analyzing samples against the standard 

curve.

• Establishing a new standard curve requires creating a new workbook.

• If a previously saved workbook is used, all concentration calculations for newly measured 

samples will be based on the standard absorbance values saved in the workbook.

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Lowry Standard Curves

Making Pierce Modified Lowry Assay Measurements

Making Pierce Modified Lowry Assay Measurements

See Sample and Standards Preparation for more information.

Note Each workbook will archive only one standard curve.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 209

Y To make Pierce Modified Lowry Assay measurements

1. Click Measure Pierce Modified Lowry in Pierce Modified Lowry.

2. If standards need to be acquired, click Measure. If standards have already been acquired, 

skip to step 7 to acquire sample data.

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

Use the appropriate buffer for the blank. See the reagent directions for details.

4. When the standards information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

If Standard averaging on the Standards tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the 

end of a standard name indicates the second measurement to be made of the standard. If 

Sample averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of standard names indicate 

the second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved standards information, use Import Standards.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each standard in the table.

To remove a standard, select it, right-click the table and choose Clear Standard. To 

remove all the standards, choose Clear Table.

To save standards information for later use, use Export Standards.

5. Click Continue.

6. Follow the instructions that appear, installing the specified standards.

The Standard Curve(s) tab displays the resulting standard curve (or curves). Specify the 

standards to use for the curve (or curves) by selecting Yes or No in the Use column in the 

table.

More:

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

click the Measure action button instead and skip to step 3.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

210 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

If Standard averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of a standard name indicates 

the second measurement. If Standard averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” 

indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

To permanently remove an acquired standard from the analysis, right-click it and choose 

Remove. Its information is crossed out but not removed from the table.

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

standard selected in the table. To access commands for customizing the display, including 

adding annotation, right-click the data. See Data Display for more information.

7. Click Measure.

8. Follow the instructions that appear.

9. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each sample in the table.

More:

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

If a standard curve is not calibrated...

• Try selecting a different curve fit type.

• Try remeasuring a standard using the correct standard material: 

select the listed standard, right-click the table and choose 

Remeasure.

• Try changing the setting of Minimum r2 on the Standards tab and 

acquire the standards again in a new workbook.

This is only an indicator that the required minimum number of points 

have been established for the selected curve fit type. It does not validate 

the integrity of the curve. For example, additional standards may be 

required to cover the expected assay concentration range.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce Modified Lowry

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 211

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

10. If only one sample will be measured, install it.

11. Click Continue.

12. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The sample results table contains the columns of information specified on the 

Configuration tab in Reports. If Sample averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement. If Sample averaging was set to 

Triplicate, “D” and “T” indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

The Standard Curve(s) tab shows graphically the relationship between the standard curve, 

measured spectral intensity and calculated concentration for the selected sample: A 

horizontal line connects the sample spectral intensity value on the Y-axis to the standard 

curve. A vertical line connects that point to the sample concentration value on the X-axis:

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples tab, horizontal limit 

lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

212 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).

To copy the data on the Standard Curve(s) tab or Run Chart tab, right-click the plot and 

choose Copy to Clipboard.

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Lowry Standard Curves

Data Display

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Overview

The proprietary dye-metal complex binds to protein in acidic conditions, causing a shift in 

the dye’s absorption maximum, which is measured at 660 nm. The complex is reddish-brown 

and turns green upon protein binding. This color change is produced by deprotonation of the 

dye at low pH facilitated by interactions with positively charged amino acid groups in the 

protein. Consequently, the complex interacts primarily with basic residues in the protein, such 

as histidine, arginine and lysine, and to a lesser extent tyrosine, tryptophan and phenylalanine.

Contents

• Overview

• Application Settings

• Pierce 660 nm Assay Workbooks

• Standard Curves

• Making Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay Measurements

The Thermo Scientific Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay 

reagent is a ready-to-use formulation that offers rapid, 

accurate and reproducible colorimetric detection of 

minute amounts of protein in solution. The reagent is 

ideal for measuring total protein concentration in samples 

containing reducing agents and/or detergents.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 213

Related Topics

Application Settings

Pierce 660 nm Assay Workbooks

Standard Curves

Making Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay Measurements

Pierce 660 nm Reagent and Protocols

Follow the assay kit manufacturer’s recommendations for all standards and samples 

(unknowns), ensuring they are subjected to the same timing and temperature throughout the 

assay.

Protein standards (BSA) for generating a standard curve may also be provided by the Pierce 

660 nm assay manufacturer.

Application Settings

Type Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Measurement Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Standards Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Instrument Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Accessories Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Samples Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Related Topics

Overview

Pierce 660 nm Assay Workbooks

Standard Curves

Making Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay Measurements

Type Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

To set data acquisition parameters for a Pierce 660 nm 

Protein Assay workbook, click Settings to access: 

Click Settings in Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay to display 

the Type tab in the right pane.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

214 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Standards Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Instrument Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Accessories Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Samples Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Measurement Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Feature Description

Name Application name.

Description (optional) Description of the template.

Standard curve Type of quantitative analysis used.

Pathlength Distance the light travels through the sample.

Click Settings in Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay to display 

the Measurement tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength Wavelength(s) to use for the analysis.

Correction Specifies bichromatic normalization of the absorbance data.

To use uncorrected data, select None. Without baseline correction, 

spectra may be offset from the baseline. If this offset is significant, the 

calculated protein concentration may be higher than the true value.

Single point subtracts the sample absorbance at the entered 

wavelength from the absorbance at every data point.

Sloping baseline draws a line between the data points at the entered 

wavelengths, finds its absorbance value at the analytical wavelength, 

and subtracts it from the measured absorbance.

Component name Component to quantify.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 215

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Standards Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

For selecting or defining formulas for additional data processing, with 

the results appearing in the analysis report. The formulas are written 

in a form similar to that used in a command script language, with 

constants, mathematical functions, etc. All functions are not 

case-sensitive. Spaces are not allowed between a function name and 

“(”. After adding formulas, edit their information in the formula table 

as desired. To delete a table row, right-click it and choose Delete Row. 

Some information in the table cannot be modified or deleted.

Instructions:

Y To add one or more predefined formulas

1. Click Select.

2. For each desired formula, select it in the list and click Add.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings in Options.

3. Click Close.

Y To define a formula

1. Click Build.

2. To enter a formula in its entirety, set Equation type to User 

defined and type the equation. To use a provided formula, select 

it and enter values for the variables.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings.

3. Click OK.

4. For selected provided formulas, enter a name and concentration 

unit in the table.

The available units depend on the Formulas & Units tab settings.

Feature Description
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

216 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Instrument Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Accessories Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Samples Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Standards Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Measurement Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Instrument Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Accessories Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Click Settings in Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay to display 

the Standards tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Curve fit type Type of equation used to create the standard curve from standard 

concentration values.

Standard averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same standard or from multiple standards 

prepared under the same conditions. To average multiple 

measurements of the same standard, select Replicate and set Number 

of replicates to the total number of measurements. To average values 

from two or three similar standards, select Duplicate or Triplicate, 

respectively.

Minimum r2 The r2

 value indicates how well the standard curve fits the standard 

data points, with 1.0 a perfect fit. If Minimum r2

 is selected, samples 

can be quantified only after that value is achieved for the standard 

curve.

Calculate from 

weight/volume

If available for the current unit, calculates concentration when the 

weight and volume of material used to prepare each standard is 

known. Enter the weight and volume for each standard in the 

appropriate table cells, or enter it later as part of running an analysis.

Standard Table Contains concentration and other information about the standards. 

To add information from a .csv (comma separated values) file or .tsv 

(tab separated values) file, click Import Standards. To save the 

information in a .csv file or .tsv file, click Export Standards.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 217

Samples Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Instrument Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Measurement Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Standards Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Accessories Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Samples Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Click Settings in Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay to display 

the Instrument tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Mode Specifies Scan or Fixed data acquisition.

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

Start wavelength and End 

wavelength (Scan only)

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring 

data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can 

improve the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral 

bandwidth decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral 

features.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data 

interval (for scanning measurements) or at each measured 

wavelength (for fixed-wavelength measurements). Increasing the 

integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but reduces 

the scan speed.

Data interval (Scan only) Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed (Scan only) Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.

Estimated time (Scan 

only)

Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration 

time increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely 

with scan speed.

Table of wavelengths 

(Fixed only)

Shows the analysis wavelength(s) entered on the Measurement 

tab.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

218 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Accessories Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements. See Instrument Status 

Monitors.

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Measurement Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Standards Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Instrument Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Samples Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Samples Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Click Settings in Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay to display 

the Accessories tab in the right pane. The available 

parameters depend on the installed accessories. See 

Accessories for details.

Click Settings in Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay to display 

the Samples tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the analysis.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended. For example, the names of three sample spectra 

using the base name “dye” would be dye1, dye2 and dye3.

Sample averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same sample or from multiple samples. To 

average multiple measurements of the same sample, select Replicate

and set Number of replicates to the total number of measurements. 

To average values from two or three samples, select Duplicate or 

Triplicate, respectively.

Use concentration 

limits

Displays high and low limit lines on the Run Chart tab to show 

whether sample concentrations are within the specified limits.

Use weight/volume 

correction

If available for the current unit, corrects sample concentrations using 

the entered target weight and volume:

corrected concentration = measured concentration * (actual weight / 

target weight) * (target volume / actual volume)
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 219

Related Topics

Type Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Measurement Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Standards Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Instrument Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Accessories Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Pierce 660 nm Assay Workbooks

When opened, the Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay application may prompt for a new standard 

curve, requiring the creation of a new workbook. If a previously saved workbook is used, all 

concentration calculations for newly measured samples will be based on the saved curve 

archived in the workbook.

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Standard Curves

Making Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay Measurements

Standard Curves

A standard curve is required for colorimetric protein analysis. 

• A standard curve can be generated using two or more standards.

• The multipoint curve capability allows multiple replicates for each standards. Standards 

can be run in any order; however, best practice dictates that the standards be measured 

from the lowest concentration to the highest. 

• Determine whether or not to use a standard when analyzing samples against the standard 

curve.

• Establishing a new standard curve requires creating a new workbook.

• If a previously saved workbook is used, all concentration calculations for newly measured 

samples will be based on the standard absorbance values saved in the workbook.

Note Each workbook will archive only one standard curve.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

220 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Pierce 660 nm Assay Workbooks

Making Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay Measurements

Making Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay Measurements

See Sample and Standards Preparation for more information.

Y To make Pierce 660 nm Protein assay measurements

1. Click Measure Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay in Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay.

2. If standards need to be acquired, click Measure. If standards have already been acquired, 

skip to step 7 to acquire sample data.

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

Use the appropriate buffer for the blank. See the reagent directions for details.

4. When the standards information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

If Standard averaging on the Standards tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the 

end of a standard name indicates the second measurement to be made of the standard. If 

Sample averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of standard names indicate 

the second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved standards information, use Import Standards.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each standard in the table.

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

click the Measure action button instead and skip to step 3.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 221

To remove a standard, select it, right-click the table and choose Clear Standard. To 

remove all the standards, choose Clear Table.

To save standards information for later use, use Export Standards.

5. Click Continue.

6. Follow the instructions that appear, installing the specified standards.

The Standard Curve(s) tab displays the resulting standard curve (or curves). Specify the 

standards to use for the curve (or curves) by selecting Yes or No in the Use column in the 

table.

More:

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

If Standard averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of a standard name indicates 

the second measurement. If Standard averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” 

indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

To permanently remove an acquired standard from the analysis, right-click it and choose 

Remove. Its information is crossed out but not removed from the table.

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

standard selected in the table. To access commands for customizing the display, including 

adding annotation, right-click the data. See Data Display for more information.

7. Click Measure.

If a standard curve is not calibrated...

• Try selecting a different curve fit type.

• Try remeasuring a standard using the correct standard material: 

select the listed standard, right-click the table and choose 

Remeasure.

• Try changing the setting of Minimum r2 on the Standards tab and 

acquire the standards again in a new workbook.

This is only an indicator that the required minimum number of points 

have been established for the selected curve fit type. It does not validate 

the integrity of the curve. For example, additional standards may be 

required to cover the expected assay concentration range.
4 Life Science Applications

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

222 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

8. Follow the instructions that appear.

9. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each sample in the table.

More:

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

10. If only one sample will be measured, install it.

11. Click Continue.

12. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The sample results table contains the columns of information specified on the 

Configuration tab in Reports. If Sample averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement. If Sample averaging was set to 

Triplicate, “D” and “T” indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

The Standard Curve(s) tab shows graphically the relationship between the standard curve, 

measured spectral intensity and calculated concentration for the selected sample: A 

horizontal line connects the sample spectral intensity value on the Y-axis to the standard 

curve. A vertical line connects that point to the sample concentration value on the X-axis:

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples tab, horizontal limit 

lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 223

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).

To copy the data on the Standard Curve(s) tab or Run Chart tab, right-click the plot and 

choose Copy to Clipboard.

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Pierce 660 nm Assay Workbooks

Standard Curves

Data Display

Protein Biuret

Contents

• Overview

• Application Settings

• Standard Curves

• Making Protein Biuret Assay Measurements
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

224 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Overview

Related Topics

Application Settings

Standard Curves

Making Protein Biuret Assay Measurements

Application Settings

Type Tab for Protein Biuret

Measurement Tab for Protein Biuret

Standards Tab for Protein Biuret

Instrument Tab for Protein Biuret

Accessories Tab for Protein Biuret

Samples Tab for Protein Biuret

Related Topics

Overview

Standard Curves

Making Protein Biuret Assay Measurements

Type Tab for Protein Biuret

The Protein Biuret application is similar to the Pierce 

Modified Lowry application; however, it involves a single 

incubation and requires more protein for the analysis. The 

protein-dye complex that is formed in the assay has a deep 

purple color and is measured at 545 nm. The calibration 

curve for this assay is linear with standards that range in 

concentration from 2 μg/ml to 10 μg/ml.

To set data acquisition parameters for a Protein Biuret

workbook, click Settings to access: 

Click Settings in Protein Biuret to display the Type tab 

in the right pane.

Feature Description

Name Application name.

Description (optional) Description of the template.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 225

Related Topics

Measurement Tab for Protein Biuret

Standards Tab for Protein Biuret

Instrument Tab for Protein Biuret

Accessories Tab for Protein Biuret

Samples Tab for Protein Biuret

Measurement Tab for Protein Biuret

Standard curve Type of quantitative analysis used.

Pathlength Distance the light travels through the sample.

Feature Description

Click Settings in Protein Biuret to display the 

Measurement tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Analysis wavelength Wavelength(s) to use for the analysis.

Correction Specifies bichromatic normalization of the absorbance data.

To use uncorrected data, select None. Without baseline correction, 

spectra may be offset from the baseline. If this offset is significant, the 

calculated protein concentration may be higher than the true value.

Single point subtracts the sample absorbance at the entered 

wavelength from the absorbance at every data point.

Sloping baseline draws a line between the data points at the entered 

wavelengths, finds its absorbance value at the analytical wavelength, 

and subtracts it from the measured absorbance.

Component name Component to quantify.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

226 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein Biuret

Standards Tab for Protein Biuret

Unit Component concentration unit. The available units depend on the 

Formulas & Units tab settings in Options.

Calculate additional 

results

For selecting or defining formulas for additional data processing, with 

the results appearing in the analysis report. The formulas are written 

in a form similar to that used in a command script language, with 

constants, mathematical functions, etc. All functions are not 

case-sensitive. Spaces are not allowed between a function name and 

“(”. After adding formulas, edit their information in the formula table 

as desired. To delete a table row, right-click it and choose Delete Row. 

Some information in the table cannot be modified or deleted.

Instructions:

Y To add one or more predefined formulas

1. Click Select.

2. For each desired formula, select it in the list and click Add.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings in Options.

3. Click Close.

Y To define a formula

1. Click Build.

2. To enter a formula in its entirety, set Equation type to User 

defined and type the equation. To use a provided formula, select 

it and enter values for the variables.

The available formulas depend on the Formulas & Units tab 

settings.

3. Click OK.

4. For selected provided formulas, enter a name and concentration 

unit in the table.

The available units depend on the Formulas & Units tab settings.

Feature Description
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 227

Instrument Tab for Protein Biuret

Accessories Tab for Protein Biuret

Samples Tab for Protein Biuret

Standards Tab for Protein Biuret

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein Biuret

Measurement Tab for Protein Biuret

Instrument Tab for Protein Biuret

Accessories Tab for Protein Biuret

Click Settings in Protein Biuret to display the Standards 

tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Curve fit type Type of equation used to create the standard curve from standard 

concentration values.

Standard averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same standard or from multiple standards 

prepared under the same conditions. To average multiple 

measurements of the same standard, select Replicate and set Number 

of replicates to the total number of measurements. To average values 

from two or three similar standards, select Duplicate or Triplicate, 

respectively.

Minimum r2 The r2

 value indicates how well the standard curve fits the standard 

data points, with 1.0 a perfect fit. If Minimum r2

 is selected, samples 

can be quantified only after that value is achieved for the standard 

curve.

Calculate from 

weight/volume

If available for the current unit, calculates concentration when the 

weight and volume of material used to prepare each standard is 

known. Enter the weight and volume for each standard in the 

appropriate table cells, or enter it later as part of running an analysis.

Standard Table Contains concentration and other information about the standards. 

To add information from a .csv (comma separated values) file or .tsv 

(tab separated values) file, click Import Standards. To save the 

information in a .csv file or .tsv file, click Export Standards.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

228 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Samples Tab for Protein Biuret

Instrument Tab for Protein Biuret

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein Biuret

Measurement Tab for Protein Biuret

Standards Tab for Protein Biuret

Accessories Tab for Protein Biuret

Samples Tab for Protein Biuret

Click Settings in Protein Biuret to display the 

Instrument tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Mode Specifies Scan or Fixed data acquisition.

Data mode Y-axis format for acquired data.

Start wavelength and End 

wavelength (Scan only)

Starting and ending values of the wavelength range for acquiring 

data.

Bandwidth A larger spectral bandwidth increases the amount of energy that 

passes through the sample. Increasing the bandwidth can 

improve the signal-to-noise ratio; however, a larger spectral 

bandwidth decreases the ability to resolve closely spaced spectral 

features.

Integration time How long the system acquires and averages data at each data 

interval (for scanning measurements) or at each measured 

wavelength (for fixed-wavelength measurements). Increasing the 

integration time improves the signal-to-noise ratio but reduces 

the scan speed.

Data interval (Scan only) Difference in wavelength between two consecutive data points.

Scan speed (Scan only) Wavelength range covered per unit time. Varies inversely with 

integration time. Increases as the data interval increases.

Estimated time (Scan 

only)

Estimated duration of data acquisition. Increases as integration 

time increases and as the data interval decreases. Varies inversely 

with scan speed.

Table of wavelengths 

(Fixed only)

Shows the analysis wavelength(s) entered on the Measurement 

tab.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 229

Accessories Tab for Protein Biuret

The status of accessories can be monitored during measurements. See Instrument Status 

Monitors.

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein Biuret

Measurement Tab for Protein Biuret

Standards Tab for Protein Biuret

Instrument Tab for Protein Biuret

Samples Tab for Protein Biuret

Samples Tab for Protein Biuret

Click Settings in Protein Biuret to display the 

Accessories tab in the right pane. The available 

parameters depend on the installed accessories. See 

Accessories for details.

Click Settings in Protein Biuret to display the Samples 

tab in the right pane.

Feature Description

Number of samples Number of samples in the analysis.

Base name Beginning of the name for sample spectra, to which a sequential 

number is appended. For example, the names of three sample spectra 

using the base name “dye” would be dye1, dye2 and dye3.

Sample averaging Whether and how to average concentration values from multiple 

measurements of the same sample or from multiple samples. To 

average multiple measurements of the same sample, select Replicate

and set Number of replicates to the total number of measurements. 

To average values from two or three samples, select Duplicate or 

Triplicate, respectively.

Use concentration 

limits

Displays high and low limit lines on the Run Chart tab to show 

whether sample concentrations are within the specified limits.

Use weight/volume 

correction

If available for the current unit, corrects sample concentrations using 

the entered target weight and volume:

corrected concentration = measured concentration * (actual weight / 

target weight) * (target volume / actual volume)
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

230 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Type Tab for Protein Biuret

Measurement Tab for Protein Biuret

Standards Tab for Protein Biuret

Instrument Tab for Protein Biuret

Accessories Tab for Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay

Standard Curves

A standard curve is required for colorimetric protein analysis. 

• A standard curve can be generated using two or more standards.

• The multipoint curve capability allows multiple replicates for each standards. Standards 

can be run in any order; however, best practice dictates that the standards be measured 

from the lowest concentration to the highest. 

• Determine whether or not to use a standard when analyzing samples against the standard 

curve.

• Establishing a new standard curve requires creating a new workbook.

• If a previously saved workbook is used, all concentration calculations for newly measured 

samples will be based on the standard absorbance values saved in the workbook.

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Making Protein Biuret Assay Measurements

Making Protein Biuret Assay Measurements

See Sample and Standards Preparation for more information.

Y To make Protein Biuret assay measurements

1. Click Measure Protein Biuret in Protein Biuret.

Note Each workbook will archive only one standard curve.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 231

2. If standards need to be acquired, click Measure. If standards have already been acquired, 

skip to step 7 to acquire sample data.

3. Follow the instructions that appear.

Use the appropriate buffer for the blank. See the reagent directions for details.

4. When the standards information appears, modify it if desired.

More:

If Standard averaging on the Standards tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the 

end of a standard name indicates the second measurement to be made of the standard. If 

Sample averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of standard names indicate 

the second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

To enter previously saved standards information, use Import Standards.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each standard in the table.

To remove a standard, select it, right-click the table and choose Clear Standard. To 

remove all the standards, choose Clear Table.

To save standards information for later use, use Export Standards.

5. Click Continue.

6. Follow the instructions that appear, installing the specified standards.

The Standard Curve(s) tab displays the resulting standard curve (or curves). Specify the 

standards to use for the curve (or curves) by selecting Yes or No in the Use column in the 

table.

More:

Note To start an analysis immediately after viewing or changing the template settings, 

click the Measure action button instead and skip to step 3.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

232 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The table contains the columns of information specified on the Configuration tab in 

Reports. Examples include sample identification, user name, and the results of replicate, 

duplicate or triplicate measurements and their standard deviation.

If Standard averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of a standard name indicates 

the second measurement. If Standard averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” 

indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

To permanently remove an acquired standard from the analysis, right-click it and choose 

Remove. Its information is crossed out but not removed from the table.

The Data tab displays the acquired data (a fixed data point or scan spectrum) for the 

standard selected in the table. To access commands for customizing the display, including 

adding annotation, right-click the data. See Data Display for more information.

7. Click Measure.

8. Follow the instructions that appear.

9. When samples information appears, modify it if desired.

If Calculate from weight/volume was selected on the Standards tab, enter the weight and 

volume for each sample in the table.

More:

If Sample averaging on the Samples tab in Settings was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement to be made of the sample. If Sample 

averaging was set to Triplicate, “D” and “T” at the end of sample names indicate the 

second and third measurements to be made, respectively.

If a standard curve is not calibrated...

• Try selecting a different curve fit type.

• Try remeasuring a standard using the correct standard material: 

select the listed standard, right-click the table and choose 

Remeasure.

• Try changing the setting of Minimum r2 on the Standards tab and 

acquire the standards again in a new workbook.

This is only an indicator that the required minimum number of points 

have been established for the selected curve fit type. It does not validate 

the integrity of the curve. For example, additional standards may be 

required to cover the expected assay concentration range.
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 233

To enter previously saved samples information, use Load Samples. To save the samples 

information, use Save Samples.

10. If only one sample will be measured, install it.

11. Click Continue.

12. Follow any instructions that appear, such as to install a specified sample.

The sample results table contains the columns of information specified on the 

Configuration tab in Reports. If Sample averaging was set to Duplicate, “D” at the end of 

a sample name indicates the second measurement. If Sample averaging was set to 

Triplicate, “D” and “T” indicate the second and third measurements, respectively.

The Standard Curve(s) tab shows graphically the relationship between the standard curve, 

measured spectral intensity and calculated concentration for the selected sample: A 

horizontal line connects the sample spectral intensity value on the Y-axis to the standard 

curve. A vertical line connects that point to the sample concentration value on the X-axis:

The Run Chart tab plots the concentration of the measured component versus sample 

number. If Use concentration limits was selected on the Samples tab, horizontal limit 

lines show whether the concentrations are within the specified limits:
4 Life Science Applications

Protein Biuret

234 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To measure a sample again, right-click its row in the results table and choose Remeasure. 

After the remeasurement, the previous information for the sample is crossed out (but not 

removed from the table).

To copy the data on the Standard Curve(s) tab or Run Chart tab, right-click the plot and 

choose Copy to Clipboard.

Related Topics

Overview

Application Settings

Standard Curves

Data Display
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 235

5

Accessories

• Sample Position Cell Holders

• Reference Cell Holders

• 8 Degree Near Normal Specular 

Reflectance

• 15 Degree Specular Reflectance

• 20 Degree Specular Reflectance

• 30 Degree Specular Reflectance

• 45 Degree Specular Reflectance

• 60 Degree Specular Reflectance

• Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

• Depolarizer

• Grazing Angle Specular Reflectance

• Integrated Fiber Optic Module

• Integrating Sphere Diffuse Reflectance

• Mercury Lamp

• Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell 

Holder

• TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

• Probe Handling and Maintenance

• Rapid Mix Accessory

• Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

• SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell 

Changer

• Smart Rotary Cell Changer

• Smart Sipper

• Temperature Probe

• Variable Angle Transmission

• VERSA Probe
5 Accessories

236 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 237

6

8 Degree Near Normal Specular Reflectance

For Local Control instruments:

D://2616_HARRICK_8NN Spec Accy_UG.pdf

For Computer Control instruments:

C://2616_HARRICK_8NN Spec Accy_UG.pdf

If these links do not work, see your documentation CD.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
6

8 Degree Near Normal Specular Reflectance

238 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 239

7

15 Degree Specular Reflectance

For Local Control instruments:

D://2222_PIKE_15spec Accy_UG.pdfFor Computer Control instruments:

C://2222_PIKE_15spec Accy_UG.pdfIf these links do not work, see your documentation 

CD.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
7

240 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 241

8

20 Degree Specular Reflectance

For Local Control instruments:

D://2614_PIKE_20spec Accy_UG.pdfFor Computer Control instruments:

C://2614_PIKE_20spec Accy_UG.pdfIf these links do not work, see your documentation 

CD.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
8

242 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 243

9

30 Degree Specular Reflectance

For Local Control instruments:

D://2223_PIKE_30spec Accy_UG.pdfFor Computer Control instruments:

C://2223_PIKE_30spec Accy_UG.pdfIf these links do not work, see your documentation 

CD.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
9

244 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 245

10

45 Degree Specular Reflectance

For Local Control instruments:

D://2224_PIKE_45spec Accy_UG.pdfFor Computer Control instruments:

C://2224_PIKE_45spec Accy_UG.pdfIf these links do not work, see your documentation 

CD.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
10

246 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 247

11

60 Degree Specular Reflectance

For Local Control instruments:

D://2615_PIKE_60spec Accy_UG.pdfFor Computer Control instruments:

C://2615_PIKE_60spec Accy_UG.pdfIf these links do not work, see your documentation 

CD.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
11

248 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 249

12

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

The Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC) is an automated performance verification 

accessory.

The CVC carousel uses the same Smart base unit as the Smart Thermostatted Rotary 7-Cell 

Changer (Rotary Cell Changer). The CVC is also supplied without the base unit for 

customers wishing to use the CVC with an existing Rotary Cell Changer base.

The CVC accurately positions the required standards for each test in the sample beam. The 

following table describes the tests and test materials included with the CVC.

INSIGHT software stores all instrument performance specifications and tolerances.

NOTICE 

• Do not touch the exposed surface of the standards in the CVC.

• Do not allow moisture to leak into the accessory.

Contents

• Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit

• Installing Complete CVC in the Instrument

• CVC Test Limits

• Using the CVC

• Maintenance

Test Standard USP EP

Wavelength Accuracy Holmium perchlorate Holmium perchlorate Holmium perchlorate

Wavelength Repeatability Holmium perchlorate Holmium perchlorate Holmium perchlorate

Absorbance Accuracy 1A Neutral Density filter Potassium dichromate Potassium dichromate

UV Absorbance Accuracy Potassium dichromate Potassium dichromate Potassium dichromate

Absorbance Repeatability 1A Neutral Density filter Potassium dichromate Potassium dichromate

Stray Light 220, 340 nm cut-off filters Sodium Iodide Potassium chloride

Noise 0A and 1A Neutral Density 

filter

Instrument lamp Instrument lamp
12

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

250 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit

If purchased as “carousel only”, install the CVC on a Smart base supplied with the Rotary Cell 

Changer.

1. Remove the Rotary Cell Changer (if installed).

Turn the knurled knob counterclockwise on the top of the cell changer and pull it 

upwards.

2. Install the CVC.

• Identify the position of the notch on the motor shaft of the Smart base unit.

• View the underside of the carousel to locate the position of the tab.

3. Place the carousel on the shaft; turn the knurled knob clockwise to tighten.

Related Topics

Installing Complete CVC in the Instrument

CVC Test Limits

Using the CVC

Maintenance

Installing Complete CVC in the Instrument

Install the Smart Accessory as described in Installing a Smart Accessory.

Note Ensure a positive location of the tab in the notch.

Tab on underside

of carousel

Notch on motor 

shaft of Smart

base unit.

Contents
12 

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 251

Initialization

The accessory must be initialized each time it is installed and after changing the cell holder 

when the Smart base unit is installed. Initializing verifies the cell position and resets the cell 

holder to position 1.

Languages

Y To initialize a cell changer

1. In the selected application, choose Settings > Accessories > Cell Changer.

2. Click Reset.

Related Topics

Installing a Smart Accessory

Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit

Loading CVC Calibration Data

• Initialization

• Loading CVC Calibration Data

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during 

initialization.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. Gardez vos mains, ainsi que tout objet, à 

l’écart de l’accessoire pendant l’initialisation.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während der 

Initialisierung vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’inizializzazione.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos lejos del alcance 

del accesorio durante la inicialización.
12

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

252 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

CVC Test Limits

Using the CVC

Maintenance

Loading CVC Calibration Data

Each CVC has unique calibration data shipped with the accessory. Before a CVC can be used 

for performance testing, it’s serial number and calibration file must be read by INSIGHT 

software. It is not necessary to reload the data unless you purchase a new CVC or have it 

recalibrated.

Make a backup copy of the calibration data before use. Store the master and the Certificate of 

Calibration in a secure location.

Y To load CVC calibration data

1. From the INSIGHT software Home screen, click Performance Verification.

2. Click Load CVC Calibration. A dialog box lets you browse for the calibration file. The 

file is provided on a memory stick or other medium. The following format is used for the 

file name:

evodata_[x]_[y].cal

where: x is the serial number of the CVC carousel, and

y is the CVC type (e for EP, u for USP and s for Standard).

3. Locate and select the calibration file that matches the installed CVC and click OK.

Related Topics

Installing a Smart Accessory

Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit

Initialization

CVC Test Limits

Using the CVC

Maintenance

Note The software can store one calibration file for each type of CVC.
12 

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 253

CVC Test Limits

The pass/fail limits are based on the instrument specification and any other tolerances 

associated with the Certified Reference Material (CRM). The software stores all tolerances 

and any instrument pass/fail limits with the calibration data and reports these values as 

appropriate.

Related Topics

Installing a Smart Accessory

Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit

Installing Complete CVC in the Instrument

Loading CVC Calibration Data

Using the CVC

Maintenance

Using the CVC

Before using the CVC, mount the CVC carousel on the base unit and install the accessory in 

the spectrophotometer. See Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit and Installing 

Complete CVC in the Instrument.

If using this CVC for the first time, load the calibration data. See Loading CVC Calibration 

Data.

Running Performance Verification Tests

The CVC performance tests appear only when the CVC is properly installed and a valid 

calibration file has been loaded.

Y To run CVC performance verification tests

1. Click Performance Verification in Home.

The available tests appear in the right pane.

Contents

• Running Performance Verification Tests

• Viewing CVC Test Reports

Note If you are running security software, you can perform performance verification tests 

only if you have been given the right to do so by the system administrator.
12

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

254 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

2. Select the tests to run.

Languages

Note The available tests depend on the type of CVC installed.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during 

operation.

ATTENTION Évitez les risques de pincement. Éloignez les mains et les objets de 

l’accessoire pendant son fonctionnement.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während des 

Betriebs vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento.Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’operazione.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento.Mantenga manos y objetos alejados del 

accesorio durante el funcionamiento.

CAUTION 
12 

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 255

3. Click Run.

The status window shows the data and progress.

To end the tests before they are finished, click Stop.

When all the tests are completed, a dialog box shows the report.

The report can be printed or copied. A signature block appears at the end.

The report is saved automatically and appears on the PV Reports tab in My Data. See 

Viewing CVC Test Reports for details.

4. Click Close.

Related Topics

Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit

Installing Complete CVC in the Instrument

Loading CVC Calibration Data

CVC Test Limits

CVC Test Results

Viewing CVC Test Reports

Note If the serial number of the CVC carousel does not match the serial number 

stored with the current calibration data for the CVC type, an error message appears. 

See Loading CVC Calibration Data.
12

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

256 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Maintenance

CVC Test Results

For each test in the suite, the report shows:

• Test name

• Operator

• Time and date of the test

• Instrument type

• Instrument serial number

• CVC serial number

• Expected result or range, measured result and a pass or fail result

Related Topics

Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit

Installing Complete CVC in the Instrument

Loading CVC Calibration Data

CVC Test Limits

Running Performance Verification Tests

Viewing CVC Test Reports

Maintenance

Viewing CVC Test Reports

Y To view a CVC test report

1. From the INSIGHT software Home screen, click My Data.

2. Click the PV Reports tab.

The right pane shows all the performance tests run with the instrument.
12 

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 257

• To sort by Report or Date, click the column heading.

• To open a report, double-click the row.

• To combine reports, hold down Shift or Ctrl to select multiple rows, and then 

double-click a selected row.

See My Data and Performance Verification for more information.

Related Topics

Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit

Installing Complete CVC in the Instrument

Loading CVC Calibration Data

CVC Test Limits

Running Performance Verification Tests

CVC Test Results

Maintenance

Maintenance

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Recertification

NOTICE Do not touch the exposed surface of the standards in the CVC.
12

Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC)

258 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Routine Maintenance

Very little maintenance is required to keep the accessory in good working condition. The 

exterior surface of the accessory should be kept clean and free of spilled chemicals and dust.

Use the provided bulb to remove dust from the exposed surface of the standards.

Always keep the accessory in its case when not in use. Always keep the cover closed. Never 

expose the standards to airborne smoke or dust.

Related Topics

Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit

Installing Complete CVC in the Instrument

Loading CVC Calibration Data

Using the CVC

Recertification

Recertification

We offer a recertification and repair service for the CVC. It is recommended that you return 

your accessory for recertification every two years — or whenever you have reason to believe 

that it no longer exhibits its certified value. Before returning your accessory, contact technical 

support.

Related Topics

Installing the Carousel on the Smart Base Unit

Installing Complete CVC in the Instrument

Loading CVC Calibration Data

Using the CVC

Routine Maintenance
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 259

13

Depolarizer 

For Local Control instruments:

D://2613_HARRICK_Depolarizer Accy_UG.pdfFor Computer Control instruments:

C://2613_HARRICK_Depolarizer Accy_UG.pdfIf these links do not work, see your 

documentation CD.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
13

260 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 261

14

Grazing Angle Specular Reflectance

This manual accessory is designed to analyze “mirror like” planar surfaces and/or coatings on 

planar surfaces by recording the specular reflectance at 85 degrees. The energy profile as a 

function of angle is a Gaussian peak centered on 85° and approximately 6° wide.

For more information for Local Control instruments:

D://2625_Grazing Angle Spec Accy_UG.pdfFor Computer Control instruments:

C://2625_Grazing Angle Spec Accy_UG.pdfIf these links do not work, see your 

documentation CD.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
14

262 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
15 

Integrated Fiber Optic Module

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 263

Integrated Fiber Optic Module

This accessory provides transfer optics and an integrated detector for SMA (SubMiniature 

version A)-terminated fiber optic probes. Probes must be purchased separately. A test cable is 

included for aligning the accessory.

Safety Considerations

To avoid injury while using the accessory, do not stare at the UV beam or UV light leaving a 

coupled fiber optic cable.

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Operating Precautions

Handle the accessory carefully:

• Do not allow moisture to leak into the accessory.

Contents

• Safety Considerations

• Operating Precautions

• Installation

• Attaching Cables and Probes

• Operation

• Maintenance

• Troubleshooting

Detector

cable

Test cable

Fiber optic 

module

Detector cable

opening
15

Integrated Fiber Optic Module

264 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

• Wipe off spilled chemicals immediately.

• Do not drop the accessory.

• Protect the accessory from mechanical shock.

• Do not touch the exposed optics.

• Keep the protective caps on the ends of the fiber optic ports when they are not in use.

• Store the accessory in a dust-free location.

• Handle the test cable gently and follow the operating precautions for any fiber optic cable 

attached to a probe. See Probe Handling and Maintenance.

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Installation

Y To install the accessory

1. Turn off the spectrophotometer. See Using the Spectrophotometer.

2. Remove the instrument detector.

Avoid UV radiation hazard in the detector compartment. Protect eyes and skin from 

exposure.

Languages

CAUTION Safety glasses with side shields or goggles with solid side pieces are the only 

equipment that provides adequate eye protection against direct and reflected UV 

light.

Remarque Seules les lunettes de sécurité avec écrans latéraux ou les lunettes protectrices avec parties latérales solides protègent les yeux de façon adéquate contre la 

lumière UV directe et réfléchie.

Anmerkung Sicherheitsbrillen mit seitlichem Schutz bzw. Schutzbrillen mit festen 

Seitenteilen bieten als einzige Ausrüstungsgegenstände adäquaten Schutz der 

Augen gegen direkte und reflektierte UV-Strahlung.

N.B. Gli occhiali protettivi con schermi laterali o con schermi laterali monolente 

sono l'unica attrezzatura che fornisce un'adeguata protezione degli occhi dalla luce 

UV diretta e riflessa.
15 

Integrated Fiber Optic Module

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 265

See Removing and Installing the Detector Module.

3. Remove the detector access panel. See Detector Access Panel.

4. Insert the connector on the accessory interface cable into the socket on the bottom of the 

accessory.

5. Install the accessory. See Installing a Manual Accessory.

Before installing, route the interface cable under the baseplate and through the detector 

cable opening so the free connector is above the accessory baseplate.

6. Pass the connector through the opening between the sample and detector compartments. 

7. Plug it into the socket in the detector compartment and press to secure it.

Languages

Nota Las gafas protectoras con protección lateral de seguridad o con piezas laterales sólidas son el único equipo que proporciona la protección para los ojos adecuada contra la luz ultravioleta directa y reflejada.

WARNING Avoid UV radiation hazard. Do not stare at the beam or light leaving a 

coupled fiber optic cable.

AVERTISSEMENT Évitez l'exposition au rayonnements UV. Ne regardez jamais le 

faisceau de lumière qui sort d’une fibre optique couplé.

WARNUNG Gefahren durch UV-Strahlung sind zu vermeiden. Nicht in den Strahl 

eines gekoppelten Glasfaserkabels blicken.

AVVERTENZA Evitare il rischio di radiazioni UV.Non fissare il raggio di luce che esce 

dal cavo a fibre ottiche accoppiato.

ADVERTENCIA Evite el riesgo de radiación ultravioleta.No mire al rayo luminoso que 

sale de un cable de fibra óptica acoplado.
15

Integrated Fiber Optic Module

266 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

8. Turn on the spectrophotometer and wait until it initializes. See Using the 

Spectrophotometer.

9. If the instrument has the Application Focused Beam GeometryTM (AFBG) option, select 

an application, click Settings > Instrument and set Bandwidth to Fiber.

10. Align the accessory.

Related Topics

Attaching Cables and Probes

Aligning the Accessory

Attaching Cables and Probes

The accessory is compatible with probes and cables that have SMA connectors. Contact us for 

compatible probes. See Contacting Us.

Install the accessory and align it before installing cables and probes.

Y To attach cables and probes

1. Remove the protective caps from the probe cables and accessory ports.

Store the caps securely so they can be replaced when the probe or accessory is removed 

from the instrument.

2. Route the cables through the detector compartment on the instrument.

3. Attach the probe’s Light Input cable to the Light Output port on the accessory.

To attach a cable, insert the SMA connector and gently tighten the ferrule by hand.

WARNING 

Note If you change the application, reset Bandwidth to Fiber, or create a template

for fiber optic sampling for this application and save your data in a workbook based 

on that template.

NOTICE When attaching fiber optic cables to the accessory ports, avoid:

• Twisting or bending the cable.

• Touching the tips with your fingers.

• Overtightening or using tools to tighten the connectors.
15 

Integrated Fiber Optic Module

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 267

4. Attach the probe’s Light Output cable to the Light Input port on the accessory.

Related Topics

Installation

Aligning the Accessory

Operation

Follow the probe manufacturer’s recommendations for compatible samples and operating 

procedures.

If the instrument has the AFBG option, in each application click Settings > Instrument and 

set Bandwidth to Fiber.

Related Topics

Installation

Attaching Cables and Probes

Aligning the Accessory

Maintenance

Light Output port

Light Input port

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Aligning the Accessory
15

Integrated Fiber Optic Module

268 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Routine Maintenance

Follow these guidelines:

• Align the accessory each time it is installed or if performance degrades.

• Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for probe maintenance.

Related Topics

Installation

Attaching Cables and Probes

Aligning the Accessory

Troubleshooting

Aligning the Accessory

Align the accessory each time it is installed it or if performance degrades.

Y To align the accessory

1. Remove the protective caps from the test cable and from the ports on the accessory.

Store the end caps securely so they can be replaced when the cable or accessory is removed 

from the instrument.

2. Route the test cable through the detector compartment.

3. Attach both connectors to the ports on the accessory.

To attach a cable, insert the SMA connector and gently tighten the ferrule by hand.

4. From INSIGHT software, choose System Settings > Alignment.

See Alignment Tab.

5. Set the filter.

Set Filter to Green (typical) or White (no filter) if the signal is low.

6. Set Bandwidth to Fiber.

NOTICE When attaching fiber optic cables to the accessory ports, avoid:

• Twisting or bending the cable.

• Touching the cable ends with your fingers.

• Overtightening or using tools to tighten the connectors.

• Scratching the cable ends.
15 

Integrated Fiber Optic Module

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 269

7. Click Start.

8. Maximize the signal strength:

a. Use the Up/Down knob on the accessory to adjust the signal strength.

b. Adjust the Left/Right knob on the accessory to increase the signal further.

c. Repeat steps a and b until the signal is at its maximum value.

9. Click Stop.

Related Topics

Installation

Attaching Cables and Probes

Routine Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Left/Right alignment knob

Up/Down alignment knob
15

Integrated Fiber Optic Module

270 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Troubleshooting

Related Topics

Installation

Attaching Cables and Probes

Operation

Maintenance

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Unexpected 

changes in signal 

strength or no 

signal

• Soiled probe, optical 

fibers, connectors or 

ports on the Fiber Optic 

Coupler

• Fiber Optic Coupler is 

not aligned properly

• Damaged probe, optical 

fiber or Fiber Optic 

Coupler.

Use the test cable provided with the Fiber 

Optic Coupler to test its performance 

without the probe.

• If performance is acceptable with the 

test cable but not with the probe, 

clean the probe and replace any worn 

seals or O-rings. See Cleaning Probes.

• If performance is still unacceptable, 

contact us. See Contacting Us.
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 271

16

Integrating Sphere Diffuse Reflectance

This 60 mm Spectralon® integrating sphere accessory supports reflectance and transmittance 

measurements. Specular included and specular excluded measurements are supported for 

reflectance. Solids and solutions, in up to 50 mm pathlength cuvettes, are supported for 

transmittance.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
16

Integrating Sphere Diffuse Reflectance

272 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
17 

Mercury Lamp

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 273

Mercury Lamp

This mercury lamp can be used to calibrate and verify the performance of your UV-Visible 

spectrophotometer.

Safety Considerations

The mercury lamp has a safety interlock to prevent accidental exposure to dangerous levels of 

UV radiation during operation. After the lamp is installed, removing the lamp from the port 

while the instrument is powered on will activate the interlock to block all radiation from the 

lamp.

To avoid defeating the safety interlock, keep all magnets and strong magnetic fields (such as 

those produced by a mass spectrometer or various medical instruments) away from the lamp 

while the instrument is powered on and the lamp cable is connected.

Consignes de sécurité

La lampe à vapeur de mercure comprend un verrouillage de sécurité destiné à prévenir toute 

exposition accidentelle à des doses dangereuses de rayonnement ultraviolet pendant le 

fonctionnement de l’instrument. Une fois la lampe installée, et lorsque l’instrument est sous 

tension, le retrait de la lampe du port active le verrouillage afin de bloquer le rayonnement de 

la lampe.

Pour ne pas déjouer le verrouillage de sécurité, tenez les aimants et autres champs magnétiques 

puissants (tels que ceux produits par un spectromètre de masse ou divers instruments 

médicaux) éloignés de la lampe lorsque l’instrument est sous tension et que le câble de la 

lampe est raccordé.

Contents

• Safety Considerations

• Operating Precautions

• Installation and Operation
17

Mercury Lamp

274 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Sicherheitshinweise

Die Quecksilberlampe ist mit einem Sicherheitsschalter ausgerüstet, um während des Betriebs 

eine ungewollte Exposition mit einer gefährlichen Intensität an UV-Strahlung zu vermeiden. 

Wenn die Lampe nach der Lampeninstallation bei eingeschaltetem Instrument aus dem 

Anschluss entfernt wird, wird der Sicherheitsschalter aktiviert, um die Strahlungsabgabe der 

Lampe vollständig zu sperren.

Um eine Deaktivierung des Sicherheitsschalters zu vermeiden, halten Sie alle Magnete und 

starken Magnetfelder (z. B. solche, die von einem Massenspektrometer oder verschiedenen 

Medizingeräten produziert werden) von der Lampe fern, während das Instrument 

eingeschaltet und das Lampenkabel angeschlossen ist.

Considerazioni sulla sicurezza

La lampada al mercurio è dotata di un dispositivo di sicurezza per evitare l’esposizione 

accidentale a livelli pericolosi di radiazione UV durante il funzionamento. Una volta installata 

la lampada, la rimozione della lampada stessa dalla porta mentre lo strumento è acceso, 

attiverà il dispositivo di sicurezza per bloccare tutte le radiazioni prodotte dalla lampada.

Per evitare la disattivazione del dispositivo di sicurezza, tenere tutti i magneti e i forti campi 

magnetici (come quelli prodotti da uno spettrometro di massa o da vari strumenti medicali) 

lontano dalla lampada mentre lo strumento è acceso e il cavo della lampada è collegato.

Consideraciones sobre seguridad

La lámpara de mercurio tiene un sistema de interrupción de seguridad para impedir 

exposiciones accidentales a niveles peligrosos de radiación ultravioleta durante el 

funcionamiento. Una vez instalada la lámpara, su extracción de la conexión con el 

instrumento encendido activará el sistema de interrupción para bloquear toda su radiación. 

Para evitar neutralizar el sistema de interrupción de seguridad, mantenga todos los imanes y 

campos magnéticos intensos (como los producidos por un espectrómetro de masas o diversos 

instrumentos médicos) lejos de la lámpara mientras el instrumento esté encendido y el cable 

de la lámpara esté conectado. 

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Installation and Operation
17 

Mercury Lamp

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 275

Operating Precautions

Handle the accessory carefully:

• Do not allow moisture to leak into the accessory.

• Wipe off spilled chemicals immediately.

• Do not drop the accessory.

• Protect the accessory from mechanical shock.

• Do not touch the exposed lens near the end of the lamp shaft (fingerprints and dirt will 

degrade performance.

• Store the accessory in its case.

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Installation and Operation

Installation and Operation

Use this accessory to perform wavelength and bandwidth tests or a wavelength calibration.

Languages

WARNING Avoid UV radiation hazard in the mercury lamp compartment. Protect eyes 

and skin from exposure.

AVERTISSEMENT Évitez tout risque de rayonnement à l’intérieur du compartiment de la 

lampe à vapeur de mercure. Protéger vos yeux et votre peau de toute exposition au 

rayonnement.

WARNUNG Gefährliche UV-Strahlung im Gehäuse der Quecksilberlampe ist zu 

vermeiden. Augen und Haut müssen vor der Strahlung geschützt werden. 

AVVERTENZA Evitare il rischio di radiazione UV nel vano della lampada al mercurio. 

Proteggere occhi e pelle dall’esposizione.
17

Mercury Lamp

276 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To install the mercury lamp

1. Plug the lamp cable into the Hg Lamp connector on the back of the spectrophotometer. 

See Connectors.

Languages

2. Follow these instructions to run the mercury lamp Performance Verification (PV) tests or 

to perform a wavelength calibration.

• To run a PV test, in INSIGHT software click Home and then click Performance 

Verification. If you have a custom button configuration, click Home, select the 

Classic group and then click Performance Verification.

Select the following PV tests (deselect all other tests) and then click Run:

• Wavelength Accuracy - Hg Lines

• Wavelength Reproducibility - Hg 546

ADVERTENCIA Evite el riesgo de radiación ultravioleta en el compartimento de la 

lámpara de mercurio. Proteja sus ojos y la piel de la exposición.

WARNING Avoid defeating the safety interlock. Keep magnets and strong magnetic 

fields away from the mercury lamp when it is installed and the instrument is running.

AVERTISSEMENT Éviter de déjouer le verrouillage de sécurité. Tenez les aimants et 

autres champs magnétiques puissants éloignés de la lampe à vapeur de mercure 

lorsque celle-ci est installée et que l’instrument est en marche.

WARNUNG Der Sicherheitsschalter darf nicht deaktiviert werden. Magneten und 

starke Magnetfelder müssen von der Quecksilberlampe fern gehalten werden, wenn 

die Lampe installiert ist und das Instrument läuft. 

AVVERTENZA Evitare la disattivazione del dispositivo di sicurezza. Tenere i magneti e 

i forti campi magnetici lontano dalla lampada al mercurio mentre è installata e lo 

strumento è in funzione.

ADVERTENCIA Evite neutralizar el sistema de interrupción de seguridad. Mantenga 

los imanes y campos magnéticos intensos lejos de la lámpara de mercurio cuando esté 

instalada y el instrumento en funcionamiento.
17 

Mercury Lamp

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 277

See Performance Verification for more information.

• To run wavelength calibration, in INSIGHT software choose System Settings > 

Calibrations. In the Lamps group, under the Hg Lamp heading, click Calibrate.

3. When prompted, lift the Mercury Lamp Access Cover and insert the lamp into the port. 

Press gently until it is secure.

A blue light on the lamp handle indicates when the accessory is properly installed.

4. Click OK to start the selected operation (PV test or calibration).

The lamp requires a few minutes to warm up. When the lamp is ready, the selected 

operation starts automatically. A status bar shows the progress. When the operation is 

completed, a prompt appears showing the calibration or test results.

If the calibration fails, an error message appears. Contact Technical Support. See 

Contacting Us.

If a mercury lamp PV test fails, perform the wavelength calibration and then rerun both 

tests. If a test fails again, contact Technical Support.

5. To run another operation with the mercury lamp, leave the lamp in the instrument, click 

OK and proceed.

6. When finished, click OK at the prompt, remove the mercury lamp from the port and 

secure the access cover.

Samples can be analyzed only when the lamp is not in the port.

Y To disconnect the mercury lamp

Unplug the lamp cable and place the lamp in the provided case.

Note Calibrate only if the instrument fails the Wavelength Accuracy test.

Indicator light
17

Mercury Lamp

278 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 279

18

nanoCell

The nanoCell is designed to make small volume measurements of solutions.

The nanoCell has two basic components: the nanoCell accessory that fits in a standard 1 cm 

cell holder and the mirrored lid used for the measurement.

Getting Started

This section explains how to measure a sample using the nanoCell.

Y To measure samples with the nanoCell

1. Insert the nanoCell into the sample position single cell holder.

Make sure one of the quartz windows is facing the light beam entering the nanoCell.

Contents

• Getting Started

• Overview

• Introduction to Small Volume Measurements

• Using the nanoCell

• Cleaning the nanoCell

• Pathlength Correction Factors

• Frequently Asked Questions

nanoCell

0.2 mm and 1.0 mm pathlength lids

NOTICE Never submerge any portion of the nanoCell in liquid.
18

nanoCell

280 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

2. Load the solution (buffer, water) used for the baseline (scan) or zero (fixed wavelength) 

measurement.

Using a small volume pipette, load 0.7 to 3.0 μL of liquid in the sample loading area at 

the top of the nanoCell.

3. Install an appropriate lid on top of the nanoCell.

Align the grooves in the lid with the two pins near the top of the nanoCell.

4. Measure the zero or baseline.

5. When the measurement is finished, use the pipette to remove the excess liquid.

6. Use a laboratory tissue or microfiber cloth to wipe the sample loading area and the mirror 

in the lid.

7. Repeat the loading and cleaning steps to measure your samples.

Related Topics

Using the nanoCell

Cleaning the nanoCell

Pathlength Correction Factors

Frequently Asked Questions

Quartz window

Sample loading area

Locator pins Locator grooves
18 

nanoCell

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 281

Overview

The nanoCell is designed to make accurate, reproducible measurements using very small 

volumes of solution. The nanoCell is most commonly used to measure the concentrations of 

life science samples (DNA, RNA, proteins). The accessory can also be used to measure the 

absorbance of any highly concentrated sample such as small molecule pharmaceuticals or dyes 

used in the textile industry.

The nanoCell allows you to make quick, easy measurements of microliter samples without 

limiting your instrument to only small volume measurements. Simply insert the nanoCell 

into the cell holder, load the cell, install the lid, and begin the measurements.

The nanoCell is identical in dimensions to a standard cuvette, and can be used with a single 

cell holder. Liquid samples are loaded on the sample loading window at the top of the 

accessory and remain there throughout the measurement process.

A schematic of the light path of the nanoCell is shown in Figure 1. Light from the 

spectrophotometer enters the nanoCell and reaches the sample loading area via an optical 

system containing small fiber optic cables. This light passes out the sample loading window, 

through the sample, and reflects off a mirror in the lid of the nanoCell. The position of the 

mirrored lid relative to the sample loading window defines the pathlength of the accessory. 

The lid also helps to prevent rapid evaporation of the sample.

The light that passes through the sample is coupled into a second fiber optic cable and is 

launched out of the nanoCell accessory. The absorbance of the solution is measured using the 

detector in the spectrophotometer.
18

nanoCell

282 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Figure 1. Light path of the nanoCell accessory

Related Topics

Using the nanoCell

Cleaning the nanoCell

Pathlength Correction Factors

Frequently Asked Questions

Introduction to Small Volume Measurements

Small volume samples are measured by reducing the measurement pathlength to 

accommodate the reduced volume. For example, it would be impossible to measure a 1 μl 

drop of solution in a standard 1 cm cuvette.

To make small volume measurements, the pathlength of the nanoCell accessory is decreased 

by a factor of 10 (1.0 mm pathlength) or 50 (0.2 mm pathlength) compared to a traditional 

10 mm pathlength cuvette.

The Beer Lambert law relates the measured absorbance of a solution to the concentration of 

that solution. The Beer Lambert equation is:
18 

nanoCell

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 283

The linear relationship between absorbance, pathlength, and concentration in the Beer 

Lambert law means that if we decrease the pathlength by a factor of 10, the observed 

absorption will also decrease by a factor of 10.

Related Topics

Using the nanoCell

Cleaning the nanoCell

Pathlength Correction Factors

Frequently Asked Questions

Using the nanoCell

The nanoCell accessory has two basic components: the nanoCell and the mirrored lid used for 

the measurement. The nanoCell contains the optics and sample loading window and fits in a 

standard 1 cm cell holder.

Any UV-Visible measurement can be made using the nanoCell over a wavelength range of 

190-1100 nm. This includes scanning, fixed wavelength, and kinetics measurements. The 

measurement range, reproducibility, and wavelength range of the nanoCell is determined by 

the spectrophotometer used to make the measurement.

Installing the nanoCell

The nanoCell ships configured for a z-height (distance from the bottom of the cell to the 

center of the light beam) of 8.5 mm. An adapter is included for 15 mm z-height instruments. 

The adapter simply screws on the base of the nanoCell accessory.

Note Reducing the pathlength from 1 cm to 1 mm is equivalent to a 10-fold dilution.

Note The factor(s) multiplied by absorbance measurements to give concentration values 

need to be adjusted for a change in the pathlength. For common DNA, RNA, and 

oligonucleotide concentration factors, see Pathlength Correction Factors.

Contents

• Installing the nanoCell

• Loading a sample

• Measurements
18

nanoCell

284 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

To install the nanoCell, insert the accessory into a single cell holder in the sample light path of 

the spectrophotometer. One of the quartz windows on the side of the nanoCell accessory (see 

Figure 2) should face the light beam. The nanoCell accessory can be installed with either side 

of the nanoCell facing the light source.

Figure 2. The quartz windows of the nanoCell allow light to enter and exit this accessory. Align 

these windows in the path of the beam.

Related Topics

Loading a sample

Measurements

Cleaning the nanoCell

Pathlength Correction Factors

Frequently Asked Questions

Loading a sample

To load a sample on the nanoCell, use a small volume pipette to place between 0.70 μl and 

3.0 μl of solution on the sample loading window.

Tip To ensure the highest precision data, do not remove the nanoCell from the cell holder 

until all measurements are complete

NOTICE Install the nanoCell only in accessories designed to hold a single cell. Using the 

nanoCell in a multi-cell holder could lead to inaccurate data.

Quartz window
18 

nanoCell

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 285

Figure 3. Use a small volume pipette to load samples on the nanoCell.

The sample loading window is slightly recessed (see Figure 4) to help the liquid form a drop 

that touches both the sample loading window and the mirror in the lid. Make sure the entire 

surface of the sample loading window is covered with liquid and all of the liquid is loaded into 

the recessed sample loading window. Do no leave excess liquid on the top of the nanoCell 

outside the sample loading window.

Figure 4. Recessed sample loading window at the top of the nanoCell.

Carefully place the appropriate lid on top of the sample loading area so that it sits in each of 

the two locator pins near the top of the nanoCell.

Figure 5. (A) Locator pins on the top of the nanoCell used to position the lid.

(B) Locator grooves in the lid.

Note Use a calibrated pipette to deliver liquid to the sample loading area of the nanoCell. 

Do not use a standard dropper, transfer pipette, Pasteur pipette, or other large volume 

device.
18

nanoCell

286 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Figure 6. The nanoCell accessory with the lid installed.

Related Topics

Installing the nanoCell

Measurements

Cleaning the nanoCell

Storing the nanoCell

Pathlength Correction Factors

Frequently Asked Questions

Measurements

Always collect the zero or baseline measurement with a blank solution in the nanoCell.

Related Topics

Installing the nanoCell

Loading a sample

Cleaning the nanoCell

Storing the nanoCell

Pathlength Correction Factors

Frequently Asked Questions

Note Install the lid immediately after loading the sample to prevent evaporation of the 

sample.

Note If a high background signal or inconsistent data is observed, remeasure the blank 

solution for the baseline or zero. Some measurement errors are due to a poor baseline or 

zero.
18 

nanoCell

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 287

Cleaning the nanoCell

Y To clean the nanoCell

1. Remove the cap from the nanoCell.

2. Use a pipette to remove the excess sample from the sample loading area on the top of the 

nanoCell.

3. Use a lint-free laboratory tissue, lint-free lens tissue, or microfiber cloth to wipe excess 

liquid from the sample loading area and the mirror in the lid.

Pressurized air can be used to remove lint or dust as necessary.

4. If desired, a suitable solvent such as methanol, ethanol, or isopropanol can be added to 

the cleaning process.

Apply the solvent to a laboratory tissue and wipe the sample loading surface. Never add 

the solvent directly to the sample loading surface.

Related Topics

Using the nanoCell

Storing the nanoCell

Pathlength Correction Factors

Frequently Asked Questions

Storing the nanoCell

Store the nanoCell and lids in the provided case.

Related Topics

Using the nanoCell

Cleaning the nanoCell

Pathlength Correction Factors

Frequently Asked Questions

NOTICE Never submerge any portion of the nanoCell in liquid.

NOTICE Do not use strong acids and bases or any of the following solvents with the 

nanoCell: ethylamine, diethylene triamine, methylene chloride, and phosphoric acid.
18

nanoCell

288 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Pathlength Correction Factors

Direct UV Assays for DNA, RNA, Oligonucleotides and Protein Concentration

Direct UV Assays for DNA, RNA, Oligonucleotides and Protein Concentration

Assay Unit Calculation Factor

1.0 cm Pathlength

Calculation Factor

1.0 mm Pathlength

nanoCell

Calculation Factor

0.2 mm Pathlength

nanoCell

Reference

dsDNA ng/μL 50 500 2500 Maniatis, T; Fritch, E. F.; Sambrook, J., 

Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Handbook, 

2nd Edition, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory 

Press, Plainview, NY 1989, Vol. 3.

ssDNA ng/μL 37 370 3650

RNA ng/μL 40 400 2000

Oligos ng/μL 33 330 1650

Protein 280 nm mg/mL 1 10 50 Fasman, D. G., Ed. Practical Handbook of 

Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, CRC 

Press, Boston 1992.

Stoscheck, C. M., Methods Enzymol, 1990, 

182, 50-69.

Protein 205 nm mg/mL 31 310 1550

Assay Unit Equation

Factors

1.0 mm 

Pathlength

Calculation 

Factor

1.0 mm 

Pathlength 

nanoCell

Calculation 

Factor

0.2 mm 

Pathlength 

nanoCell

References

260/280

DNA/

Protein

μg/mL DNA and Protein Concentrations determined using:

DNA conc = [(A260 - Aref)f1 - (A230 - Aref)f2]

Protein conc = [(A230 - Aref)f3 - (A260 - Aref)f4]

260:280 Ratio = 

Where:

A260 = absorption at 260 nm

A280 = absorption at 280 nm

Aref = background absorption at 320 nm

f1 = 62.9

f2 = 36.0

f3 = 1,552

f4 = 757.3

f1 = 629

f2 = 360

f3 = 15,520

f4 = 7,573

f1 = 3,145

f2 = 1,800

f3 = 77,600

f4 = 37,865

Warburg, O.; 

Christian, W.

Biochem Z. 1942, 

310, 384-421.

Groves, W. E.; 

Davis, F. C., Jr.; 

Sells, B. H., Anal. 

Biochem. 1968, 22, 

195-210.

260/230

DNA/

Protein

(Phenol)

μg/mL DNA and Protein Concentrations determined using:

DNA conc = [(A260 - Aref)f1 - (A230 - Aref)f2]

Protein conc = [(A230 - Aref)f3 - (A260 - Aref)f4]

260:230 Ratio = 

Where:

A260 = absorption at 260 nm

A230 = absorption at 230 nm

Aref = background absorption at 320 nm

f1 = 49.1

f2 = 3.48

f3 = 183

f4 = 75.8

f1 = 491

f2 = 34.8

f3 = 1,830

f4 = 758

f1 = 12,300

f2 = 870

f3 = 45,750

f4 = 18,950

Kalb, V. F., Jr.; 

Bernlohr, R.W., 

Anal. Biochem. 

1977, 82, 362-371.

WarburgChristianmg/mL Protein concentration is determined using:

Protein conc = [(A280 x f1) - (A260 x f2)]

Where:

A280 = absorption at 280 nm

A260 = absorption at 260 nm

1.55

0.76

15.5

7.6

3,875

1,900 Warburg, O.; 

Christian, W., 

Biochem Z. 1942, 

310, 384-421.

A260 Aref –

A280 Aref – ---------------------------

A260 Aref –

A230 Aref – ---------------------------
18 

nanoCell

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 289

Related Topics

Using the nanoCell

Cleaning the nanoCell

Storing the nanoCell

Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions

Q1 My nanoCell has two numbers on the lid (Factor 50 and LP 0.2 mm). What do these 

numbers mean?

A1 Factor 50

This is the correction factor for this lid. If a 1 cm cuvette is used and equations are set 

up for a 1 cm pathlength, multiply the 1.0 mm pathlength result by this factor (1 cm 

result x 50, in this case) to get the correct concentration result. This is a factor of 50 

reduction, or 50-fold dilution. See Pathlength Correction Factors.

LP 0.2 mm (Light Path 0.2 mm)

This is the pathlength of the nanoCell or the total distance the light travels through 

the accessory. This distance is necessary for concentration calculations using the 

Beer-Lambert law, which relates the absorbance of the solution to its concentration. 

See Introduction to Small Volume Measurements and Pathlength Correction Factors.

Q2 When using the nanoCell, is the correction for the pathlength (0.2 mm or 1.0 mm) 

made automatically by the spectrophotometer, or does the end-user have to make this 

correction?

A2 No. There is no mechanism for the instrument to know what pathlength nanoCell is 

installed. The user will need to correct for the pathlength using the factor.

Q3 If the end-user has to make the correction, what is the correction for each nanoCell 

pathlength?

A3 See Pathlength Correction Factors for a comprehensive list of correction factors for 

most life science assays.

Q4 Does the quartz surface at the top of the nanoCell accessory and in the lid have to be 

cleaned of all chemicals and fingerprint residue?

A4 Yes. The quartz sample loading area of the nanoCell accessory and the mirror in the 

lid are the same as a traditional quartz cuvette. See Cleaning the nanoCell.
18

nanoCell

290 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Using the nanoCell

Cleaning the nanoCell

Storing the nanoCell

Pathlength Correction Factors

Q5 What needs to be cleaned after each use? The top of the nanoCell only, or the inner 

part of the lid as well?

A5 To eliminate sample carry-over or mixing two liquids together and improve accuracy, 

clean the inner part of the lid between measurements. See Cleaning the nanoCell.

Q6 Can I use solvents to clean the surface of the nanoCell? If so, which solvents?

A6 The most suitable solvents for cleaning are methanol, ethanol, and isopropanol. Do 

not use strong acids and bases or any of the following solvents with the nanoCell: 

ethylamine, diethylene triamine, methylene chloride, and phosphoric acid. See 

Cleaning the nanoCell.
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 291

19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

The Peltier Recirculator is a sealed unit that can be used to pump temperature-controlled 

liquid through any thermostatted accessory. The recirculator provides constant temperatures 

in the range between 20 °C and 60 °C (68 °F and 140 °F). The unit comes with fuses, 

insulated tubing, tubing size adapters, a refill bottle and a USB cable.

Related Topics

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Contents

• General Safety Information

• Product Description

• Preinstallation

• Installation

• Operation

• Maintenance

• Troubleshooting

Peltier recirculator
19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

292 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Accessories

General Safety Information

This equipment has been designed with an emphasis on quality, reliability and safety. We 

accept warranty responsibility for this accessory under the following conditions:

• Electrical installation in the room or building complies with regulations specified in the 

country where the equipment is to be used.

• The equipment is used in accordance with the provided instructions for use.

• All modifications and repairs are carried out by an authorized agent.

• Only modifications suggested and documented by us are to be made to any part of the 

accessory.

• The equipment installation is carried out in accordance with local requirements for 

responsibility and warranty.

Related Topics

Product Description

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

CAUTION Always disconnect the power supply before starting any work inside the instrument.

CAUTION Take the necessary precautions when using flammable or explosive substances 

in this accessory.
19 

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 293

Product Description

The recirculator is a Peltier-effect thermostatting system. It uses an internal sealed liquid 

circuit that is compatible with all of our thermostattable accessories.

The accessory features:

• Internal flow pump to circulate the liquid.

• Manual or remote control through an RS-232 or USB port.

• Thermally isolated tubing to connect with any thermostattable accessory.

• Water level sensor to prevent operation when the fluid level is below normal.

• High temperature sensor to prevent overheating.

Front and Back Panel

The accessory has two internal fans and front and back vents to dissipate heat.

The front panel features an LCD display with a three-button keypad.

The back panel houses the main power connector with voltage selector, RS-232 and USB 

connectors for remote control, main power switch and connectors for transporting liquid into 

and out of the unit.

Contents

• Front and Back Panel

• Specifications

NOTICE Blocked vents may affect performance or cause the accessory to fail.
19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

294 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Specifications

General Safety Information

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Specifications

Contents
19 

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 295

Display/Keypad

The accessory has an LCD screen and 3-button keypad to access the functions and set 

temperature.

Programmable Parameters

• Temperature

Displayed Values

• Actual thermostat temperature

• Set temperature

• Heating/cooling power

Operating Specifications

• Temperature range: 20 °C to 60 °C (68 °F to 140 °F)

• Temperature accuracy: ±0.15 °C (±0.27 °F) from 20 °C to 60 °C (68 °F to 140 °F)

• Temperature repeatability: typically ±1 °C (1.8 °F)

• Temperature stability: typically ±0.1 °C (±0.18 °F)

• Specifications valid for ambient temperatures from 15 °C to 35 °C (59 °F to 95 °F)

External Control

• RS-232

• USB

• Display/Keypad

• Programmable Parameters

• Displayed Values

• Operating Specifications

• External Control

• Dimensions

• Electrical Data

• Description of Symbols

• Environmental Conditions
19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

296 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Dimensions

• Width: 235 mm (9.25 in)

• Height: 254 mm (10 in)

• Depth: 473 mm (18.63 in)

• Weight: 11.6 kg (25.6 lbs)

Electrical Data

• Voltage: 115/120 V or 220/240 V ±10% (factory setting 220/240 V)

• Frequency: 50/60 Hz

• Power: 120 VA

• CE marked

Description of Symbols

Environmental Conditions

Performance and safety of the accessory are guaranteed if operated under the following 

conditions:

• Pollution degree 2 (standard CEI EN 61010-1).

• Installation category II with smaller transient over voltages (standard IEC 664).

• Mains voltage fluctuations must not exceed 10% of the nominal voltage.

• Location of use is indoors at an altitude <2000 m (6562 ft).

• Location of use exhibits a relative humidity <80% noncondensing.

• Location of use exhibits an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 35 °C (50 °F and 

95 °F).

• Location of use is free from dust and vapors of solvents and acids.

Related Topics

Front and Back Panel

General Safety Information

CAUTION Symbol identifying the use of substances dangerous for health and the 

environment. For these substances, refer to the laws and terms in force for the laboratory 

using the instrument. Take the necessary precautions when using flammable or explosive 

substances.
19 

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 297

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Preinstallation

Review this section before installing the accessory.

Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse

For operation at 120 V, configure the voltage selector on the Peltier back panel and insert the 

correct fuse as described in the following table.

Adjustment for frequency change between 50 and 60 Hz is not necessary.

Contents

• Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse

• Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse

NOTICE The unit is factory set to operate at 220 V.

Power Supply Type of fuse - 250 V

240 V T 1A, Slo Blo

120 V T 2A, Slo Blo

Voltage display window

Fuse drawer tab
19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

298 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse

General Safety Information

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse

The current voltage setting is shown in the voltage display window above the power switch.

Y To change the voltage setting or fuse

5. Turn off the Peltier unit and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.

6. Use a small screwdriver to pry the fuse drawer out of the fuse compartment by pulling the 

tab up and away from the drawer.

7. To change the voltage setting, remove the voltage selector cube from the drawer and 

carefully remove the fuse from the cube.

8. Rotate the cube 180 degrees and then replace the cube in the drawer. The correct voltage 

setting should display in the window on the bottom of the fuse drawer.

Fuse drawer

Voltage selector cube
19 

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 299

9. Replace the fuse with a new one that is appropriate for the selected voltage. See Verifying 

the Power Supply and Fuse.

10. Slide the fuse drawer back into the fuse compartment until it locks in place.

11. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.

12. Turn on the main power switch on the Peltier unit back panel.

If the unit does not perform normally or if the replacement fuse blows, contact technical 

support.

Related Topics

Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse

General Safety Information

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Installation

Before powering on the Peltier recirculator:

• Check the power supply voltage setting and fuse. See Verifying the Power Supply and 

Fuse. 

• Connect the recirculator to a thermostatted accessory and fill the reservoir.

Before starting the recirculator, familiarize yourself with the software features described in 

Operation.

Y To install the recirculator

1. Position the recirculator in a suitable location.

NOTICE The recirculator is filled with distilled water before shipment. During 

installation, when connecting the tubing, the water level in the reservoir will drop and 

must be refilled before use. Use only distilled water to refill the reservoir. A refill bottle is 

provided for this purpose. See Filling the Reservoir. 

NOTICE Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) in front and back of the unit for air circulation.
19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

300 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

2. Remove the screw from the vent on the recirculator back panel. Store the screw in a safe 

place and use it to plug the vent before shipment.

3. Screw in the vent connector supplied with the instrument.

4. Close the vent by turning the control ring clockwise until it is tight.

5. Connect the supplied tubes to the Inlet and Outlet ports on the recirculator back panel.

The ports and tubes are equipped with quick connect fittings.

6. Connect the other ends of the tubes to the fluid in and out ports on any thermostatted 

accessory or to the fluid in and out ports on the spectrophotometer. See Installing a 

Liquid Thermostatted Accessory. Use the provided adapters if necessary.

7. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the recirculator back panel and turn 

on the power switch.

Remove and save this screw 

(replace for shipment)

Vent connector

Vent control ring
19 

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 301

Wait one minute for the recirculator to warm up. A water level alarm typically occurs 

because the tubing and reservoir in the thermostatted accessory have increased the 

capacity.

8. If a water level alarm occurs, turn off the recirculator, disconnect the inlet (or outlet) tube 

and fill the reservoir. See Filling the Reservoir.

9. Reconnect the tube and turn on the recirculator.

10. If a water level alarm occurs again, repeat steps 8 and 9.

The recirculator may be operated manually (see Operation) or remotely through an RS-232 

or USB connection.

Related Topics

General Safety Information

Product Description

Preinstallation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Operation

To start the recirculator, turn on the power switch on the back panel. The display appears in 

one of three modes:

• Stand-By mode

• Normal mode

Power switch
19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

302 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

• Alarm mode

The image below indicates Normal mode.

Standby Mode

• Press and hold the Center button for one to two seconds to proceed to Normal Mode.

Related Topics

Normal Mode

Set temperature

Actual thermostat 

temperature

Heating/cooling 

power scale

Table 1. Startup modes and overview of button functions

Page Mode Display Left button Center button Right button

Startup Standby Standby On (go to 

Normal Mode)

Normal Actual temperature

Set temperature

Heating/cooling power (right)

Menu (go to 

Main Menu 

page)

Off (go to 

Standby Mode)

Change (go to 

Change Set Point 

page)

Alarm Alarm description Menu (go to 

Main Menu 

page)

Beep (turn off 

audible alarm)

Reset* (reset audible alarm)

*Only if the Manual reset prealarm is set to Yes. See Parameters Menu.

Contents

• Standby Mode

• Normal Mode

• Alarm Mode
19 

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 303

Alarm Mode

Preinstallation

Installation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Normal Mode

Button Functions

• Press the left (Menu) button to go to the Main Menu page.

• Press and hold the center (Off) button for one to two seconds to return to Stand-By 

Mode.

• Press the right (Change) button to go to the Change Set Point page.

Y Changing the set temperature

1. From the main Normal Mode page, press the Change button to highlight Set 

Temperature.

The Change Set Point page appears with down and up arrows above the Left and Center 

buttons.

2. Use the down and up arrow buttons to change the set temperature.

Contents

• Button Functions

• Parameters Menu

• Configure Menu

• Diagnostic Menu

Table 2. Normal Mode functions

Page Display Description Left button Center button Right button

Main Menu Parameter User Parameters Scroll Select Exit

Configure Configuration Parameters Scroll Up Exit

Diagnostic Diagnostic Values Down Up Exit

Change Set 

Point

Flashes selected 

parameter

Change Temperature Set Point Down Up Change
19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

304 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

3. When the desired set temperature is displayed, press Change to return to the main 

Normal Mode page.

Parameters Menu

• From the main Normal Mode page, press the Menu button to display the Main Menu 

page.

• Use the left (Scroll) button to highlight Parameters and press the center (Select) button 

to select it. A list of available parameters appears.

• Use the left (Scroll) button to highlight a parameter.

• Use the center (Select) button to select the highlighted parameter.

• Use the right (Exit) button to return to the Parameters Menu.

Configure Menu

• From the main Normal Mode page, press the Menu button to display the Main Menu 

page.

• Use the left (Scroll) button to highlight Configure and press the center (Select) button to 

select it. A password entry page appears.

• Use the right (Exit) button to return to the main Normal Mode page.

Diagnostic Menu

• From the main Normal Mode page, press the Menu button to display the Main Menu 

page.

• Use the left (Scroll) button to highlight Diagnostics and press the center (Select) button 

to select it. A list of diagnostic readouts appears.

• Use the left and center buttons to scroll the screen up and down.

• Use the right (Exit) button to return to the main Normal Mode page.

Table 3. User parameters and button functions

Number Description Default value

P-01 Temperature units °C

P-02 Auto start NO

P-03 Display contrast 5

P-04 Beeper YES

P-05 Manual reset pre-alarm NO

NOTICE A password is required to display the Configure menu. These parameters are set 

at the factory and cannot be changed by the user.
19 

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 305

Related Topics

Standby Mode

Alarm Mode

Preinstallation

Installation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Alarm Mode

System alarms indicate failure of the accessory due to malfunction or incorrect use. See 

Troubleshooting for more information. Here is an alarm mode due to water failure.

• Use the left (Menu) button to display the Main Menu page.

• Use the center (Beep) button to turn off the audible alarm.

• Use the right (Reset) button, if available, to reset the audible alarm. See Manual reset 

prealarm in the Parameters Menu to configure the Reset option to display in Alarm 

Mode.

Description Unit

Cell temperature °C

Radiator temperature °C

Water resistance Kohm

Power %

Cell voltage Volt
19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

306 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Standby Mode

Normal Mode

Preinstallation

Installation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Maintenance

Routine Maintenance

The accessory requires little routine maintenance.

Related Topics

Cleaning the Accessory

Filling the Reservoir

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Troubleshooting

Cleaning the Accessory

To clean the accessory, use a cloth dampened with water or neutral detergent only. Do not use 

organic or abrasive solvents.

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Cleaning the Accessory

• Filling the Reservoir

CAUTION Do not open the unit while the power cord is connected. Any action that 

makes it necessary to open the unit must be executed by authorized service personnel.
19 

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 307

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Filling the Reservoir

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Troubleshooting

Filling the Reservoir

Fill the reservoir after connecting an accessory to the recirculator and after a water level alarm. 

Use distilled water only.

Y To fill the reservoir

1. Open the vent by turning the control ring counterclockwise. Place a container under the 

vent opening to catch drips.

2. Fill the supplied bottle with distilled water.

The bottle lid has a tube with a quick connect fitting.

Vent control ring
19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

308 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

3. Turn off the power switch on the recirculator back panel.

4. Unplug any tubing from the inlet connector on the recirculator back panel and connect 

the tube from the fill bottle.

5. Turn the fill bottle upside down and squeeze it until liquid escapes through the vent.

The reservoir holds approximately 150 mls.

6. Disconnect the fill bottle and reconnect the tubing.

7. Turn on the recirculator power switch.

8. If a water level alarm occurs, turn off the recirculator and repeat steps 3 through 7.

9. If the water level is okay, open the vent to evacuate any air bubbles in the lines.

10. Close the vent.

Leave the vent closed while the recirculator is in use.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Cleaning the Accessory

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

System alarms indicate failure of the accessory due to malfunction or incorrect use. Alarms 

may be visible on the display, indicated acoustically or communicated via RS-232 or USB 

connections.

Acoustic Alarm

The accessory sends an acoustic alarm when it detects a leak or if another failure occurs.

Contents

• Acoustic Alarm

• Water Level Failure

• Other System Failures
19 

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 309

Y If an alarm occurs

1. Determine the cause of the alarm by consulting the recirculator front panel display.

2. Press the right (Reset) button, if available, on the recirculator front panel.

See Manual reset prealarm in the Parameters Menu to configure the Reset option to 

display in Alarm Mode.

3. Turn off the power switch on the recirculator back panel.

4. Fix the problem. See Water Level Failure and Other System Failures.

5. Turn on the recirculator power switch.

6. If the alarm occurs again, turn off the power switch and contact technical support. See 

Contacting Us.

Related Topics

Water Level Failure

Other System Failures

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Water Level Failure

The accessory is equipped with a water level sensor that detects small leaks.

Y If a water level failure occurs

1. Press the Reset button, if available, on the recirculator front panel.

See Manual reset prealarm in the Parameters Menu to configure the Reset option to 

display in Alarm Mode.

2. Turn off the power switch on the recirculator back panel.

3. Open the sample compartment and clean up any liquids that may have leaked from the 

accessory. 

4. Tighten all connectors to and from the recirculator.

5. Fill the reservoir. See Filling the Reservoir.

6. Turn on the recirculator power switch.
19

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

310 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

7. If the water level alarm occurs again, turn off the power switch, fill the reservoir again and 

turn on the power switch.

Related Topics

Acoustic Alarm

Other System Failures

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Other System Failures

Related Topics

Acoustic Alarm

Water Level Failure

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Note You may need to fill the reservoir several times before the water level alarm resets.

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Temperature or 

memory failure

Recirculator 

malfunction or 

incorrect use

Immediately turn off the main power switch 

and then turn it on again. If the failure 

reoccurs, turn off the power and contact 

technical support. See Contacting Us.
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 311

20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

This accessory includes a thermostatted single cell holder for standard 10 mm pathlength 

cuvettes and a Peltier temperature controller that connects to a USB port on the 

spectrophotometer or computer. The accessory requires a water pump or recirculator which 

must be purchased separately. Cell temperature can be controlled two ways: from the Peltier 

controller front panel or from the spectrophotometer using INSIGHT software. The Peltier 

controller may also be used to agitate the sample by placing a magnetic stirrer in the cuvette 

and selecting the stir speed.

Related Topics

TPS-1500W Sealed Peltier Recirculator

Contents

• General Safety Information

• Product Description

• Preinstallation

• Installation

• Operation

• Maintenance

• Troubleshooting

Cell holder

Controller
20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

312 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Accessories

General Safety Information

This equipment has been designed with an emphasis on quality, reliability and safety. We 

accept warranty responsibility for this accessory under the following conditions:

• Electrical installation in the room or building complies with regulations specified in the 

country where the equipment is to be used.

• The equipment is used in accordance with the provided instructions for use.

• All modifications and repairs are carried out by an authorized agent.

• Only modifications suggested and documented by us are to be made to any part of the 

accessory.

• The equipment installation is carried out in accordance with local requirements for 

responsibility and warranty.

Related Topics

Product Description

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

CAUTION Always disconnect the power supply before starting any work inside the instrument.

CAUTION Take the necessary precautions when using flammable or explosive substances 

in this accessory.
20 

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 313

Product Description

The Peltier Single Cell Holder delivers precise temperature control in a compact design. The 

accessory permits spectrophotometric measurements at controlled temperatures between 0 °C 

and 100 °C (32 °F and 212 °F). Measurements can be made at constant temperatures.

Related Topics

General Safety Information

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Temperature Controller Front and Rear Panels

The controller front panel features an LCD display with a three-button keypad.

The rear panel houses the main power connection with voltage selector, RS-232 and USB 

connectors for remote control, main power switch and cell holder connector.

Contents

• Temperature Controller Front and Rear Panels

• Specifications
20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

314 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Specifications

Specifications

This section describes the specifications for the Peltier temperature controller.

Display/Keypad

The controller has an LCD screen and 3-button keypad to access the functions and set sample 

temperature and stirring rate. See Operation for details.

Programmable Parameters

• Temperature

Contents

• Display/Keypad

• Programmable Parameters

• Displayed Values

• Operating Specifications

• External Control

• Dimensions

• Electrical Data

• Description of Symbols

• Environmental Conditions
20 

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 315

• Stirring speed

Displayed Values

• Peltier block temperature

• Set temperature

• Stirring speed

• Heating/cooling power

Operating Specifications

• Stirring speed 0 to 1800 rpm

• Temperature range: 0 °C to 100 °C (32 °F to 212 °F)

• Temperature accuracy: ±0.15 °C (±0.27 °F) from 0 °C to 100 °C (32 °F to 212 °F)

• Temperature repeatability: typically ±0.1 °C (±0.18 °F)

• Temperature stability: typically ±0.1 °C (±0.18 °F)

• Specifications valid for ambient temperatures of 15 °C to 35 °C (59 °F to 95 °F)

External Control

• RS-232

• USB

Dimensions

• Width: 213 mm (8.3 in)

• Height: 178 mm (7 in)

• Depth: 269 mm (10.6 in)

• Weight: 3 kg (8 lbs)

Electrical Data

• Voltage: 115/120 V or 220/240 V ±10%

• Frequency: 50/60 Hz

• Power: 80 VA

• CE marked
20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

316 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Description of Symbols

Environmental Conditions

Performance and safety of the accessory are guaranteed if operated under the following 

conditions:

• Pollution degree 2 (standard CEI EN 61010-1).

• Installation category II with smaller transient over voltages (standard IEC 664).

• Mains voltage fluctuations must not exceed 10% of the nominal voltage.

• Location of use is indoors at an altitude <2000 m (6562 ft).

• Location of use exhibits a relative humidity <80% noncondensing.

• Location of use exhibits an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 35 °C (50 °F and 

95 °F).

• Location of use is free from dust and vapors of solvents and acids.

Related Topics

Temperature Controller Front and Rear Panels

General Safety Information

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Preinstallation

Review this section before installing the accessory.

CAUTION Symbol identifies the use of substances dangerous for health and the 

environment. For these substances, refer to the laws and terms in force for the laboratory 

using the instrument. Take the necessary precautions when using flammable or explosive 

substances.

Contents
20 

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 317

Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse

For operation at 120 V, configure the voltage selector on the Peltier back panel and insert the 

correct fuse as described in the following table.

Adjustment for frequency change between 50 and 60 Hz is not necessary.

Related Topics

Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse

General Safety Information

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

• Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse

• Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse

NOTICE The unit is factory set to operate at 220 V.

Power Supply Type of fuse - 250 V

240 V T 1A, Slo Blo

120 V T 2A, Slo Blo

Voltage display window

Fuse drawer tab
20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

318 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse

The current voltage setting is shown in the voltage display window above the power switch.

Y To change the voltage setting or fuse

8. Turn off the Peltier unit and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.

9. Use a small screwdriver to pry the fuse drawer out of the fuse compartment by pulling the 

tab up and away from the drawer.

10. To change the voltage setting, remove the voltage selector cube from the drawer and 

carefully remove the fuse from the cube.

11. Rotate the cube 180 degrees and then replace the cube in the drawer. The correct voltage 

setting should display in the window on the bottom of the fuse drawer.

12. Replace the fuse with a new one that is appropriate for the selected voltage. See Verifying 

the Power Supply and Fuse.

13. Slide the fuse drawer back into the fuse compartment until it locks in place.

14. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.

15. Turn on the main power switch on the Peltier unit back panel.

If the unit does not perform normally or if the replacement fuse blows, contact technical 

support.

Related Topics

Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse

General Safety Information

Fuse drawer

Voltage selector cube
20 

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 319

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Installation

It is necessary to connect the cell holder to a water pump or fluid recirculator and to the 

temperature controller.

.

Use only 12.5 mm (10 mm pathlength) square cuvettes with this accessory. Use at least 3 ml 

of solution for the analysis.

Before starting the Peltier accessory, familiarize yourself with the software features described in 

Operation. To agitate the sample during the measurement, place a magnetic stirrer in the 

cuvette and use the software to set the stirring speed.

Y To install the cell holder

1. Open the sample compartment cover.

2. Remove the sample compartment front panel. See Sample Compartment Front Panel.

3. Remove the tubing access panel. See Tubing Access Panel.

4. Remove any existing cell holder or accessory.

5. Connect one end of the provided flat cable to the cell holder.

NOTICE Avoid damage to the cell block. Do not operate the accessory without a water 

pump or fluid recirculator.

NOTICE Avoid damage to the electronics. Do not connect or disconnect cables while the 

accessory is powered on.
20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

320 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

6. Install the cell holder in the spectrophotometer sample compartment. See Installing a 

Manual Accessory.

7. Feed the other end of the cable through the opening behind the tubing access panel. See 

Tubing Access Panel.

8. Connect the free end of the cable to the Cell Holder socket on the back of the 

temperature controller.

9. Use appropriate tubing and the provided adapters to connect the two fluid ports on the 

cell holder to a water pump or fluid recirculator. See Installing a Liquid Thermostatted 

Accessory.

Ensure the tubing does not obstruct the light beam.

Cell Holder

Cable
20 

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 321

10. Replace the sample compartment front panel. See Sample Compartment Front Panel.

11. Close the sample compartment cover.

12. Turn on the power switch on the controller back panel.

13. Press and hold the On (center) button on the temperature controller for 2 seconds.

The Normal Mode display shows the current temperature settings.

14. Set the software parameters to configure the temperature controller for operation. See 

Operation.

Related Topics

General Safety Information

Product Description

Preinstallation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Operation

Water

ports

Contents

• Setting the Target Temperature and Stir Speed

• Measuring Samples
20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

322 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Setting the Target Temperature and Stir Speed

INSIGHT software can be used to define a target temperature and display a temperature 

status monitor. A target temperature can also be set from the temperature controller front 

panel.

Related Topics

Using the Peltier Controller to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Measuring Samples

Using INSIGHT Software to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Temperature and Stir Speed Settings

In the selected application, use Settings > Accessories > Temperature to display the available 

settings for a temperature probe or controller. The Temperature features appear only when the 

driver for a temperature probe or controller is installed.

Contents

• Using INSIGHT Software to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

• Using the Peltier Controller to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Contents

• Temperature and Stir Speed Settings

• Configuring a Target Temperature

• Displaying the Temperature Status Monitor

Feature Description

Record temperature with measurementIf a temperature probe is used, records the temperature of 

the sample after each measurement. Temperature readings 

are stored in the sample properties.

Use temperature controller If a Peltier cell holder or changer is used, defines a setpoint 

temperature for the cell block and a stir speed if desired. 

The available settings depend on the specifications for the 

temperature-controlled accessory.
20 

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 323

Related Topics

Configuring a Target Temperature

Displaying the Temperature Status Monitor

Configuring a Target Temperature

Y To configure a target temperature

1. Select Start measurement at target temperature.

2. Enter the Target temperature and Tolerance in °C.

• For a temperature probe. 

To start the measurement when the probe reaches the target temperature, set Start on

to Probe temperature and then select the Probe channel. The number of channels 

in the list box will match the available ports on the temperature probe interface box.

The probe channel, current temperature and target range appear during the 

measurement.

• For a temperature-controlled accessory. 

To start the measurement when the cell block reaches the target temperature, set 

Start on to Block temperature.

Start measurements at target 

temperature

Starts the measurement when the sample (requires a temperature probe) or cell block (requires a Peltier cell holder 

or changer) reaches a specified temperature.

Match probes to cell changer 

positions

If a temperature probe is used, maps probe channels 1 

through 8 with up to eight cell changer positions. Useful 

only when using an automatic cell changer with multiple 

temperature probes.

Deselect this to always record the temperature of probe 1.

Feature Description
20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

324 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Only the current temperature and target range appear during the measurement.

The Start button is disabled since the measurement is configured to start automatically at 

the target temperature.

3. To allow time for equilibration, select Wait for equilibration and enter the duration.

The remaining equilibration time is displayed during the measurement.

If the temperature moves outside the target range, the countdown resets when the 

temperature is again within range.

The Start button becomes active when the temperature remains in the target range for the 

entire equilibration period.

4. To start the measurement automatically after equilibration, select Start measurement 

after equilibration. This disables the Start button in the status dialog box. The 

measurement starts automatically when the temperature remains in the target range 

during the entire equilibration period.

Related Topics

Temperature and Stir Speed Settings

Displaying the Temperature Status Monitor

Displaying the Temperature Status Monitor

When a Peltier temperature-controlled accessory is installed, the INSIGHT software can be 

configured to display a temperature status monitor above the data display.

Y To display the temperature status monitor

1. Click the Configure button above the data display for the selected application. See 

Instrument Status Monitors for more information.

A dialog box lists the available status monitors.
20 

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 325

2. Select Temperature controller status and click OK.

The status monitor appears above the data display.

Related Topics

Temperature and Stir Speed Settings

Configuring a Target Temperature

Using the Peltier Controller to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

To start the controller, turn on the power switch on the controller back panel.

Startup Mode

After the controller power is turned on, the display appears in one of three modes: Stand-By, 

Normal, or Alarm. The image below indicates Normal mode.

Note The temperature controller option appears only when a temperature controller 

software driver is installed.

Contents

• Startup Mode

• Standby Mode

• Normal Mode

Actual block 

temperature

Stirring 

speed

Heating/cooling 

power scale

Block set temperature
20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

326 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Standby Mode

• Press and hold the Center button for one to two seconds to proceed to Normal Mode.

Normal Mode

Button Functions

• Press the Left button to go to the Main Menu page.

• Press the Right button to go to the Change Set Point page.

• Press and hold the Center button for one to two seconds to return to Stand-By Mode.

• From the Startup page in Normal Mode, use the Change button to move about the 

screen.

Y Changing the set temperature

1. Highlight Set Temperature.

The Change Set Point page is displayed with down and up arrows above the Left and 

Center buttons.

Table 4. Startup modes and button functions

Page Mode Display Left button Center button Right button

Startup Standby Standby On

Normal Actual block temperature

Block Set temperature

Stirring speed (left)

Heating/cooling power (right)

Menu 

(Go to Main 

Menu)

Off Change (Go to 

Change Set Point 

Page)

Alarm Alarm description Menu Beep on/off Reset alarm/change*

*Only if the manual alarm reset option has been configured

Table 5. Normal Mode functions

Page Display Description Left button Center button Right button

Change Set 

Point

Flashing selected 

parameter

Change Temperature or 

Stirring Speed Set Point

Down Up Change

Main Menu Parameter User Parameters Scroll Select Exit

Configure Configuration Parameters Scroll Up Exit

Diagnostic Diagnostic Values Down Up Exit
20 

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 327

2. Use the down and up arrow buttons to change the set temperature.

3. When the desired set temperature is displayed, press Change to return to the Startup 

page.

Y Setting the stirring speed

1. Highlight Stirring Speed.

2. The Change Set Point page is displayed with down and up arrows above the Left and 

Center buttons. 

3. Use the down and up arrow buttons to change the stirring speed.

4. When the desired stirring speed is reached, press Change to return to the Startup page.

Parameters Menu

• Use the Left and Center buttons to scroll the screen up and down.

• Use the Right button to exit the screen and return to the Main Menu.

Configure Menu

Diagnostic Menu

• Use the Left and Center buttons to scroll the screen up and down.

• Use the Right button to exit the screen and return to the Main Menu.

Table 6. User parameters and button functions

Number Description Default value

P-01 Temperature units °C

P-02 Auto start NO

P-03 Display contrast 5

P-04 Beeper YES

P-05 Manual reset pre-alarm NO

Note A password is required to enter this menu.

NOTICE The Configure menu parameters are set at the factory and cannot be changed 

by the user.

Description Measure unit

Cell temperature °C

Radiator temperature °C
20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

328 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Measuring Samples

Use INSIGHT software to measure samples with this accessory. See INSIGHT Software.

Related Topics

Using INSIGHT Software to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Using the Peltier Controller to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Maintenance

Routine Maintenance

The accessory requires little routine maintenance.

Related Topics

Cleaning the Accessory

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Troubleshooting

Cleaning the Accessory

To clean the accessory, use a cloth dampened with water or neutral detergent only. Do not use 

organic or abrasive solvents.

Water resistance Kohm

Power %

Cell voltage Volt

Description Measure unit

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Cleaning the Accessory

CAUTION Do not open the unit while the power cord is connected. Any action that 

makes it necessary to open the unit must be executed by authorized service personnel.
20 

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 329

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Related Topics

General Safety Information

Product Description

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Temperature or 

memory failure

• Temperature 

controller 

malfunction or 

incorrect use

NOTICE Immediately turn off the main 

power switch and then turn it on again. If 

the failure reoccurs, turn off the power and 

contact technical support. See Contacting 

Us.
20

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

330 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 331

21

Probe Handling and Maintenance

This section provides general information for fiber optic probes including:

Safety Considerations

To avoid injury while using cables and probes, do not stare at the UV beam or UV light 

leaving a coupled fiber optic cable.

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Operating Precautions

Handle probes carefully:

• Do not allow hard materials (glass, metal, ceramic, etc.) to contact the probe’s optical 

surfaces.

• Do not drop the probe or knock it against a hard surface.

• Do not subject the probe to rapid or excessive changes in temperature.

• Wipe off spilled chemicals immediately.

Contents

• Safety Considerations

• Operating Precautions

• Installation

• Operation

• Maintenance
21

Probe Handling and Maintenance

332 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Handle fiber optic cables gently and follow these precautions:

• Do not drop the cables or knock them against a hard surface.

• Do not bend the cables or tightly coil them.

• Do not touch the end of a fiber optic cable connector.

• Do not overtighten or use tools to tighten the connectors when attaching the cables to the 

ports.

• Avoid twisting the cables when attaching them to the connectors.

• Keep a protective cap on each end of the cable when not in use.

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Installation

Install the Integrated Fiber Optic Module before installing a probe.

Languages

WARNING Avoid UV radiation hazard. Do not stare at the beam or light leaving a 

coupled fiber optic cable.

AVERTISSEMENT Évitez l'exposition au rayonnements UV. Ne regardez jamais le 

faisceau de lumière qui sort d’une fibre optique couplé.

WARNUNG Gefahren durch UV-Strahlung sind zu vermeiden. Nicht in den Strahl eines 

gekoppelten Glasfaserkabels blicken.
21 

Probe Handling and Maintenance

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 333

To install a probe, follow instructions for your instrument. See Attaching Cables and Probes.

If the probe has a remote start cable, plug the connector into the Trigger port on the 

spectrophotometer. See Connectors.

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Operation

Maintenance

Operation

Follow the probe manufacturer’s recommendations for compatible samples and operating 

procedures.

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

AVVERTENZA Evitare il rischio di radiazioni UV.Non fissare il raggio di luce che esce dal 

cavo a fibre ottiche accoppiato.

ADVERTENCIA Evite el riesgo de radiación ultravioleta.No mire al rayo luminoso que sale 

de un cable de fibra óptica acoplado.

WARNING 

NOTICE When attaching fiber optic cables to the accessory ports, avoid:

• Twisting or bending the cable.

• Touching the tips with your fingers.

• Overtightening or using tools to tighten the connectors.
21

Probe Handling and Maintenance

334 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Installation

Maintenance

Maintenance

Routine Maintenance

Follow these guidelines:

• Clean probes immediately after each measurement and before storing them. Refer to the 

cleaning instructions that came with the probe or, if you purchased the probe from us, 

follow these steps.

• Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for probe maintenance. (Check seals and 

O-rings regularly for excessive wear, especially from corrosive samples or extreme 

temperatures).

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Cleaning Probes

Troubleshooting

Cleaning Probes

Clean probes immediately after each measurement and before storing them.

Follow these instructions to clean a probe purchased from us. For recommended agents and 

procedures to clean other probes, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Cleaning Probes

NOTICE 

• Do not use an ultrasonic bath to clean fiber optic probes.

• Use only recommended cleaning agents.
21 

Probe Handling and Maintenance

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 335

Y To clean a probe purchased from us

1. Dampen lens paper or a soft cotton swab with one of the following agents:

• Methanol

• Isopropyl alcohol

• Deionized water (can leave spots that affect performance).

2. Using minimal pressure, wipe the probe optics and shaft with the dampened lens paper or 

swab.

To remove stubborn materials, use a small amount of acetone.

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Routine Maintenance

Troubleshooting

NOTICE Do not soak the lens paper or swab with the cleaning agent. This may leave 

pools of liquid that do not dry properly.
21

Probe Handling and Maintenance

336 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 337

22

Rapid Mix Accessory

For Local Control instruments:

D://2606_APPL PHOTOPHYSICS_Stop Flow Accy_UG.pdfFor Computer Control 

instruments:

C://2606_APPL PHOTOPHYSICS_Stop Flow Accy_UG.pdfIf these links do not work, see 

your documentation CD.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
22

338 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 339

23

Reference Cell Holders

This section describes the reference cell holders available for your spectrophotometer. See 

Installing a Reference Cell Holder.

Rectangular Reference Cell Holder

This holder accommodates rectangular reference cells with the following pathlengths: 10 mm, 

20 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 100 mm. This is the standard reference cell holder provided 

with your spectrophotometer.

Related Topics

Installing a Reference Cell Holder

Sample Position Cell Holders

Cylindrical Reference Cell Holder

Cylindrical Reference Cell Holder

This holder fits cylindrical cells with the following pathlengths: 10 mm, 20 mm, 50 mm and 

100 mm.

Contents

• Rectangular Reference Cell Holder

• Cylindrical Reference Cell Holder
23

Reference Cell Holders

340 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Installing a Reference Cell Holder

Sample Position Cell Holders

Rectangular Reference Cell Holder
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 341

24

Sample Position Cell Holders

This section describes cell holders that can be used in the sample position of your 

spectrophotometer. See Installing a Manual Accessory and Installing a Liquid Thermostatted 

Accessory for installation instructions.

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

This single-cell holder is mounted on the standard baseplate and accommodates standard 

10 mm pathlength cells.

Use the cell lifter to raise the cell for easy removal. This cell holder allows fine adjustment of 

the vertical and horizontal position of the cell. This feature is useful for aligning reduced 

volume and microcuvettes with the light beam.

Contents

• 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

• Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

• Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

• Cylindrical Cell Holder

• Solid Sample Holders

• Universal Sample Holder Slide

• Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

• Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

• Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

• Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

• Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide
24

Sample Position Cell Holders

342 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

Cylindrical Cell Holder

Solid Sample Holders

Universal Sample Holder Slide

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

This is a temperature-controllable version of the rectangular cell holder. Fluids can be 

circulated through chambers in the cell holder block, allowing temperature-controlled 

measurements in the range between 5 °C and 95 °C (see Installing a Liquid Thermostatted 

Accessory). Two ports are provided to connect the cell holder to a recirculating liquid 

temperature control device. The connectors accept 1/4-inch internal diameter tubing.

Cell lifter and vertical alignment

Horizontal alignment
24 

Sample Position Cell Holders

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 343

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

Cylindrical Cell Holder

Solid Sample Holders

Universal Sample Holder Slide

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

This cell holder accommodates 10 mm pathlength cells designed for instruments with a 

15 mm z-height. The holder positions a 15 mm z-height cell properly for use with your 

spectrophotometer.

Cell lifter and vertical alignment

Horizontal alignment Fluid in/out ports
24

Sample Position Cell Holders

344 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cylindrical Cell Holder

Solid Sample Holders

Universal Sample Holder Slide

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

Cylindrical Cell Holder

This accessory accommodates cylindrical cells with a 22 mm external diameter and a 

pathlength of up to 100 mm. A flexible clip holds the cell in place.
24 

Sample Position Cell Holders

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 345

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

Solid Sample Holders

Universal Sample Holder Slide

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

Solid Sample Holders

There are two types of solid sample holders, fixed position and variable position. These 

holders support slides and sample mounting accessories that conform to industry standard 

dimensions.

The fixed position Sample Slide Holder offers two positioning options, left (detector) side and 

right (monochromator) side.

Height Width Thickness

50.8 mm (2 inches) 76.2 mm (3 inches) 2 mm (1/16 inch)
24

Sample Position Cell Holders

346 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

The variable position Sample Slide Holder comes with one slide holder that can be adjusted 

along a slide-rail from the extreme detector side of the sample compartment to within 3 cm of 

the monochromator side. For applications requiring more than one mounting slide, right and 

left slide holders are available.

• The right side slide holder can be positioned anywhere along the beam from the extreme 

right (monochromator) side of the sample compartment to within 3 cm of the left 

(detector) side.

• The left side slide holder is identical to the slide holder supplied with the baseplate. s

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

Cylindrical Cell Holder

Universal Sample Holder Slide

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

Right (monochromator) 

side slide holder

Left (detector) side 

slide holder
24 

Sample Position Cell Holders

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 347

Universal Sample Holder Slide

This accessory accommodates custom samples and requires a variable position Solid Sample 

Holder.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

Cylindrical Cell Holder

Solid Sample Holders

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

This sample holder accommodates test tubes up to 1-inch in diameter and 5 inches high or a 

standard 10 mm pathlength cell. The base can be rotated to properly position the cell or test 

tube at the center of the sample compartment. The clip can also be used to secure filters, thin 

films and other solid samples in the light beam.

Universal sample holder slide

Variable position 

sample slide holder
24

Sample Position Cell Holders

348 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

Cylindrical Cell Holder

Solid Sample Holders

Universal Sample Holder Slide

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

This sample holder accommodates cells that are 1-inch square such as Hach® cells and 

AccuVac® vials.
24 

Sample Position Cell Holders

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 349

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

Cylindrical Cell Holder

Solid Sample Holders

Universal Sample Holder Slide

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

This accessory can be used with test tubes and vials from 10 mm to 16 mm in diameter and 

up to 100 mm high.

NOTICE Exceeding the recommended diameter will cause the retaining clip to block the 

light beam.
24

Sample Position Cell Holders

350 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

Cylindrical Cell Holder

Solid Sample Holders

Universal Sample Holder Slide

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

This accessory accommodates rectangular cells with pathlengths ranging from 1 mm to 

100 mm.

Use the knob to adjust the accessory to accommodate your cell.

NOTICE Overtightening the accessory may damage or break the cell.
24 

Sample Position Cell Holders

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 351

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

Cylindrical Cell Holder

Solid Sample Holders

Universal Sample Holder Slide

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

Variable Pathlength Cell Holder Slide

This accessory accommodates rectangular cells with pathlengths ranging from 1 mm to 

50 mm and requires a variable position Solid Sample Holder).

Knob
24

Sample Position Cell Holders

352 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Reference Cell Holders

10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Water Thermostatted 10 mm Rectangular Cell Holder

Cell Holder for 15 mm Beam Height Cells

Cylindrical Cell Holder

Solid Sample Holders

Universal Sample Holder Slide

Rotatable Test Tube and Cell Holder

Sample Holder for 1-Inch Square Cells

Sample Holder for Small Test Tubes and Vials

Variable Pathlength Rectangular Cell Holder

Variable pathlength cell holder slide

Variable position 

sample slide holder
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 353

25

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

The Linear Cell Changer allows automated measurements with up to eight cells. The 

accessory is mounted on our Smart Accessory base and accommodates 10 mm pathlength 

cuvettes. Purchase cells separately.

The unit can be used with a fluid recirculator or other device to control sample temperature 

and is compatible with our temperature probes.

Related Topics

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

Accessories

Contents

• Safety Considerations

• Operating Precautions

• Installation

• Operation

• Maintenance

• Troubleshooting

8-cell holder

Smart Accessory base
25

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

354 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Safety Considerations

To avoid injury while using the accessory, keep hands and objects clear of the cell holder when 

calibrating, initializing or measuring samples with the cell changer.

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Operating Precautions

Handle the accessory carefully:

• Secure any tubing to avoid blocking the light beam (move the cell holder through all 

possible positions).

• Do not allow moisture to leak into the accessory.

• Wipe off spilled chemicals immediately.

• Do not drop the accessory.

• Protect the accessory from mechanical shock.

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Installation

Contents

• Installing a Smart Cell Changer

• Replacing the Cell Holder
25 

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 355

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Installing a Smart Cell Changer

It is not necessary to power off the instrument while installing or removing a Smart Accessory.

Y To install a cell changer

1. Open the sample compartment door.

2. Remove the sample compartment front panel.

3. Remove any existing cell holder or accessory.

4. Install the accessory.

The software displays a prompt to initialize the accessory.

Languages

Note The Smart Rotary Cell Changer and the Smart Linear Cell Changer cannot be used 

at the same time for double-beam instruments.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during 

initialization.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. Gardez vos mains, ainsi que tout objet, 

à l’écart de l’accessoire pendant l’initialisation.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während der 

Initialisierung vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Tenere mani e oggetti lontano 

dall’accessorio durante l’inizializzazione.
25

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

356 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

5. Replace the sample compartment front panel.

6. Close the sample compartment door.

7. Click OK to initialize the accessory.

Initialization reads information about the accessory and moves it to position 1.

8. To use a temperature probe with the cell changer, see “Temperature Probe”.

9. To connect a fluid recirculator or other device to control sample temperature on a 

thermostatted cell changer, see “Installing a Thermostatted Accessory.”

10. Calibrate the cell changer (linear cell changers only) and set the software parameters to 

display the cell changer status monitor and configure the accessory for operation.

Related Topics

Opening and Closing the Sample and Reference Compartment Doors

Removable Panels

Installing a Smart Accessory

Installing a Liquid Thermostatted Accessory

Temperature Probe

Replacing the Cell Holder

Calibrating the Cell Changer

Cell Changer Settings

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

Installation

Replacing the Cell Holder

Y To remove the cell holder

1. Loosen the two locking screws.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos lejos del 

alcance del accesorio durante la inicialización.
25 

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 357

2. Lift the cell holder off the base.

Y To install the cell holder

1. Line up the cell holder with the two alignment pins on the cell changer base.

2. Hand tighten the two locking screws.

3. Initialize the accessory. See Initializing the Cell Changer.

Related Topics

Installing a Smart Cell Changer

Installation

Operation

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Locking screw

Locking screw

Cell holder

Base

Contents

• Calibrating the Cell Changer

• Initializing the Cell Changer

• Cell Changer Settings

• Measuring Samples with the Cell Changer

• Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor
25

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

358 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Installation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Calibrating the Cell Changer

The linear cell changer must be calibrated the first time it is installed in a spectrophotometer. 

Calibration aligns each cell with the light beam. This is especially important when using 

microcells with the cell changer. The calibration settings are stored in the instrument.

Languages

Y To calibrate the linear cell changer

1. In INSIGHT software choose System Settings > Calibrations.

2. In the Linear Cell Changer group, click Calibrate.

A status box shows several intensity values collected on each side of the expected best 

location for each cell. The average of the highest readings is stored for each cell.

A message box appears when calibration is completed.

3. Click OK.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during operation.

Remarque Évitez les risques de pincement. Éloignez les mains et les objets de l’accessoire 

pendant son fonctionnement.

Anmerkung Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während des 

Betriebs vom Zubehör fern zu halten

N.B. Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento.Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’operazione.

Nota Evite riesgos de atrapamiento.Mantenga manos y objetos alejados del accesorio 

durante el funcionamiento.

CAUTION 
25 

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 359

Related Topics

Initializing the Cell Changer

Cell Changer Settings

Measuring Samples with the Cell Changer

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

Operation

Initializing the Cell Changer

The accessory must be initialized each time it is installed and after changing the cell holder 

when the Smart base unit is installed. Initializing verifies the cell position and resets the cell 

holder to position 1.

Languages

Y To initialize a cell changer

1. In the selected application, choose Settings > Accessories > Cell Changer.

2. Click Reset.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during 

initialization.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. Gardez vos mains, ainsi que tout objet, à 

l’écart de l’accessoire pendant l’initialisation.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während der 

Initialisierung vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’inizializzazione.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos lejos del alcance 

del accesorio durante la inicialización.
25

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

360 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Calibrating the Cell Changer

Cell Changer Settings

Measuring Samples with the Cell Changer

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

Operation

Cell Changer Settings

In the selected application, use Settings > Accessories > Cell Changer to display the available 

settings for a cell changer. The Cell Changer features appear only when a cell changer 

accessory is installed.

Related Topics

Calibrating the Cell Changer

Initializing the Cell Changer

Measuring Samples with the Cell Changer

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

Operation

Feature Description

Accessory name Shows the type and serial number read from the installed sample 

changer.

Current cell

Available cells

The numbered boxes match the cells in the changer head. The 

green box indicates the cell positioned for measurement. To 

manually position a cell in the light beam, click its numbered box.

The check boxes indicate cells enabled for use in the current 

template or active workbook. To disable or enable a cell, click its 

associated check box. Note that cell one is always enabled.

Reset Initializes the cell changer and moves cell one into the light beam.
25 

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 361

Measuring Samples with the Cell Changer

The cell changer performs automated measurements based on the sample list.

Languages

Y To measure samples with the cell changer

3. Click Home and click an application such as Fixed or Scan.

4. Choose Settings > Accessories> Cell Changer.

5. Under Available Cells, select the check boxes for the cells that will be used in the cell 

changer.

To skip a cell changer position, deselect its check box.

6. Set the other measurement parameters as desired. See the Settings tab for the selected 

application.

7. To measure a blank without using the sample list, click Measure Fixed and then click 

Zero (or Measure Scan and then Baseline).

The Loading Guide shows one entry for the blank measurement.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during operation.

Remarque Évitez les risques de pincement. Éloignez les mains et les objets de l’accessoire 

pendant son fonctionnement.

Anmerkung Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während des 

Betriebs vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

N.B. Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento.Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’operazione.

Nota Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos alejados del accesorio 

durante el funcionamiento.

CAUTION 

Note Position 1 can not be deselected.
25

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

362 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Place the approproate material (or nothing) in position 1 of the cell changer and click OK 

to perform the measurement.

8. Click Measure.

A dialog box shows the current sample list.

9. Set Number of samples to the number of samples to be measured.

10. Use Load Samples to import the sample list or enter sample names and descriptions if 

desired. See Settings > Samples to create the list ahead of time.

11. Click OK.

The loading guide shows the measurement sequence for the cell changer as defined in the 

sample list.

12. Place the cuvettes in the correct cell changer positions.

Note If the application requires a blank and it was not measured in step 4, the first 

cell changer position will be measured as the blank.
25 

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 363

13. Click OK or press Run on the instrument keypad.

To cancel, click Cancel or press Stop on the instrument keypad.

If a blank is required, it will be measured first, followed by the samples in order.

If the sample list has more entries than there are spaces in the cell changer, the Loading 

Guide reappears after the last cuvette is measured.

14. If the loading guide appears, remove all cuvettes from the cell changer and fill it with the 

next set of samples as defined in the loading guide.

15. Click OK.

16. Continue as above until all entries in the sample list have been measured.

Related Topics

Calibrating the Cell Changer

Initializing the Cell Changer

Cell Changer Settings

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

Operation

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

When a supported cell changer is installed, the selected application can be configured to 

display a cell changer status monitor above the data display.

Y To display a status monitor for an installed cell changer

1. Click Configure above the data display for the selected application. See “Instrument 

Status Monitors” for more information.

A dialog box appears.

2. Select Cell changer status and click OK.

A status monitor showing the current cell changer position appears above the data display.

Note The cell changer option appears in the dialog box only when a supported cell 

changer accessory is installed.
25

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

364 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Instrument Status Monitors

Calibrating the Cell Changer

Initializing the Cell Changer

Cell Changer Settings

Measuring Samples with the Cell Changer

Operation

Maintenance

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Troubleshooting

Routine Maintenance

Clean the accessory regularly using approved methods (wipe off spilled chemicals 

immediately). See Cleaning the Accessory.

Related Topics

Cleaning the Accessory

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Cleaning the Accessory

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Cleaning the Accessory

NOTICE Do not allow moisture to leak into the accessory interior.
25 

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 365

Y To clean the accessory exterior

1. Remove the accessory from the sample compartment. See Installing a Smart Accessory.

2. Use a cloth dampened with plain water to wipe the surface of the Smart Accessory base 

and cell holder.

3. Dry the surface with another cloth.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Absorbance 

values are 

inconsistent or 

higher than 

expected

The accessory is not 

aligned properly

Calibrate and then initialize the cell changer. 

See Calibrating the Cell Changer and 

Initializing the Cell Changer.
25

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

366 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 367

26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

This accessory includes a thermostatted linear 8-cell changer for 10 mm pathlength square 

cuvettes and a Peltier temperature controller that connects to a USB port on the 

spectrophotometer or computer. The accessory requires a water pump or recirculator, which 

must be purchased separately. Cell temperature can be controlled two ways: from the Peltier 

controller front panel or from the spectrophotometer using INSIGHT software. The Peltier 

controller may also be used to agitate the sample by placing a magnetic stirrer in the cuvette 

and selecting the stir speed.

Contents

Peltier temperature controller Linear cell changer
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

368 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Peltier Thermostatted Single Cell Holder

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

Accessories

General Safety Information

This equipment has been designed with an emphasis on quality, reliability and safety. We 

accept warranty responsibility for this accessory under the following conditions:

• Electrical installation in the room or building complies with regulations specified in the 

country where the equipment is to be used.

• The equipment is used in accordance with the provided instructions for use.

• All modifications and repairs are carried out by an authorized agent.

• Only modifications suggested and documented by us are to be made to any part of the 

accessory.

• The equipment installation is carried out in accordance with local requirements for 

responsibility and warranty.

• General Safety Information

• Product Description

• Preinstallation

• Installation

• Operation

• Maintenance

• Troubleshooting

CAUTION Always disconnect the power supply before starting any work inside the instrument.

CAUTION Take the necessary precautions when using flammable or explosive substances 

in this accessory.
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 369

Related Topics

Product Description

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Product Description

The Peltier Linear Cell Changer permits spectrophotometric measurements at controlled 

temperatures between 0 °C and 100 °C. Measurements can be made at constant temperatures. 

The accessory provides thermoelectric heating and cooling through the cell block.

Related Topics

General Safety Information

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Contents

• System Connections

• External Connections

• Temperature Controller Front and Rear Panel

• Specifications
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

370 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

System Connections

Related Topics

External Connections

Temperature Controller Front and Rear Panel

Specifications

External Connections

Communications are performed manually or via remote control through the RS-232 or USB 

connector.

Related Topics

System Connections

Temperature Controller Front and Rear Panel

Specifications

Temperature Controller Front and Rear Panel

The controller front panel features an LCD display with a three-button keypad.
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 371

The rear panel houses the main power connection with voltage selector, RS-232 and USB 

connectors for remote control, main power switch and cell holder connector.

Related Topics

System Connections

External Connections

Specifications

Specifications

This section describes the specifications for the Peltier temperature controller.

Contents
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

372 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Display/Keypad

The controller has an LCD screen and 3-button keypad to access the functions and set sample 

temperature and stirring rate. See Operation for details.

Programmable Parameters

• Temperature

• Stirring speed

Displayed Values

• Peltier block temperature

• Set temperature

• Stirring speed

• Heating/cooling power

Operating Specifications

• Stirring speed 0 to 1800 rpm

• Temperature range: 0 °C to 100 °C (32 °F to 212 °F)

• Temperature accuracy: ±0.15 °C (±0.27 °F) from 0 °C to 100 °C (32 °F to 212 °F)

• Temperature repeatability: typically ±0.1 °C (±0.18 °F)

• Temperature stability: typically ±0.1 °C (±0.18 °F)

• Specifications valid for ambient temperatures from 15 °C to 35 °C (59 °F to 95 °F)

• Display/Keypad

• Programmable Parameters

• Displayed Values

• Operating Specifications

• External Control

• Dimensions

• Electrical Data

• Description of Symbols

• Environmental Conditions
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 373

External Control

• RS-232

• USB

Dimensions

• Width: 216 mm (8.5 in)

• Height: 184 mm (7.25 in)

• Depth: 269 mm (10.6 in)

• Weight: 3 kg (8 lbs)

Electrical Data

• Voltage: 115/120 V or 220/240 V ±10% (factory setting 220/240 V)

• Frequency: 50/60 Hz

• Power: 100 VA

• CE marked

Description of Symbols

Environmental Conditions

Performance and safety of the accessory are guaranteed if operated under the following 

conditions:

• Pollution degree 2 (standard CEI EN 61010-1).

• Installation category II with smaller transient over voltages (standard IEC 664).

• Mains voltage fluctuations must not exceed 10% of the nominal voltage.

• Location of use is indoors at an altitude <2000 m (6562 ft).

• Location of use exhibits a relative humidity <80% noncondensing.

• Location of use exhibits an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 35 °C (50 °F and 

95 °F).

• Location of use is free from dust and vapors of solvents and acids.

CAUTION Symbol identifying the use of substances dangerous for health and the 

environment. For these substances, refer to the laws and terms in force for the laboratory 

using the instrument. Take the necessary precautions when using flammable or explosive 

substances.
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

374 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

System Connections

External Connections

Temperature Controller Front and Rear Panel

Preinstallation

Review this section before installing the accessory.

Related Topics

General Safety Information

Product Description

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse

For operation at 120 V, configure the voltage selector on the Peltier back panel and insert the 

correct fuse as described in the following table.

Adjustment for frequency change between 50 and 60 Hz is not necessary.

Contents

• Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse

• Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse

NOTICE The unit is factory set to operate at 220 V.

Power Supply Type of fuse - 250 V

240 V T 1A, Slo Blo

120 V T 2A, Slo Blo
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 375

Related Topics

Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse

Preinstallation

Changing the Voltage Setting or Fuse

The current voltage setting is shown in the voltage display window above the power switch.

Y To change the voltage setting or fuse

4. Turn off the Peltier unit and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.

5. Use a small screwdriver to pry the fuse drawer out of the fuse compartment by pulling the 

tab up and away from the drawer.

6. To change the voltage setting, remove the voltage selector cube from the drawer and 

carefully remove the fuse from the cube.

Voltage display window

Fuse drawer tab

Fuse drawer
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

376 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

7. Rotate the cube 180 degrees and then replace the cube in the drawer. The correct voltage 

setting should display in the window on the bottom of the fuse drawer.

8. Replace the fuse with a new one that is appropriate for the selected voltage. See Verifying 

the Power Supply and Fuse.

9. Slide the fuse drawer back into the fuse compartment until it locks in place.

10. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.

11. Turn on the main power switch on the Peltier unit back panel.

If the unit does not perform normally or if the replacement fuse blows, contact technical 

support.

Related Topics

Verifying the Power Supply and Fuse

Preinstallation

Installation

It is necessary to connect the cell holder to a water pump or fluid recirculator and to the 

temperature controller. 

.

Use only 12.5 mm (10 mm pathlength) square cuvettes with this accessory. Use at least 3 ml 

of solution for the analysis.

Before starting the accessory, familiarize yourself with the software features described in 

Operation. To agitate the sample during the measurement, place a magnetic stirrer in the 

cuvette and use the software to set the stirring speed.

Voltage selector cube

NOTICE Avoid damage to the cell block. Do not operate the accessory without a water 

pump or fluid recirculator.

NOTICE Avoid damage to the electronics. Do not connect or disconnect cables while the 

accessory is powered on.
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 377

Y To install the cell changer

1. Open the sample compartment cover.

2. Remove the sample compartment front panel. See Sample Compartment Front Panel.

3. Remove the tubing access panel. See Tubing Access Panel.

4. Remove any existing cell holder or accessory.

5. Connect one end of the provided flat cable to the cell holder.

6. Install the cell changer in the spectrophotometer sample compartment. See Installing a 

Smart Accessory.

The software displays a prompt to initialize the accessory.

Languages

Cable Connector

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during 

initialization.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. Gardez vos mains, ainsi que tout objet, 

à l’écart de l’accessoire pendant l’initialisation.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während der 

Initialisierung vom Zubehör fern zu halten.
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

378 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

7. Feed the other end of the cable through the opening behind the tubing access panel. See 

Tubing Access Panel.

8. Connect the free end of the cable to the Cell Holder socket on the back of the 

temperature controller.

9. Use appropriate tubing and the provided adapters to connect the two fluid ports on the 

cell holder to a water pump or fluid recirculator. See Installing a Liquid Thermostatted 

Accessory.

Ensure the tubing and cable do not obstruct the light beam. Use the provided clips if 

necessary and test all cell changer positions.

10. Replace the sample compartment front panel. See Sample Compartment Front Panel.

11. Close the sample compartment cover.

12. Turn on the power switch on the controller back panel.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Tenere mani e oggetti lontano 

dall’accessorio durante l’inizializzazione.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos lejos del 

alcance del accesorio durante la inicialización.

Water ports
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 379

13. Press and hold the On (center) button on the temperature controller for 2 seconds.

The Normal Mode display shows the current temperature settings.

14. Calibrate the cell changer. See Calibrating the Cell Changer.

15. Set the software parameters to display status monitors and configure the temperature 

controller and cell changer for operation. See Operation.

Related Topics

General Safety Information

Product Description

Preinstallation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Operation

Related Topics

General Safety Information

Product Description

Preinstallation

Installation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Contents

• Calibrating the Cell Changer

• Initializing the Cell Changer

• Setting the Target Temperature and Stir Speed

• Configuring the Cell Changer

• Measuring Samples with the Cell Changer
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

380 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Calibrating the Cell Changer

The linear cell changer must be calibrated the first time it is installed in a spectrophotometer. 

Calibration aligns each cell with the light beam. This is especially important when using 

microcells with the cell changer. The calibration settings are stored in the instrument.

Languages

Y To calibrate the linear cell changer

1. In INSIGHT software choose System Settings > Calibrations.

2. In the Linear Cell Changer group, click Calibrate.

A status box shows several intensity values collected on each side of the expected best 

location for each cell. The average of the highest readings is stored for each cell.

A message box appears when calibration is completed.

3. Click OK.

Related Topics

Initializing the Cell Changer

Setting the Target Temperature and Stir Speed

Configuring the Cell Changer

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during operation.

Remarque Évitez les risques de pincement. Éloignez les mains et les objets de l’accessoire 

pendant son fonctionnement.

Anmerkung Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während des 

Betriebs vom Zubehör fern zu halten

N.B. Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento.Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’operazione.

Nota Evite riesgos de atrapamiento.Mantenga manos y objetos alejados del accesorio 

durante el funcionamiento.

CAUTION 
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 381

Operation

Initializing the Cell Changer

The accessory must be initialized each time it is installed and after changing the cell holder 

when the Smart base unit is installed. Initializing verifies the cell position and resets the cell 

holder to position 1.

Languages

Y To initialize a cell changer

1. In the selected application, choose Settings > Accessories > Cell Changer.

2. Click Reset.

Related Topics

Calibrating the Cell Changer

Configuring the Cell Changer

Operation

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during 

initialization.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. Gardez vos mains, ainsi que tout objet, à 

l’écart de l’accessoire pendant l’initialisation.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während der 

Initialisierung vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’inizializzazione.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos lejos del alcance 

del accesorio durante la inicialización.
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

382 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Setting the Target Temperature and Stir Speed

INSIGHT software can be used to define a target temperature and display a temperature 

status monitor. A target temperature can also be set from the temperature controller front 

panel.

Related Topics

Calibrating the Cell Changer

Initializing the Cell Changer

Configuring the Cell Changer

Operation

Using INSIGHT Software to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Related Topics

Using the Peltier Controller to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Operation

Temperature and Stirrer Settings

In the selected application, use Settings > Accessories > Temperature to display the available 

settings for a temperature probe or controller. The Temperature features appear only when the 

driver for a temperature probe or controller is installed.

Contents

• Using INSIGHT Software to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

• Using the Peltier Controller to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Contents

• Temperature and Stirrer Settings

• Configuring a Target Temperature

• Displaying the Temperature Status Monitor
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 383

Related Topics

Configuring a Target Temperature

Displaying the Temperature Status Monitor

Using INSIGHT Software to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Configuring a Target Temperature

Y To configure a target temperature

1. Select Start measurement at target temperature.

2. Enter the Target temperature and Tolerance in °C.

• For a temperature probe. 

To start the measurement when the probe reaches the target temperature, set Start on

to Probe temperature and then select the Probe channel. The number of channels 

in the list box will match the available ports on the temperature probe interface box.

The probe channel, current temperature and target range appear during the 

measurement.

Feature Description

Record temperature with measurementIf a temperature probe is used, records the temperature of 

the sample after each measurement. Temperature readings 

are stored in the sample properties.

Use temperature controller If a Peltier cell holder or changer is used, defines a setpoint 

temperature for the cell block and a stir speed if desired. 

The available settings depend on the specifications for the 

temperature-controlled accessory.

Start measurements at target 

temperature

Starts the measurement when the sample (requires a temperature probe) or cell block (requires a Peltier cell holder 

or changer) reaches a specified temperature.

Match probes to cell changer 

positions

If a temperature probe is used, maps probe channels 1 

through 8 with up to eight cell changer positions. Useful 

only when using an automatic cell changer with multiple 

temperature probes.

Deselect this to always record the temperature of probe 1.
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

384 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

• For a temperature-controlled accessory. 

To start the measurement when the cell block reaches the target temperature, set 

Start on to Block temperature.

Only the current temperature and target range appear during the measurement.

The Start button is disabled since the measurement is configured to start automatically at 

the target temperature.

3. To allow time for equilibration, select Wait for equilibration and enter the duration.

The remaining equilibration time is displayed during the measurement.

If the temperature moves outside the target range, the countdown resets when the 

temperature is again within range.

The Start button becomes active when the temperature remains in the target range for the 

entire equilibration period.

4. To start the measurement automatically after equilibration, select Start measurement 

after equilibration. This disables the Start button in the status dialog box. The 

measurement starts automatically when the temperature remains in the target range 

during the entire equilibration period.

Related Topics

Temperature and Stirrer Settings
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 385

Displaying the Temperature Status Monitor

Using INSIGHT Software to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Displaying the Temperature Status Monitor

When a Peltier temperature-controlled accessory is installed, the INSIGHT software can be 

configured to display a temperature status monitor above the data display.

Y To display the temperature status monitor

1. Click the Configure button above the data display for the selected application. See 

Instrument Status Monitors for more information.

A dialog box lists the available status monitors.

2. Select Temperature controller status and click OK.

The status monitor appears above the data display.

Related Topics

Temperature and Stirrer Settings

Configuring a Target Temperature

Using the Peltier Controller to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Using the Peltier Controller to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

To start the controller, turn on the power switch on the controller back panel.

Startup Mode

After the controller power is turned on, the display appears in one of three modes: Stand-By, 

Normal, or Alarm. The image below indicates Normal mode.

Note The temperature controller option appears only when a temperature controller 

software driver is installed.

Contents

• Startup Mode

• Standby Mode

• Normal Mode
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

386 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Standby Mode

• Press and hold the Center button for one to two seconds to proceed to Normal Mode.

Normal Mode

Button Functions

• Press the Left button to go to the Main Menu page.

• Press the Right button to go to the Change Set Point page.

• Press and hold the Center button for one to two seconds to return to Stand-By Mode.

• From the Startup page in Normal Mode, use the Change button to move about the 

screen.

Actual block 

temperature

Stirring 

speed

Heating/cooling 

power scale

Block set temperature

Table 7. Startup modes and button functions

Page Mode Display Left button Center button Right button

Startup Standby Standby On

Normal Actual block temperature

Block Set temperature

Stirring speed (left)

Heating/cooling power (right)

Menu 

(Go to Main 

Menu)

Off Change (Go to 

Change Set Point 

Page)

Alarm Alarm description Menu Beep on/off Reset alarm/change*

*Only if the manual alarm reset option has been configured
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 387

Y Changing the set temperature

1. Highlight Set Temperature.

The Change Set Point page is displayed with down and up arrows above the Left and 

Center buttons.

2. Use the down and up arrow buttons to change the set temperature.

3. When the desired set temperature is displayed, press Change to return to the Startup 

page.

Y Setting the stirring speed

1. Highlight Stirring Speed.

2. The Change Set Point page is displayed with down and up arrows above the Left and 

Center buttons. 

3. Use the down and up arrow buttons to change the stirring speed.

4. When the desired stirring speed is reached, press Change to return to the Startup page.

Parameters Menu

• Use the Left and Center buttons to scroll the screen up and down.

• Use the Right button to exit the screen and return to the Main Menu.

Table 8. Normal Mode functions

Page Display Description Left button Center button Right button

Change Set 

Point

Flashing selected 

parameter

Change Temperature or 

Stirring Speed Set Point

Down Up Change

Main Menu Parameter User Parameters Scroll Select Exit

Configure Configuration Parameters Scroll Up Exit

Diagnostic Diagnostic Values Down Up Exit

Table 9. User parameters and button functions

Number Description Default value

P-01 Temperature units °C

P-02 Auto start NO

P-03 Display contrast 5

P-04 Beeper YES

P-05 Manual reset pre-alarm NO
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

388 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Configure Menu

Diagnostic Menu

• Use the Left and Center buttons to scroll the screen up and down.

• Use the Right button to exit the screen and return to the Main Menu.

Related Topics

Using INSIGHT Software to Set Temperature and Stir Speed

Operation

Configuring the Cell Changer

Related Topics

Calibrating the Cell Changer

Initializing the Cell Changer

Setting the Target Temperature and Stir Speed

Operation

Note A password is required to enter this menu.

NOTICE The Configure menu parameters are set at the factory and cannot be changed 

by the user.

Description Measure unit

Cell temperature °C

Radiator temperature °C

Water resistance Kohm

Power %

Cell voltage Volt

Contents

• Cell Changer Settings

• Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 389

Cell Changer Settings

In the selected application, use Settings > Accessories > Cell Changer to display the available 

settings for a cell changer. The Cell Changer features appear only when a cell changer 

accessory is installed.

Related Topics

Displaying the Temperature Status Monitor

Operation

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

When a supported cell changer is installed, the selected application can be configured to 

display a cell changer status monitor above the data display.

Y To display a status monitor for an installed cell changer

1. Click Configure above the data display for the selected application. See “Instrument 

Status Monitors” for more information.

A dialog box appears.

2. Select Cell changer status and click OK.

A status monitor showing the current cell changer position appears above the data display.

Feature Description

Accessory name Shows the type and serial number read from the installed sample 

changer.

Current cell

Available cells

The numbered boxes match the cells in the changer head. The 

green box indicates the cell positioned for measurement. To 

manually position a cell in the light beam, click its numbered box.

The check boxes indicate cells enabled for use in the current 

template or active workbook. To disable or enable a cell, click its 

associated check box. Note that cell one is always enabled.

Reset Initializes the cell changer and moves cell one into the light beam.

Note The cell changer option appears in the dialog box only when a supported cell 

changer accessory is installed.
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

390 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Configuring a Target Temperature

Operation

Measuring Samples with the Cell Changer

The cell changer performs automated measurements based on the sample list.

Languages

Y To measure samples with the cell changer

3. Click Home and click an application such as Fixed or Scan.

4. Choose Settings > Accessories> Cell Changer.

5. Under Available Cells, select the check boxes for the cells that will be used in the cell 

changer.

To skip a cell changer position, deselect its check box.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during operation.

Remarque Évitez les risques de pincement. Éloignez les mains et les objets de l’accessoire 

pendant son fonctionnement.

Anmerkung Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während des 

Betriebs vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

N.B. Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento.Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’operazione.

Nota Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos alejados del accesorio 

durante el funcionamiento.

CAUTION 

Note Position 1 can not be deselected.
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 391

6. Set the other measurement parameters as desired. See the Settings tab for the selected 

application.

7. To measure a blank without using the sample list, click Measure Fixed and then click 

Zero (or Measure Scan and then Baseline).

The Loading Guide shows one entry for the blank measurement.

Place the approproate material (or nothing) in position 1 of the cell changer and click OK 

to perform the measurement.

8. Click Measure.

A dialog box shows the current sample list.

9. Set Number of samples to the number of samples to be measured.

10. Use Load Samples to import the sample list or enter sample names and descriptions if 

desired. See Settings > Samples to create the list ahead of time.

11. Click OK.

The loading guide shows the measurement sequence for the cell changer as defined in the 

sample list.
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

392 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

12. Place the cuvettes in the correct cell changer positions.

13. Click OK or press Run on the instrument keypad.

To cancel, click Cancel or press Stop on the instrument keypad.

If a blank is required, it will be measured first, followed by the samples in order.

If the sample list has more entries than there are spaces in the cell changer, the Loading 

Guide reappears after the last cuvette is measured.

14. If the loading guide appears, remove all cuvettes from the cell changer and fill it with the 

next set of samples as defined in the loading guide.

15. Click OK.

16. Continue as above until all entries in the sample list have been measured.

Related Topics

Calibrating the Cell Changer

Initializing the Cell Changer

Setting the Target Temperature and Stir Speed

Configuring the Cell Changer

Operation

Maintenance

Note If the application requires a blank and it was not measured in step 4, the first 

cell changer position will be measured as the blank.

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Cleaning the Accessory
26 

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 393

Related Topics

General Safety Information

Product Description

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Troubleshooting

Routine Maintenance

The accessory requires little routine maintenance.

Related Topics

Cleaning the Accessory

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Cleaning the Accessory

To clean the accessory, use a cloth damped with water or neutral detergent only. Do not use 

organic or abrasive solvents.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

CAUTION Do not open the unit while the power cord is connected. Any action that 

makes it necessary to open the unit must be executed by authorized service personnel.
26

SPE-8W Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

394 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Troubleshooting

Related Topics

General Safety Information

Product Description

Preinstallation

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Absorbance values are inconsistent or higher 

than expected

The accessory is not 

aligned properly

Calibrate and then initialize the cell changer. See 

Calibrating the Cell Changer and Initializing the 

Cell Changer.

Temperature or 

memory failure

Recirculator 

malfunction or 

incorrect use

NOTICE Immediately turn off the main 

power switch and then turn it on again. If the 

failure reoccurs, turn off the power and 

contact technical support. See Contacting Us.
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 395

27

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

The Smart Rotary Cell Changer includes a cell holder mounted on a Smart Accessory base. 

The cell holder accommodates seven standard 10 mm pathlength cuvettes.

The accessory can be connected to a fluid recirculator or other device to control sample 

temperature and is compatible with our temperature probes.

Related Topics

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

Accessories

Contents

• Safety Considerations

• Operating Precautions

• Installation

• Operation

• Maintenance

Cell holder

Smart Accessory base

Standard cuvette
27

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

396 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Safety Considerations

To avoid injury while using the accessory, keep hands and objects clear of the cell holder when 

initializing or measuring samples with the cell changer.

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Operating Precautions

Handle the accessory carefully:

• Secure all tubing to avoid blocking the light beam (move the cell holder through all 

possible positions).

• Do not allow moisture to leak into the accessory.

• Wipe off spilled chemicals immediately.

• Do not drop the accessory.

• Protect the accessory from mechanical shock.

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Installation

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Contents

• Installing a Smart Cell Changer

• Replacing the Cell Holder
27 

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 397

Operating Precautions

Operation

Maintenance

Installing a Smart Cell Changer

It is not necessary to power off the instrument while installing or removing a Smart Accessory.

Y To install a cell changer

1. Open the sample compartment door.

2. Remove the sample compartment front panel.

3. Remove any existing cell holder or accessory.

4. Install the accessory.

The software displays a prompt to initialize the accessory.

Languages

5. Replace the sample compartment front panel.

Note The Smart Rotary Cell Changer and the Smart Linear Cell Changer cannot be used 

at the same time for double-beam instruments.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during 

initialization.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. Gardez vos mains, ainsi que tout objet, 

à l’écart de l’accessoire pendant l’initialisation.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während der 

Initialisierung vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Tenere mani e oggetti lontano 

dall’accessorio durante l’inizializzazione.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos lejos del 

alcance del accesorio durante la inicialización.
27

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

398 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

6. Close the sample compartment door.

7. Click OK to initialize the accessory.

Initialization reads information about the accessory and moves it to position 1.

8. To use a temperature probe with the cell changer, see “Temperature Probe”.

9. To connect a fluid recirculator or other device to control sample temperature on a 

thermostatted cell changer, see “Installing a Thermostatted Accessory.”

10. Calibrate the cell changer (linear cell changers only) and set the software parameters to 

display the cell changer status monitor and configure the accessory for operation.

Related Topics

Opening and Closing the Sample and Reference Compartment Doors

Removable Panels

Installing a Smart Accessory

Installing a Liquid Thermostatted Accessory

Temperature Probe

Replacing the Cell Holder

Installation

Replacing the Cell Holder

Initialize the accessory after installing a cell holder.

Y To install a cell holder

1. Line up the tab on the underside of the cell holder with the notch on the motor shaft.

2. Place the cell holder on the shaft.

Tab on 

underside of 

cell holder

Notch on motor 

shaft of Smart base 

unit
27 

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 399

3. Turn the knurled knob clockwise until tight.

4. Initialize the accessory. See Initializing the Cell Changer.

Y To remove a cell holder

1. Grasp the cell holder with one hand and turn the knurled knob counterclockwise until 

the holder is released.

2. Lift the cell holder off the cell changer base.

Related Topics

Installing a Smart Cell Changer

Installation

Operation

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Maintenance

Initializing the Cell Changer

The accessory must be initialized each time it is installed and after changing the cell holder 

when the Smart base unit is installed. Initializing verifies the cell position and resets the cell 

holder to position 1.

Contents

• Initializing the Cell Changer

• Cell Changer Settings

• Measuring Samples with a Cell Changer

• Measuring Standards with a Cell Changer

• Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during 

initialization.
27

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

400 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Languages

Y To initialize a cell changer

1. In the selected application, choose Settings > Accessories > Cell Changer.

2. Click Reset.

Related Topics

Cell Changer Settings

Measuring Samples with a Cell Changer

Measuring Standards with a Cell Changer

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

Operation

Cell Changer Settings

In the selected application, use Settings > Accessories > Cell Changer to display the available 

settings for a cell changer. The Cell Changer features appear only when a cell changer 

accessory is installed.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. Gardez vos mains, ainsi que tout objet, à 

l’écart de l’accessoire pendant l’initialisation.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während der 

Initialisierung vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’inizializzazione.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos lejos del alcance 

del accesorio durante la inicialización.
27 

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 401

Related Topics

Initializing the Cell Changer

Measuring Samples with a Cell Changer

Measuring Standards with a Cell Changer

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

Operation

Measuring Samples with a Cell Changer

The cell changer performs automated measurements based on the sample list.

Languages

Feature Description

Accessory name Shows the type and serial number read from the installed sample 

changer.

Current cell

Available cells

The numbered boxes match the cells in the changer head. The 

green box indicates the cell positioned for measurement. To 

manually position a cell in the light beam, click its numbered box.

The check boxes indicate cells enabled for use in the current 

template or active workbook. To disable or enable a cell, click its 

associated check box. Note that cell one is always enabled.

Reset Initializes the cell changer and moves cell one into the light beam.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during operation.

Remarque Évitez les risques de pincement. Éloignez les mains et les objets de l’accessoire 

pendant son fonctionnement.

Anmerkung Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während des 

Betriebs vom Zubehör fern zu halten.
27

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

402 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To measure samples with the cell changer

3. Click Home and click an application such as Fixed or Scan.

4. Choose Settings > Accessories> Cell Changer.

5. Under Available Cells, select the check boxes for the cells that will be used in the cell 

changer.

To skip a cell changer position, deselect its check box.

6. Set the other measurement parameters as desired. See the Settings tab for the selected 

application.

7. To measure a blank without using the sample list, click Measure Fixed and then click 

Zero (or Measure Scan and then Baseline).

The Loading Guide shows one entry for the blank measurement.

Place the approproate material (or nothing) in position 1 of the cell changer and click OK 

to perform the measurement.

8. Click Measure.

A dialog box shows the current sample list.

N.B. Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento.Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’operazione.

Nota Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos alejados del accesorio 

durante el funcionamiento.

CAUTION 

Note Position 1 can not be deselected.
27 

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 403

9. Set Number of samples to the number of samples to be measured.

10. Use Load Samples to import the sample list or enter sample names and descriptions if 

desired. See Settings > Samples to create the list ahead of time.

11. Click OK.

The loading guide shows the measurement sequence for the cell changer as defined in the 

sample list.

12. Place the cuvettes in the correct cell changer positions.

13. Click OK or press Run on the instrument keypad.

To cancel, click Cancel or press Stop on the instrument keypad.

If a blank is required, it will be measured first, followed by the samples in order.

If the sample list has more entries than there are spaces in the cell changer, the Loading 

Guide reappears after the last cuvette is measured.

14. If the loading guide appears, remove all cuvettes from the cell changer and fill it with the 

next set of samples as defined in the loading guide.

15. Click OK.

Note If the application requires a blank and it was not measured in step 4, the first 

cell changer position will be measured as the blank.
27

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

404 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

16. Continue as above until all entries in the sample list have been measured.

Related Topics

Initializing the Cell Changer

Cell Changer Settings

Measuring Standards with a Cell Changer

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

Operation

Measuring Standards with a Cell Changer

The cell changer can be used to measure blanks, reference samples, standards and samples for 

quantitative analysis. The measurement sequence depends on the quantitative analysis type 

and other measurement settings. During the measurement, the loading guide will indicate 

when and how to load the cell changer. Follow the instructions that appear.

Related Topics

Initializing the Cell Changer

Cell Changer Settings

Measuring Samples with a Cell Changer

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

Displaying the Cell Changer Status Monitor

When a supported cell changer is installed, the selected application can be configured to 

display a cell changer status monitor above the data display.

Y To display a status monitor for an installed cell changer

1. Click Configure above the data display for the selected application. See “Instrument 

Status Monitors” for more information.

A dialog box appears.

2. Select Cell changer status and click OK.

Note The cell changer option appears in the dialog box only when a supported cell 

changer accessory is installed.
27 

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 405

A status monitor showing the current cell changer position appears above the data display.

Related Topics

Initializing the Cell Changer

Cell Changer Settings

Measuring Samples with a Cell Changer

Measuring Standards with a Cell Changer

Operation

Maintenance

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Routine Maintenance

Clean the accessory regularly using approved methods (wipe off spilled chemicals 

immediately). See Cleaning the Accessory.

Related Topics

Cleaning the Accessory

Maintenance

Cleaning the Accessory

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Cleaning the Accessory

NOTICE Do not allow moisture to leak into the accessory interior.
27

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

406 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To clean the accessory exterior

1. Remove the accessory from the sample compartment. See Installing a Smart Accessory.

2. Use a cloth dampened with plain water to wipe the surface of the Smart Accessory base 

and cell holder.

3. Dry the surface with another cloth.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Maintenance
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 407

Smart Sipper

The Smart SipperTM includes a pump (see Pump Specifications for details) and cell holder 

mounted on a Smart Accessory base, standard and acid-compatible tubing packs, and a special 

sample compartment front panel.

The provided tubing packs include:

• Pump tubing (silicone rubber or Viton®).

• Flow cell tubing (fluorinated ethylene polymer, or FEP).

• Low volume flow cell tubing (polytetrafluoroethylene, or PTFE).

• Connectors.

Related Topics

Accessories

Safety Considerations

To avoid injury, remove the Smart Sipper from the spectrophotometer or turn off the 

spectrophotometer main power switch before installing pump tubing.

Contents

• Safety Considerations

• Operating Precautions

• Installation

• Calibration

• Maintenance

• Specifications

• Troubleshooting

Pump

Cell holder

Smart 

Accessory base
28

Smart Sipper

408 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Consignes de sécurité

Pour éviter tout risque de blessure, retirez le système d’aspiration Smart Sipper du 

spectrophotomètre ou mettez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du spectrophotomètre en position 

off avant d’installer la tubulure de la pompe.

Sicherheitshinweise

Entfernen Sie vor der Installation der Pumpenschläuche den Smart-Sipper aus dem 

Spektrophotometer oder schalten Sie den die Spannungsversorgung am Hauptschalter des 

Spektrophotometers aus, um Verletzungen zu vermeiden.

Considerazioni sulla sicurezza

Per evitare lesioni rimuovere lo Smart Sipper dallo spettrofotometro oppure spegnere 

l’interruttore di alimentazione dello spettrofotometro prima di installare le tubazioni della 

pompa.

Consideraciones sobre seguridad

Para evitar lesiones, extraiga el aspirador de muestras Smart del espectrofotómetro o ponga el 

interruptor de alimentación en la posición de apagado antes de instalar los tubos de la bomba.

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Installation

Calibration

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

Troubleshooting
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 409

Operating Precautions

Handle the accessory carefully:

• Do not drop the accessory.

• Protect the accessory from mechanical shock.

• Use tubing that is compatible with your sample material.

• Remove the tubing from the pump before storing the accessory.

• Leave the instrument and accessory powered on when the pump is idle and some liquid in 

the sample intake container. The accessory will periodically “sip” a small volume to 

redistribute the pressure on the tubing.

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Installation

Calibration

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

Troubleshooting

Installation

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Calibration

Operation

Contents

• Installing Pump Tubing

• Installing the Smart Sipper

• Installing a Flow Cell
28

Smart Sipper

410 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Maintenance

Specifications

Troubleshooting

Installing Pump Tubing

We provide two kinds of pump tubing with the Smart Sipper: silicone rubber (Standard 

Tubing Pack) and Viton® (Acid Tubing Pack).

Verify tubing size and sample compatibility prior to installation. See Specifications.

Languages

Y To install pump tubing

1. Remove the Smart Sipper from the spectrophotometer or turn off the spectrophotometer 

main power switch.

2. Cut an 18 cm length of pump tubing.

3. Taking care not to stretch, slacken or twist the tubing, feed it counterclockwise around 

the track while manually rotating the pump head.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Do not install pump tubing while the instrument is 

powered on.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. N’installez pas la tubulure de la pompe 

lorsque l’instrument est sous tension.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Die Pumpenschläuche dürfen nicht 

installiert werden, während das Instrument eingeschaltet ist.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Non installare le tubazioni della pompa 

mentre lo strumento è acceso.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. No instale los tubos de la bomba con el 

instrumento encendido.
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 411

4. Press the tubing into both clamps.

5. Insert a nipple (provided) into each end of the tubing.

Related Topics

Installing the Smart Sipper

Installing a Flow Cell

Installation

Installing the Smart Sipper

It is not necessary to power off the instrument when installing or removing a Smart Accessory.

NOTICE Leave at least 2 cm of tubing extending beyond each clamp.

NOTICE Remove the tubing from the pump before storing the accessory. Leave the 

instrument and accessory powered on when the pump is idle.

Open clamps

Rotate pump head

Insert tubing

Pump In

Pump Out

Nipple
28

Smart Sipper

412 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To install the Smart Sipper

1. Open the sample compartment. See Opening and Closing the Sample and Reference 

Compartment Doors.

2. Remove the sample compartment front panel. See Sample Compartment Front Panel.

3. Remove any existing cell holder or accessory.

4. Install the accessory. See Installing a Smart Accessory.

The software displays a prompt to initialize the accessory.

Languages

5. Click OK to initialize the accessory.

Initialization reads information about the accessory and reset the pump motors.

6. Install the Sipper sample compartment front panel.

Align the tab on the bottom edge with the slot in the instrument cover and press the 

panel in place.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during 

initialization.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. Gardez vos mains, ainsi que tout objet, 

à l’écart de l’accessoire pendant l’initialisation.

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während der 

Initialisierung vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Tenere mani e oggetti lontano 

dall’accessorio durante l’inizializzazione.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos lejos del 

alcance del accesorio durante la inicialización.
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 413

7. Connect the cable from the Sipper front panel to the socket on the Smart Sipper base and 

hand tighten the collar.

Align the pins before plugging in the connector.

Related Topics

Installing Pump Tubing

Installing a Flow Cell

Installation

Installing a Flow Cell

The provided cell holder accommodates 12.5 mm x 12.5 mm flow cells. Other compatible 

holders and flow cells are available. All compatible cell holders have a central screw that 

mounts to the Smart Sipper base.

Sipper front panel

Connector
28

Smart Sipper

414 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Do not stretch, slacken or twist the tubing during installation.

Y To install a flow cell

1. Connect a length of appropriate tubing between the Flow Cell Out connector and the 

pump In connector on the Smart Sipper.

Use pump tubing if it fits the cell port. If the flow cell ports are not marked, check the 

documentation that came with the cell.

For flow cells with glass connectors, slide one end of the tubing over the Flow Cell Out 

connector and the other end over the connector on the Pump In tubing.

For flow cells with screw-caps, install screw connectors, O-rings and washers that fit the 

cell ports, and tubing that has a flanged end (samples are provided).

a. In this order, slide the plastic O-ring, rubber washer and screw connector over the 

open end of the tubing until they contact the flange.

b. Screw the cap into the Out port on the flow cell.

c. Attach the open end of the tubing to the Pump In connector.

Tip To prevent leaks, push tubing onto connectors as far as possible (wet the tubing first if 

necessary).

Flow Cell In

Cell holder

Pump In

Pump Out

Flow Cell Out

From Sipper front panel

To waste container

Flanged tube

Screw connector

Rubber washer

Plastic O-ring

Flange
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 415

If the flow cell tubing does not fit over the connector, attach a short piece of extra 

pump tubing to the connector and insert the flow cell tubing into the sleeve. If the 

connection is too loose, use a clamp or add another sleeve of narrower tubing to 

ensure a tight fit.

2. Cut an appropriate length of PTFE or FEP tubing to reach from the Flow Cell In port 

through the Sipper front panel to the sample container. 

Depending on the depth of your sample container, leave at least 5 cm of tubing 

protruding from the guide.

3. Feed one end of the tubing all the way through the metal guide in the Sipper front panel.

4. Connect the loose end to the Flow Cell In port.

If the tubing does not fit over the Flow Cell In connector, make a sleeve with extra tubing 

as described above.

For a screw-cap flow cell, use flanged tubing and another screw cap, O-ring and washer to 

connect the tubing to the Flow Cell In port.

5. Position the flow cell with the In port on the right, and place it in the cell holder on the 

Smart Sipper.

6. Connect an appropriate length of tubing to the Pump Out port, and route it through one 

of the slits in the Sipper front panel to your waste container.

7. Calibrate the sipper configuration. See Calibration.

8. Set the parameters to operate the Sipper manually or configure workflows for 

autosampling with the Sipper. See Operation.

Related Topics

Installing Pump Tubing

Installing the Smart Sipper

Installation

Calibration

Calibrate the Sipper configuration before using the accessory to analyze samples.

Install the pump tubing, Smart Sipper and flow cell, including all tubing connections (see 

Installation) before calibration.

Languages

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during operation.
28

Smart Sipper

416 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Y To calibrate the Smart Sipper

1. Fill a measuring cylinder with laboratory grade purified water or the solvent to be used for 

sample measurements. 

The calibration will be more accurate if the viscosity of the solution used for calibration is 

similar to the viscosity of the sample solution.

2. Place the Sipper intake tube in the cylinder.

3. Open INSIGHT software and click System Settings > Calibrations.

A prompt appears.

4. Enter the volume to be drawn for the calibration test in the Sip Volume box (typically 

10 ml).

5. To display a prompt before each test, select Prompt.

To sip automatically after a period of time, select Count down and enter the time.

Remarque Évitez les risques de pincement. Éloignez les mains et les objets de l’accessoire 

pendant son fonctionnement.

Anmerkung Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während des 

Betriebs vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

N.B. Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento.Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’operazione.

Nota Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos alejados del accesorio 

durante el funcionamiento.
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 417

6. Click Next.

A prompt appears. The contents depends on the Prompting setting.

7. Record the volume of liquid in the cylinder.

8. Click OK or Pump Now (or wait until the counter is finished).

The Sipper attempts to draw the specified volume, and then a prompt requests the actual 

volume drawn.

9. Remove the inlet tube from the cylinder and record the volume of liquid remaining.

10. Subtract the volume remaining in the cylinder from the initial volume to calculate the 

actual volume drawn through the inlet tube. Enter this value in the Actual box and click 

Next.

11. Repeat steps 7 through 10 until the Actual volume matches the Expected volume.

12. Click Done.

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

Troubleshooting
28

Smart Sipper

418 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Operation

In the selected INSIGHT software application, click Settings > Accessories > Sipper to 

display the settings for the Smart Sipper. The Sipper features appear only when a Smart Sipper 

is installed.

Feature Description

Sip volume entry box For automated sipper workflows, defines the volume to 

draw for each measurement. The sip volume must be 

greater than 0.

Use sufficient volume to push any previous solution out of 

the flow cell. When the cell is filled, the sample material 

should also fill at least 8 cm of the inlet tube in front of the 

flow cell to prevent air bubbles from entering the cell. (Use 

an air gap if the sample material is limited.) Check the 

system for cross-contamination before taking 

measurements.

Settle time For automated sipper workflows, specifies a delay before 

the sample is measured to allow air bubbles to dissipate. 

Enter 0 to skip this step.

Air gap duration For automated sipper workflows that include a “draw air” 

step, defines how long to draw air through the system to 

move a small sample volume to the flow cell. The correct 

setting depends on the Sip volume setting and the length 

of the inlet tube. Typically, draw sufficient air to push the 

sample into the cell but leave enough sample material to 

fill at least 8 cm of the inlet tube in front of the flow cell.

Enter 0 to skip this step.

Rinse duration For automated sipper workflows that include a “rinse” 

step, specifies how long to draw the rinse solution through 

the system. Enter 0 to skip this step.
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 419

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Calibration

Maintenance

Sipper Workflows Defines automated sipper workflows. Use the Measure

button in the software to start the workflow. 

• Sip, settle, measure, prompt, return draws the 

specified sip volume, delays the specified settle time, 

measures the sample, and prompts to move the inlet 

tube to the return container. When the user clicks OK 

or presses the Sipper front panel switch, returns the 

sample to the container.

• Sip, draw air, settle, measure, prompt, rinse, draw 

air draws the specified sip volume and prompts to 

remove the inlet tube. When the user clicks OK or 

presses the front panel switch, draws air for the 

specified period, waits the specified settle time, 

measures the sample and prompts to place the inlet 

tube in the rinse solution. When the user clicks OK or 

presses the switch, draws the rinse solution for the 

specified time and prompts to remove the inlet tube. 

When the user clicks OK or presses the switch, draws 

air for the specified period.

Samples are measured using the selected application. 

Results are placed in the selected workbook.

Manual Control Activates the Sipper front panel switch as a pump control. 

When the check box is selected, pressing the switch once 

causes the pump to draw through the inlet tube; pressing it 

again stops it.

Sip Volume button Immediately causes the pump to draw the specified sip 

volume through the inlet tube.

Pump On/Pump Off buttons Toggles between Pump On and Pump Off. Pump On

causes the pump to draw continuously through the inlet 

tube; Pump Off causes it to stop.

Feature Description
28

Smart Sipper

420 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Specifications

Troubleshooting

Maintenance

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Calibration

Operation

Specifications

Troubleshooting

Routine Maintenance

Clean the accessory regularly using approved methods (wipe off spilled chemicals 

immediately).

Related Topics

Cleaning the Accessory

Replacing Pump Tubing

Cleaning Flow Cells

Replacing Flow Cell Tubing

Maintenance

Cleaning the Accessory

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Cleaning the Accessory

• Replacing Pump Tubing

NOTICE Do not allow moisture to leak into the accessory interior.
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 421

Y To clean the accessory exterior

1. Remove the accessory from the sample compartment. See Installing a Smart Accessory.

2. Use a lint-free cloth dampened with plain water to wipe the area near the cell holder.

3. Dry the surface with another cloth.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Replacing Pump Tubing

Cleaning Flow Cells

Replacing Flow Cell Tubing

Maintenance

Replacing Pump Tubing

Examine pump tubing weekly and when pumping efficiency is impaired. Replace crimped or 

worn tubing (see Installing Pump Tubing).

If you install a different type or size tubing, recalibrate before analyzing samples (see 

Calibration).

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Cleaning the Accessory

Cleaning Flow Cells

Replacing Flow Cell Tubing

Maintenance

Cleaning Flow Cells

Rinse the flow cell and inlet tubing thoroughly with laboratory grade purified water after each 

analysis and before turning off the Smart Sipper. Keep the cell filled with purified water when 

not in use.

At least once a week, remove the flow cell from the accessory and soak it in a solution of 

DeconTM detergent (or equivalent), diluted according to the manufacturer’s instructions. When 

finished, reconnect the cell and flush it thoroughly with laboratory grade purified water.
28

Smart Sipper

422 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Cleaning the Accessory

Replacing Pump Tubing

Replacing Flow Cell Tubing

Maintenance

Replacing Flow Cell Tubing

Examine flow cell tubing regularly. Replace tubing that is kinked, worn or contaminated with 

sample material.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Cleaning the Accessory

Replacing Pump Tubing

Cleaning Flow Cells

Maintenance

Specifications

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Calibration

Operation

Maintenance

Contents

• Pump Tubing Chemical Compatibility

• Pump Tubing Specifications

• Pump Specifications
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 423

Troubleshooting

Pump Tubing Chemical Compatibility

We provide two kinds of pump tubing: silicone rubber (Standard Tubing Pack) and Viton® 

(Acid Tubing Pack). Silicone rubber is suitable for most aqueous solutions and is 

recommended when the pump will be used for prolonged periods. Viton withstands many 

strong acids, alkalis and organic solvents, which corrode silicone rubber.

Use the table below to verify that your chemicals are compatible with the provided tubing, or 

other tubing that is compatible and meets our specifications.

The table is only a general guide. Each rating is based on ideal testing conditions used by 

tubing manufacturers. Temperature, length of service, chemical concentration, etc. can affect 

chemical resistance. Test the tubing under your experimental conditions.

Chemical Compatibility for Silicone, Viton and Norprene Tubing

Key Meaning

X Can be used

— Marginal

Blank Not tested

N Not recommended

Chemical Nor Sil Vit Chemical Nor Sil Vit

Acetaldehyde X X N Arsenic salts X X

Acetates X — N Barium salts X X X

Acetic acid (<5%) X X X Benzaldehyde X N N

Acetic acid (>5%) X X — Benzene N N X

Acetic anhydride X N Benzene sulfonic acid X

Acetonitrile — Benzoic acid X — X

Acetone X — Benzyl alcohol X X

Acetyl bromide Bleaching liquors X — X

Acetyl chloride Boric acid X X X

Air X X X Bromine X N X

Alcohols X X X Butane X N X

Aliphatic hydrocarbon X — N Butyl acetate N

Aluminum chloride X — N Butyl alcohol X — N

Aluminum sulfate X X X Butyric acid X —
28

Smart Sipper

424 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Alums X X Calcium oxide X X

Ammonia X X N Calcium salts X — X

Ammonium acetate X Carbon bisulfide X

Ammonium carbonate X Carbon dioxide X — X

Ammonium chloride X Carbon tetrachloride N N X

Ammonium hydroxide X X X Chloracetic acid X N

Ammonium nitrate X — Chlorine (wet) X N X

Ammonium phosphate X X Chlorine (dry) X N N

Ammonium sulfate X X X Chlorobenzene N X

Amyl acetate X N N Chlorobromomethane N X

Amyl alcohol X N X Chloroform N N X

Amyl chloride N X Chloronaphthalene N N

Aniline N — Chlorosulfonic acid N N

Aniline hydrochloride N X Chromic acid X N X

Antimony salts X — Chromium salts X

Aqua regia X — Copper salts X X X

Aromatic hydrocarbons N — X Cresol X X

Cyclohexane N N X Hydrobromic acid X — X

Cyclohexanone N X Hydrochloric acid (dil) X N X

Diacetone alcohol N N Hydrochloric acid (med) X N

Dichloromethane N N Hydrochloric acid (conc) X N X

Dimethyl formamide — N Hydrocyanic acid X N X

Dimethyl sulfoxide X X Hydrofluoric acid N N X

Essential oils X Hydrogen peroxide (dil) X X X

Ethers X N — Hydrogen peroxide (conc) X X —

Ethyl acetate N N N Hydrogen sulfide X X N

Ethyl alcohol X — X Hydrochlorous acid X

Ethyl bromide X Iodine solutions X X

Ethyl chloride N N X Kerosene N N X

Ethylamine X Ketones N N N

Ethylene dichloride N X Lacquer solvents N N

Ethylene glycol X X X Lactic acid X — X

Chemical Nor Sil Vit Chemical Nor Sil Vit
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 425

Ethylene oxide N N Lead acetate X N N

Fatty acids — X Lithium hydroxide (5%) N X

Ferric chloride X — X Magnesium chloride X X X

Ferric sulfate X — X Magnesium sulfate X

Ferrous chloride — X Malic acid X X

Ferrous sulfate — X Manganese salts X X X

Fluoroborate salts X Mercury salts X X

Fluoroboric acid X Methane X N X

Formaldehyde X — X Methanol X X

Formic acid X — N Methyl chloride — X

Freon N N — Methylethyl ketone N N

Gasoline — N X Molybdenum disulfide —

Glucose X X X Monoethanolamine —

Glue X Naphtha N N X

Glycerine X X X Natural gas X X X

Hydrazine (64% in H2O) X X Nickel salts X X X

Nitric acid (dil) X — X Sodium borate X X X

Nitric acid (med) — N X Sodium carbonate X X X

Nitric acid (conc) N N — Sodium chlorate X X

Nitrobenzene N N XN Sodium chloride X X X

Nitrogen oxides X — — Sodium ferrocyanide X X

Nitrous acid X — Sodium hydrosulfite X — X

Oils, animal X — X Sodium hydroxide (dil) X — X

Oils, mineral X — X Sodium hydroxide (med) X — X

Oils, vegetable X X X Sodium hydroxide (conc) — — —

Oleic acid X N — Sodium hypochlorite (<5%) X X

Oxalic acid X — X Sodium hypochlorite (>5%) X X

Perchloric acid N N X Sodium sulfide X X X

Perchloroethylene N N X Sodium sulfite X X X

Phenol N N X Steam (up to 40psi) N N

Phosphoric acid X — X Stearic acid X — X

Phthalic acid X X X Sulfur chloride N X

Chemical Nor Sil Vit Chemical Nor Sil Vit
28

Smart Sipper

426 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Pump Tubing Specifications

Pump Specifications

Specifications

Pump Tubing Specifications

Plating solutions X N X Sulfur dioxide X — X

Polyglycol Sulfur hexafluoride — N

Potassium carbonate X X Sulfur trioxide X — X

Potassium chlorate X X Sulfuric acid (dil) X N X

Potassium hydroxide (med) — Z Sulfuric acid (med) X N X

Potassium hydroxide (conc) — X Sulfuric acid (conc) — N X

Potassium iodide X X Tannic acid X — X

Pyridine X N N Tanning extracts X X

Silicone fluids — X Tartaric acid — X

Silicone oil — Z Tetrachloroethane N N

Silver nitrate X X X Tetrahydrofuran N N

Soap solutions X X X Tin salts

Sodium bicarbonate X X X Titanium salts

Sodium bisulfate X X Toluene N N X

Sodium bisulfite X X X Trichloroaecetic acid N

Trichloroethylene X Vinyl plastisol —

Trichlorofluoroethane N N Water X X X

Trisodium phosphate X X Water (brine) X X X

Turpentine X N X Xylene N N X

Urea X X X Zinc chloride X X

Uric acid X

Chemical Nor Sil Vit Chemical Nor Sil Vit

Note Tubing that is too tight will cause excessive pump strain and wear. Tubing that is too 

loose will decrease pumping efficiency.
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 427

Related Topics

Pump Tubing Chemical Compatibility

Pump Specifications

Specifications

Pump Specifications

Related Topics

Pump Tubing Chemical Compatibility

Pump Tubing Specifications

Specifications

Pump Tubing Specifications

Maximum outer diameter 5.08 mm (0.200 in)

Minimum outer diameter 2.54 mm (0.100 in)

Inner diameter 1.65 mm ±0.127 mm (0.065 in ±0.005 in)

Wall thickness 0.89 mm ±0.07 mm (0.035 in ±0.003 in)

Volume repeatability ±5% for all pump times >3 sec

Pump Specifications

Setting Speed (rpm) Flow Rate (ml/min)

Slow 60 8.0

Medium 105 14.0

Fast 150 20.0

Pump time (seconds) Variable: 0.0 to 999.0

Purge time (seconds) Variable: 0.0 to 999.0

Auto function Purge, Return, Off

Setting time (seconds) Variable: 0.0 to 999.0

Number of rinses Variable: 0 to 4
28

Smart Sipper

428 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Pump does not 

operate

The accessory is not 

installed properly or 

the wrong pump 

tubing is used. 

Remove and reinstall the accessory, install the 

Sipper front panel and connect the data cable. See 

Installation.

Ensure the pump tubing is the correct diameter 

and material. See Pump Tubing Specifications

and Pump Tubing Chemical Compatibility.

Pump does not 

draw

Pump tubing is 

crimped or damaged

Check the entire pumping system for damage or 

excessive wear and replace sections as necessary. 

See Installing Pump Tubing and Installing a Flow 

Cell.

To prevent crimping, remove pump tubing before 

storing the accessory. When the pump is idle, 

leave the instrument and accessory powered on 

and some liquid in the sample intake container. 

The accessory periodically “sips” a small volume 

to redistribute the pressure on the tubing.

Ensure the tubing is compatible with your sample 

material. Many factors (temperature, length of 

service, chemical concentration, etc.) can affect 

chemical resistance; test the tubing under your 

conditions. See Pump Tubing Chemical 

Compatibility.

Rinse flow cells and tubing thoroughly after use. 

See Cleaning Flow Cells.

Noise peaks in 

the spectral data 

or inconsistent 

results

There are air bubbles 

in the flow cell

Inspect the flow cell for bubbles, which diffract 

the light so less energy is passed to the detector. 

To prevent air bubbles from entering the cell, use 

sufficient volume so the sample material fills at 

least 8 cm of the inlet tube in front of the flow 

cell. (Use an air gap if the sample material is 

limited.) See Operation.

To remove air bubbles adhering to flow cell walls 

(occurs frequently with biological materials), 

remove the cell and soak it in a recommended 

detergent. See Cleaning Flow Cells. When 

finished, reconnect the cell and flush it 

thoroughly with laboratory grade purified water.
28 

Smart Sipper

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 429

Related Topics

Safety Considerations

Operating Precautions

Installation

Calibration

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications
28

Smart Sipper

430 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
29 

Temperature Probe

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 431

Temperature Probe

The Temperature Probe allows measurements with the following specifications:

• Range: 0 °C to 100 °C

• Accuracy: ±0.5 °C + 0.2% of the temperature reading

The kit includes a probe, two Teflon® stoppers, a multi-channel USB interface and a software 

driver. The probe has a 304 stainless-steel tip that resists many chemicals. A square stopper 

accommodates standard 10 mm pathlength rectangular cuvettes with square lids, and a round 

one fits cuvettes with stoppers.

Related Topics

Accessories

Operating Precautions

Handle the accessory carefully:

• Do not allow moisture to leak into the accessory.

• Allow liquid to contact only the narrow measurement tip; do not submerge the probe.

• Wipe off spilled chemicals immediately.

Contents

• Operating Precautions

• Installation

• Operation

• Maintenance

• Troubleshooting

Probe

Stoppers

USB interface
29

Temperature Probe

432 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

• Do not drop the accessory.

• Protect the accessory from mechanical shock.

• Do not bend the probe tip.

Related Topics

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Installation

The interface box can be connected to any USB port on the instrument or remote computer. 

Probes are routed behind the tubing access panel and into the sample compartment.

Y To connect the temperature probe

1. Remove the tubing access panel. See Tubing Access Panel.

2. Connect the interface box cable to a standard USB port on the spectrophotometer.

If the spectrophotometer is set up for computer control, the cable also connects to any 

USB port on the remote computer.

3. Install a cell holder or changer that accommodates cuvettes that are compatible with the 

temperature probe.

4. Install a cuvette in the cell holder or changer.

5. Insert the probe into an appropriate stopper (round or square, depending on the selected 

cuvette).

Note Install the driver for the temperature probe on the system computer (local or 

remote) to enable the probe features in INSIGHT software. If using a Local Control 

instrument that has an optional remote computer, install the driver on both computers 

and connect the interface box to the active computer.

NOTICE Do not force the probe into the stopper.
29 

Temperature Probe

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 433

a. Loosen the screw on the stopper base.

b. Align the probe tip with the central hole in the stopper and gently push the probe 

into the stopper as far as it will go.

Ensure the probe tip extends about 2 mm beyond the stopper.

c. Tighten the screw on the stopper base.

6. Route the probe cable into the sample compartment and out the tubing access 

compartment. (Push it through the slit in the foam panel.)

7. Insert the probe connector into an open port on the interface box.

8. Fill the cuvette with the sample or reference solution.

Use sufficient volume to wet the probe tip when installed, but do not overfill the cell. The 

probe will displace a small amount of liquid.

9. Insert the probe and stopper into the cuvette.

Ensure the probe extends at least 2 mm below the surface of the liquid but not so deep 

that it blocks the light beam.

Ensure the cable does not obstruct the light beam, especially when using probes with a 

cell changer (move the changer through all positions).

10. Set the software parameters to display the probe status monitor and record sample 

temperature. See Operation.

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Operation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Operation

Stopper Probe tip

Contents
29

Temperature Probe

434 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Installation

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Temperature Settings

In the selected application, use Settings > Accessories > Temperature to display the available 

settings for a temperature probe or controller. The Temperature features appear only when the 

driver for a temperature probe or controller is installed.

Related Topics

Configuring a Target Temperature

Displaying a Temperature Status Monitor

• Temperature Settings

• Configuring a Target Temperature

• Displaying a Temperature Status Monitor

Feature Description

Record temperature with measurementIf a temperature probe is used, records the temperature of 

the sample after each measurement. Temperature readings 

are stored in the sample properties.

Use temperature controller If a Peltier cell holder or changer is used, defines a setpoint 

temperature for the cell block and a stir speed if desired. 

The available settings depend on the specifications for the 

temperature-controlled accessory.

Start measurements at target 

temperature

Starts the measurement when the sample (requires a temperature probe) or cell block (requires a Peltier cell holder 

or changer) reaches a specified temperature.

Match probes to cell changer 

positions

If a temperature probe is used, maps probe channels 1 

through 8 with up to eight cell changer positions. Useful 

only when using an automatic cell changer with multiple 

temperature probes.

Deselect this to always record the temperature of probe 1.
29 

Temperature Probe

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 435

Operation

Configuring a Target Temperature

Y To configure a target temperature

1. Select Start measurement at target temperature.

2. Enter the Target temperature and Tolerance in °C.

• For a temperature probe. 

To start the measurement when the probe reaches the target temperature, set Start on

to Probe temperature and then select the Probe channel. The number of channels 

in the list box will match the available ports on the temperature probe interface box.

The probe channel, current temperature and target range appear during the 

measurement.

• For a temperature-controlled accessory. 

To start the measurement when the cell block reaches the target temperature, set 

Start on to Block temperature.

Only the current temperature and target range appear during the measurement.

The Start button is disabled since the measurement is configured to start automatically at 

the target temperature.

3. To allow time for equilibration, select Wait for equilibration and enter the duration.

The remaining equilibration time is displayed during the measurement.
29

Temperature Probe

436 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

If the temperature moves outside the target range, the countdown resets when the 

temperature is again within range.

The Start button becomes active when the temperature remains in the target range for the 

entire equilibration period.

4. To start the measurement automatically after equilibration, select Start measurement 

after equilibration. This disables the Start button in the status dialog box. The 

measurement starts automatically when the temperature remains in the target range 

during the entire equilibration period.

Related Topics

Temperature Settings

Displaying a Temperature Status Monitor

Operation

Displaying a Temperature Status Monitor

The INSIGHT software can be configured to display a temperature status monitor for each 

installed probe.

Y To display a temperature probe status monitor

1. Click the Configure button above the data display for the selected application. See 

“Instrument Status Monitors” for more information.

A dialog box lists the available status monitors.

2. Select the Temperature status option that matches the probe channel and click OK.

The status monitor appears above the data display. Here is an example.

Note Temperature options appear only when a software driver for the temperature 

probe is installed.
29 

Temperature Probe

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 437

3. To edit the probe name or channel, double-click the probe status monitor. A dialog box 

appears.

Enter a name in the Description box, select the Channel and click OK.

Related Topics

Instrument Status Monitors

Temperature Settings

Configuring a Target Temperature

Operation

Maintenance

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Troubleshooting

Contents

• Routine Maintenance

• Cleaning Temperature Probes

• Replacing Stopper O-Rings
29

Temperature Probe

438 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Routine Maintenance

• Clean probes immediately after each measurement and before storing them. See Cleaning 

Temperature Probes.

• Check stopper O-rings regularly for wear and replace them when necessary. See Replacing 

Stopper O-Rings.

Related Topics

Cleaning Temperature Probes

Replacing Stopper O-Rings

Maintenance

Cleaning Temperature Probes

Clean temperature probes frequently to avoid contaminating subsequent samples. Wipe off 

spilled chemicals immediately.

To clean a probe, rinse the tip with water and then with methanol or isopropyl alcohol and air 

dry.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Replacing Stopper O-Rings

Maintenance

Replacing Stopper O-Rings

Check stopper gaskets and O-rings regularly for wear and replace them when necessary. The 

square stopper has two gaskets and internal O-ring. The round stopper has an internal 

O-ring.

A 4 mm screw (at least 3 mm long) is required to remove the liner that supports the internal 

O-ring.

Y To replace the internal O-ring (round or square stopper)

1. Insert the 4 mm screw several turns into the stopper base, and use it to pull the liner out 

of the base (leave the screw in the liner).

Note Use of the temperature probe with corrosive samples or extreme temperatures can 

cause O-rings to break down faster.
29 

Temperature Probe

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 439

2. Use tweezers or a pointed tool to remove the small O-ring from the end of the liner.

3. Press the new O-ring fully into the liner.

The O-ring must remain in place when you turn the liner upside down.

4. Use the screw to insert the liner back into the stopper (press to secure the O-ring).

5. Remove the screw from the liner.

Y To replace the gaskets on the square stopper

1. Use tweezers or a pointed tool to remove the gaskets.

2. Stretch each new gasket onto the stopper and press it into the groove.

Related Topics

Routine Maintenance

Cleaning Temperature Probes

Maintenance

Screw

Liner

O-ring

Gaskets
29

Temperature Probe

440 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Troubleshooting

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation

Maintenance

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Temperature readings do not 

match expected values.

The probe is soiled or 

damaged, or there is not 

enough liquid in the cuvette.

Clean and reseat the probe in 

the cuvette ensuring at least 

2 mm of the probe tip 

extends below the sample 

surface. If performance is still 

unacceptable, replace the 

probe.

The temperature of the 

sample or reference solution 

(as measured by the probe) 

does not match the 

temperature of the external 

fluid recirculator.

Sample temperature is 

affected by the:

• type of cell used for the 

measurement

• length of the recirculator 

tubing

• degree of insulation 

around the tubing

• difference between the 

recirculator set 

temperature and the 

ambient temperature.

Set the external recirculator 

temperature slightly higher 

than the target temperature 

for the measurement (or 

apply a correction factor if 

your recirculator offers that 

feature).

When using multiple 

thermostatted accessories 

with a common recirculator, 

it may be necessary to 

increase the Tolerance setting 

in the software to account for 

the temperature differential 

between the heated 

components.
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 441

30

Variable Angle Transmission

For Local Control instruments:

D://2612_HARRICK_Var Angle Trans Accy_UG.pdfFor Computer Control instruments:

C://2612_HARRICK_Var Angle Trans Accy_UG.pdfIf these links do not work, see your 

documentation CD.

Related Topics

Installing a Manual Accessory

Accessories
30

442 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 443

31

VERSA Probe

The VERSA fiber optic probe uses a standard SMA connector and disposable quartz tips. The 

probe is compatible with measurements between 200 and 1100 nm at temperatures up to 

125 °C. Quartz tips are available with a pathlength of 10 mm or 20 mm.

Related Topics

Integrated Fiber Optic Module

Probe Handling and Maintenance

Accessories

Operating Precautions

Fiber Optic Probes

Handle probes carefully:

• Do not allow hard materials (glass, metal, ceramic, etc.) to contact the probe’s optical 

surfaces.

• Do not drop the probe or knock it against a hard surface.

• Do not subject the probe to rapid or excessive changes in temperature.

Contents

• Operating Precautions

• Installation

• Operation

• Routine Maintenance

Quartz tip

VERSA probe
31

VERSA Probe

444 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

• Wipe off spilled chemicals immediately.

Fiber Optic Cables

Handle fiber optic cables gently and follow these precautions:

• Do not drop the cables or knock them against a hard surface.

• Do not bend the cables or tightly coil them.

• Do not touch the end of a fiber optic cable connector.

• Do not overtighten or use tools to tighten the connectors when attaching the cables to the 

ports.

• Avoid twisting the cables when attaching them to the connectors.

• Keep a protective cap on each end of the cable when not in use.

Related Topics

Installation

Operation

Routine Maintenance

Installation

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Operation

Routine Maintenance

Installing the VERSA Probe

Install the Integrated Fiber Optic Module before installing a probe.

Contents

• Installing the VERSA Probe

• Installing Tips
31 

VERSA Probe

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 445

Languages

To install a probe, follow instructions for your instrument. See Attaching Cables and Probes

in Integrated Fiber Optic Module.

If the probe has a remote start cable, plug the connector into the Trigger port on the 

spectrophotometer. See Connectors.

Related Topics

Installing Tips

WARNING Avoid UV radiation hazard. Do not stare at the beam or light leaving a 

coupled fiber optic cable.

AVERTISSEMENT Évitez l'exposition au rayonnements UV. Ne regardez jamais le 

faisceau de lumière qui sort d’une fibre optique couplé.

WARNUNG Gefahren durch UV-Strahlung sind zu vermeiden. Nicht in den Strahl 

eines gekoppelten Glasfaserkabels blicken.

AVVERTENZA Evitare il rischio di radiazioni UV.Non fissare il raggio di luce che esce 

dal cavo a fibre ottiche accoppiato.

ADVERTENCIA Evite el riesgo de radiación ultravioleta.No mire al rayo luminoso que 

sale de un cable de fibra óptica acoplado.

WARNING 

NOTICE When attaching fiber optic cables to the accessory ports, avoid:

• Twisting or bending the cable.

• Touching the ends with your fingers.

• Overtightening or using tools to tighten the connectors.
31

VERSA Probe

446 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Installation

Installing Tips

Tips must be installed to take measurements.

Y To install a tip

1. Slide a quartz tip onto the probe shaft.

2. Align the notch at the base of the tip with the pin on the probe handle.

3. Press and hold the release button and slide the notch under the pin.

4. Release the button.

Verify the tip is secure by touching the middle portion of the tip and gently attempting to 

slide it. If the tip is secure, it will not move.

Y To remove the tip

Press the release button.

Related Topics

Installing the VERSA Probe

Installation

Operation

Install a tip before using the probe. See Installing Tips.

When inserting the probe into a solution, shake the probe gently to release any air bubbles 

trapped in the probe tip.

Pin

Notch

Release button Shaft

Quartz tip
31 

VERSA Probe

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 447

To improve the signal-to-noise ratio, try using slower scan speeds and longer integration 

times.

Languages

Y To use the VERSA probe

1. Insert the probe into the baseline solution and collect a baseline or zero measurement.

WARNING Avoid UV radiation hazard. Do not stare at the beam or light leaving a 

coupled fiber optic cable.

AVERTISSEMENT Évitez l'exposition au rayonnements UV. Ne regardez jamais le 

faisceau de lumière qui sort d’une fibre optique couplé.

WARNUNG Gefahren durch UV-Strahlung sind zu vermeiden. Nicht in den Strahl eines 

gekoppelten Glasfaserkabels blicken.

AVVERTENZA Evitare il rischio di radiazioni UV.Non fissare il raggio di luce che esce dal 

cavo a fibre ottiche accoppiato.

ADVERTENCIA Evite el riesgo de radiación ultravioleta.No mire al rayo luminoso que sale 

de un cable de fibra óptica acoplado.

WARNING 
31

VERSA Probe

448 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

2. When finished collecting a baseline, dry the tip and insert the probe into the sample.

3. When finished measuring a sample, discard the tip or clean it before making additional 

measurements.

Related Topics

Operating Precautions

Installation

Routine Maintenance
31 

VERSA Probe

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 449

Routine Maintenance

Follow these guidelines:

• Clean the probe immediately after each measurement and before storing it. See Cleaning 

Probes.

• Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for probe maintenance.

Related Topics

Cleaning Probes

Troubleshooting

Operating Precautions

Installation

Operation
31

VERSA Probe

450 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 451

32

Performance Verification

Overview of PV

Contents

• Overview of PV

• PV Test Descriptions

• Running PV Tests

Use Performance Verification to set up and run tests to 

check the performance of the instrument. Click here for 

information on running the tests. Test results are 

displayed in reports that are saved automatically and can 

be opened later (see My Data).
32 Performance Verification

PV Test Descriptions

452 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

PV Test Descriptions

Test Description

Wavelength Accuracy (Hg lamp) Locates the peaks from the external Mercury Lamp 

Calibration accessory and displays their measured and 

allowed range of wavelengths. A mercury lamp has 

strong, fundamental lines throughout the UV-visible 

range. These emission lines are a property of the lamp 

and serve as a fundamental wavelength standard that 

does not require calibration. The wavelengths and 

tolerance values cannot be changed. Use an empty cell 

holder and install the mercury lamp accessory properly 

in the instrument.

Wavelength Reproducibility (Hg 

lamp)

Measures the ability of the spectrophotometer to return 

to an identical wavelength in a repeatable manner. The 

test uses the external mercury lamp, which has a strong, 

fundamental line near 546 nm. This emission line is an 

intrinsic property of the lamp and serves as a 

fundamental wavelength standard that does not require 

calibration. The wavelength and tolerance values cannot 

be changed. Use an empty cell holder and install the 

Mercury Lamp Calibration accessory properly in the 

instrument.

Wavelength Accuracy (Xe lamp) Locates the peak near 542 nm of the internal xenon 

lamp and displays the measured and allowed range of 

wavelengths. A xenon lamp has strong, fundamental 

lines throughout the UV-visible range. These are an 

intrinsic property of the lamp and serve as a 

fundamental wavelength standard that does not require 

calibration. The wavelength and tolerance values cannot 

be changed. Use an empty cell holder.

Wavelength Reproducibility (Xe 

lamp)

Measures the ability of the spectrophotometer to return 

to an identical wavelength in a repeatable manner. The 

test uses the internal xenon lamp, which has a strong, 

fundamental emission line near 542 nm. This line is a 

property of the lamp and serves as a fundamental 

wavelength standard that does not require calibration. 

The wavelength and tolerance values cannot be changed. 

Use an empty cell holder.
32 Performance Verification

PV Test Descriptions

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 453

Wavelength Accuracy (Holmium 

oxide liquid)

Locates the peaks of a holmium oxide standard and 

displays their measured and allowed range of 

wavelengths. A holmium oxide solution prepared in 

dilute perchloric acid has well defined absorption peaks 

throughout the UV-visible range. These peaks are a 

property of the material and serve as a wavelength 

standard. The wavelengths and tolerance values are 

cannot be changed.

Wavelength Reproducibility 

(Holmium oxide liquid)

Measures the ability of the spectrophotometer to return 

to an identical wavelength in a repeatable manner using 

a holmium oxide standard. A holmium oxide solution 

prepared in dilute perchloric acid has well defined 

absorption peaks throughout the UV-visible range. 

These peaks are a property of the material and serve as a 

wavelength standard. The wavelengths and tolerance 

values are cannot be changed.

Photometric Accuracy 

(Customized)

Automates the comparison of measured absorbance (or 

%T) of photometric accuracy standards with their 

certified values. Use Photometric Accuracy standards 

calibrated to known absorbance values at specified 

wavelengths. If a custom standard is being used instead 

of a CVC, enter its wavelength, absorbance and 

tolerance values in the boxes to the right.

Resolution (Toluene/Hexane) Measures the ability of the spectrophotometer to resolve 

adjacent features in a spectrum. Use a 0.02% (v/v) 

solution of toluene in hexane and a hexane blank. The 

wavelengths and tolerance values cannot be changed.

Stray Light (KCl, 198 nm), Stray 

Light (KI, 220 nm), Stray Light 

(NaI, 220 nm), and Stray Light 

(NaNO2, 340 nm)

Compare measured stray light at the indicated 

wavelength with the allowed range of values. Use the 

Stray Light standard designed to measure stray light at 

the indicated wavelength.

Photometric Noise: 0A 

(260 nm), Photometric Noise: 

1A (260 nm), and Photometric 

Noise: 2A (260 nm)

Measure the amount of noise at 260 nm. For 

Photometric Noise: 0A (260 nm), use an empty cell 

holder. For the latter two tests, use a 1A and 2A 

metal-on-quartz filters suitable for the UV region for 

these tests.

Baseline Flatness (Abs, 

800-200 nm)

Measures the flatness of a baseline scan over the region 

800 nm to 200 nm with smoothing applied to the data. 

Use an empty cell holder.

Photometric Drift Measures the absorbance drift of the instrument over a 

one-hour period. Use an empty cell holder and let the 

instrument warm up fully before initiating this test.

Test Description
32 Performance Verification

Running PV Tests

454 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Related Topics

Overview of PV

Running PV Tests

Running PV Tests

Y To run PV tests

1. Click Performance Verification in the right pane in Home.

The available tests appear in the right pane.

2. Select the tests to run.

To select or deselect all the listed tests, double-click Run above the column of check 

boxes.

3. For selected tests that require it, enter information such as wavelength, value and 

tolerance in the provided boxes.

Heed the following precaution if using an accessory:

Languages

Note Select the Classic group in Home if Performance Verification is not available 

for the current group.

Note The CVC performance tests appear only when a CVC is properly installed and 

a valid calibration file has been loaded. See Calibrated Validation Carousel (CVC) for 

instructions. The available tests depend on the type of CVC installed.

Note Tests that require the Mercury Lamp Calibration accessory can be selected only 

after the accessory has been properly connected and installed in the instrument.

CAUTION Avoid pinch hazard. Keep hands and objects clear of the accessory during 

operation.

ATTENTION Évitez tout risque de pincement. Gardez vos mains, ainsi que tout objet, à 

l’écart de l’accessoire pendant l’initialisation.
32 Performance Verification

Running PV Tests

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 455

4. Click Run.

5. Follow the instructions that appear.

To end the tests before they are finished, click Stop. Alternatively, click Cancel when a 

prompt appears during a test.

The test results appear in a window from which they can be printed or copied. A 

signature block appears at the end.

Completed PV reports are saved automatically and appear on the PV Reports tab in My 

Data. See My Data for instructions for viewing results later.

6. Click Close.

Related Topics

Overview of PV

PV Test Descriptions

VORSICHT Quetschungen sind zu vermeiden. Hände und Objekte sind während der 

Initialisierung vom Zubehör fern zu halten.

CAUTELA Evitare il rischio di pizzicamento. Tenere mani e oggetti lontano dall’accessorio 

durante l’inizializzazione.

PRECAUCIÓN Evite riesgos de atrapamiento. Mantenga manos y objetos lejos del alcance 

del accesorio durante la inicialización.
32 Performance Verification

Running PV Tests

456 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 457

33

INSIGHT Security Software

Optional INSIGHT Security software adds features for digitally signing files and verifying 

digital signatures, as explained in this Help system.

INSIGHT Security software, together with Thermo Security Administration software, also 

lets the system administrator set system policies and control user access to INSIGHT software 

features. See Access Control and System Policies for complete information.

To see information about the signature status of the current workbook, click any of these 

icons.

If INSIGHT Security software is installed...

• The root directory for template groups shown on the Preference tab in Options is set 

using Thermo Security Administration.

• A Sign button appears in the Performance Verification report window. Use it to sign the 

displayed report.

Related Topics

Signing a File

Verifying a Signature

This icon at the bottom of the INSIGHT window indicates that the current 

workbook is signed.

This icon indicates that current workbook has not been signed since it was last 

changed.

This icon indicates that current workbook has not been saved (or signed).
33 INSIGHT Security Software

Signing a File

458 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Signing a File

If INSIGHT Security software is installed, use the following procedures to digitally sign 

workbook and template files. The visible portion of a digital signature consists of a user name, 

a date and a stated reason for signing. A digital signature also contains encrypted information 

used to detect whether the file has changed since it was signed.

Y To sign the open workbook

1. Choose Security (menu) > Sign > Active Workbook.

2. Enter a password.

3. Select a signature reason (if permitted).

4. Choose OK.

A verification message appears.

5. Choose OK.

Y To sign a saved workbook

1. Choose Security (menu) > Sign > Workbook File.

2. Locate and select the desired file and then click Open.

3. Enter a password.

4. Select a signature reason (if permitted).

5. Choose OK.

A verification message appears.

6. Choose OK.

Y To sign a saved template

1. Choose Security (menu) > Sign > Template File.

2. Locate and select the desired file and then click Open.

3. Enter a password.

4. Select a signature reason (if permitted).

5. Choose OK.

A verification message appears.

6. Choose OK.
33 INSIGHT Security Software

Verifying a Signature

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 459

Related Topics

INSIGHT Security Software

Verifying a Signature

Verifying a Signature

If INSIGHT Security software is installed, use the following procedures to verify digital 

signatures for workbook and template files.

Y To verify the signature for a workbook

1. Choose Security (menu) > Verify Signature > Workbook File.

2. Locate and select the desired file and then click Open.

A verification message appears.

3. Choose OK.

Y To verify the signature for a template

1. Choose Security (menu) > Verify Signature > Template File.

2. Locate and select the desired file and then click Open.

A verification message appears.

3. Choose OK.

Related Topics

INSIGHT Security Software

Signing a File

Access Control and System Policies

The Access Control features and System Policies described below are available in Security 

Administration for INSIGHT software when INSIGHT Security software is installed.

Use the Access Control features to set the rights of individual users or groups of users to use 

the protected features of INSIGHT software (the features included in the security database). 

A protected feature will be available only if the logged-in user has the right to use it.

See “Controlling access to client application features” in the “Using Security Administration” 

chapter of the Security Administration User’s Guide for instructions for using the Access 

Control features. See “Setting system policies for the client application” in that chapter for 

instructions for using the System Policies features.
33 INSIGHT Security Software

Access Control and System Policies

460 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

After specifying access control and setting the policies, save the settings in the security 

database. See “Saving your security policy settings” in the “Using Security Administration” 

chapter of the Security Administration User’s Guide for details.

Feature Description

Ability to tun INSIGHT Specifies which users can run INSIGHT software. (See 

“Controlling access to client application features” in the 

“Using Security Administration” chapter of the Security 

Administration User’s Guide for general instructions.) If a user 

has not been granted the ability to run the software, an error 

message appears when the user attempts to start it.

Ability to delete workbooks Specifies which users can delete workbook files with the 

Delete button in My Data.

Ability to delete PV reports Specifies which users can delete Performance Verification 

reports with the Delete button in My Data.

Ability to delete templates Specifies which users can delete template files with the Delete 

button in My Data.

Ability to delete Scan 

samples

Specifies which users can delete Scan sample data files from 

the current workbook by right-clicking a sample in the results 

table in Measure Scan and choosing Remove.

Ability to edit templates Specifies which users can set parameters in Settings.

Ability to configure reports Specifies which users can change settings in Reports.

Ability to perform PV tests Specifies which users can run Performance Verification tests.

Ability to perform 

wavelength calibration

Specifies which users can use the Wavelength Calibration 

buttons on the Calibrations tab in System Settings.

Ability to calibrate Sipper Specifies which users can use the Sipper Calibrate button on 

the Calibrations tab in System Settings.

Ability to calibrate Linear 

Cell Changer

Specifies which users can use the Linear Cell Changer 

Calibrate button on the Calibrations tab in System Settings.

Ability to update CVC 

calibration

Specifies which users can use the Load CVC Calibration 

button in Performance Verification.

Ability to select CVC tests 

to perform in PV

Specifies which users can select listed tests for the CVC in 

Performance Verification.

Math menu Specifies which users can use the commands in the Math 

menu.

Analyze menu Specifies which users can use the commands in the Analyze 

menu.

Ability to set Rate 

parameters

Specifies which users can set parameters in Settings for the 

Rate application.
33 INSIGHT Security Software

Access Control and System Policies

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 461

Options tabs Specifies which users can change settings on the tabs in 

Options.

System Settings tabs Specifies which users can change settings on the tabs in 

System Settings.

Authenticate on startup Requires users in the specified policy groups to enter a valid 

name and password when starting INSIGHT software.

Prevent overwriting of files Ensures that existing files are not overwritten when users in 

the specified policy groups save workbook or template files.

If a user for whom this policy is selected attempts to save a file 

using the same file name as an existing file, a message says the 

file cannot be overwritten. The user can choose OK to close 

the message and then save the file using a different file name.

If a user saves a file while this policy is selected, the file will be 

set to read-only in its properties. In the future, users will not 

be able to overwrite this file, even when this policy is not 

selected.

Prevent delete, rename and 

right-click in file dialog 

boxes

Prevents users in the specified policy groups from performing 

these operations in file dialog boxes:

• Deleting a file by selecting it and pressing the Delete key 

on the keyboard.

• Renaming a file by selecting its name (by slowly clicking 

the name twice) and typing a new name.

• Displaying a shortcut menu by right-clicking a file. 

Normally a menu displayed this way lets the user perform 

operations such as copying, deleting or renaming the file.

This policy can be used in conjunction with the Prevent 

changing directories when saving files policy (see below) to 

achieve the desired type of control over file operations for each 

user.

Prevent printing unsaved 

data

Prevents users in the specified policy groups from printing 

spectral data that has not been saved.

Prevent changing 

directories when saving files

Prevents users in the specified policy groups from changing 

directories (“browsing”) when saving files.

Feature Description
33 INSIGHT Security Software

Access Control and System Policies

462 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Prevent signature reason 

entry when signing files

Prevents users in the specified policy groups from entering a 

custom signature meaning when signing a file.

When this policy is selected, only the standard signature 

meanings are available for the affected users.

When this policy is not selected, the prompt requesting a 

signature lets the user type a meaning in the Reason For 

Signature text box.

Require signature when 

saving workbook files

Requires users in the specified policy groups to provide a 

digital signature when saving workbooks with Save Workbook 

or Save As Workbook in the File menu. If this policy is not 

selected, users in the specified policy group must use Security 

(menu) > Sign > Active Workbook or Workbook File to sign a 

workbook after it has been saved.

Require signature when 

saving template files

Requires users in the specified policy groups to provide a 

digital signature when saving templates with Save Workbook 

Settings as Template in the File menu. If this policy is not 

selected, users in the specified policy group must use Security 

(menu) > Sign > Template File to sign a workbook after it has 

been saved.

Require signature when 

saving PV results

Requires users in the specified policy groups to provide a 

digital signature when saving Performance Verification results.

Directory for workbooks Designates for each policy group a directory for saving 

workbooks with Save Workbook or Save As Workbook in the 

File menu.

Directory for templates Designates for each policy group a directory for saving 

templates with Save Workbook Settings as Template in the 

File menu.

Feature Description
33 INSIGHT Security Software

Assigning Signature Meanings

Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 463

Assigning Signature Meanings

Use the Signature Meanings features of Security Administration to specify the meanings that 

will be available for electronic signatures supplied by specified users. For example, the 

Signature Meanings features can be set so that only a particular user—for instance, the lab 

manager—is allowed to sign a file with the “Approval” meaning.

The default list of signature meanings appears when the Signature Meanings icon for 

“INSIGHT” is clicked in the navigation pane the first time Security Administration is run. If 

changes have been made to the list, the available meanings in INSIGHT software may be 

different. See “Assigning signature meanings” in the “Using Security Administration” chapter 

of the Security Administration User’s Guide for general instructions for using the Signature 

Meanings features to change the available meanings or to specify which users can select each 

meaning when signing a file.

Use the signature meanings in the default list as follows.

Directory for PV reports Designates for each policy group a directory for automatically 

saving Performance Verification reports.

Allow access only to listed 

button groups (blank field 

allows access to all groups)

Specifies the INSIGHT software user groups that are available 

to users in the specified policy group. Selecting a user group in 

Home displays the application buttons for that group. See 

Applications Tab for more information.

Type the desired user groups in the text box in the Description 

box, with a comma and a space between them; for example:

Classic, Quality Control

In this example, these users would have access to the 

applications for the Classic group (Fixed, Scan, Quant, Rate, 

Bio Applications and Performance Verification) and the 

applications for the Quality Control group.

Leave the text box blank to give users in the specified policy 

group access to all applications.

Feature Description

Note Users can be allowed to enter custom signature meanings. See “Prevent signature 

reason entry when signing files” in Access Control and System Policies.
33 INSIGHT Security Software

Assigning Signature Meanings

464 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Signature Meaning Description

Authorship - signifies ownership Indicates that the user signing the file is the person who 

created it.

Approval - the record is 

approved for use

Indicates that the user signing the file has approved it for 

use.

Reviewed - record contents have 

been reviewed

Indicates that the user signing the file has reviewed it.

Revision - the record has been 

revised

Indicates that the user signing the file has changed it.
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 465

I

Numerics

15 Degree Specular Reflectance accessory 239

20 Degree Specular Reflectance accessory 241

30 Degree Specular Reflectance accessory 243

45 Degree Specular Reflectance accessory 245

60 Degree Specular Reflectance accessory 247

8 Degree NN Specular Reflectance accessory 237

A

access control 457, 459

access cover

instrument detector 114

mercury lamp 114

sample compartment 112

tubing 112

accessories

aligning 99

parameters 44, 50, 66, 71, 144, 155, 166, 175, 185, 196, 207, 

218

standard 118

status 23

tubing connectors 113

Accessories tab

cell changer settings 360, 400

Fixed 44

Nucleic Acid 144

Nucleic Acid Labels 155

Peltier Single Cell Holder settings 322

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay 218

Pierce BCA 185

Pierce Modified Lowry 207

Protein A280 166

Protein Biuret 229

Protein Bradford 196

Proteins & Labels 175

Quant 66

Rate 71

Scan 50

Smart Sipper settings 418

Temperature Probe settings 434

accessories, manual

installing 120

removing 121

accessories, Smart

installing 121

removing 124

accessories, thermostatted

installing 124

accessory

diffuse reflectance 271

near normal specular reflectance 237

specular reflectance 239, 241, 243, 245, 247

transmission 441

AccuVac vial sample holder 348

acid-compatible tubing pack 407

acids

precautions with nanoCell 287

acoustic alarm 308

acquiring data 24–25, 31, 146, 157, 167, 176, 187, 197, 208, 

220, 230

action buttons 13

adapter

for 15 mm z-height instruments and nanoCell 283

tubing 113, 125, 291

adapters

for connecting tubing 113

Add 82

adding

constant to spectrum 89

group 96

spectra 82

advanced equations for Quant 98

AFBG option, Bandwidth setting 266

air bubbles

and Smart Sipper sampling 418

and VERSA Probe sampling 446

air, for instrument purge 117

alarm

acoustic 308

water level 301, 309

Index
466 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: B

aligning

accessory 99

detector module 134

Fiber Optic Module 268

single cell holder 119

Alignment tab 99

Analyze menu 21, 88–89

annotation 15

antistatic wipes, for cleaning touchscreen 132

application 9

action buttons 13

associating with group 96

data display 15

Fixed 9, 42

Nucleic Acid 138

Nucleic Acid Labels 150

parameters 41

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay 212

Pierce Modified Lowry 201

Protein A280 160

Protein Bradford 190

Proteins & Labels 169

Quant 10, 25

Rate 10, 68

sample measurement 24

Scan 10, 46

task buttons 12

application buttons 14

Application Focused Beam Geometry option

Bandwidth setting 266

applications

life science 137

Applications tab 96

area

peak 38

arithmetic operations for Quant equations 58

Auto Trigger 97

Average 88

averaging

concentration 67, 144, 155, 166, 175, 185, 196, 207, 218, 229

spectra 88

axis

attributes 15

B

background 42, 46

backing up

CVC calibration data 252

bandwidth 42, 46, 65, 70, 143, 154, 165, 174, 184, 195, 206, 

217, 228

Bandwidth setting

and AFBG option 266

for fiber optic sampling 267

bandwidth test

with Hg Lamp 275

baseline

correcting 48

flatness 452

measuring with nanoCell 280

Baseline button 13

baseline scan

initiating from instrument keypad 130

bases, precautions with nanoCell 287

beam height

adapter for nanoCell 283

cell holder for 15 mm 343

spectrophotometer 107

beam path

nanoCell 281

block temperature

for Peltier Single Cell Holder 323

boot record

System tab 101

bubbles

and Smart Sipper sampling 418

and VERSA Probe sampling 446

button

Enter 130

Function 130

Power 130

Run 130

Stop 130

Zero/Base 130

C

cable

connecting fiber optic detector 265

fiber optic test 263

precaution for connecting detector 133

remote start 445

routing to sample compartment 113, 116

shielding USB 110

unplugging Hg lamp 277

cables, fiber optic

attaching 266

test 263

calibrated pipette

and nanoCell 285

calibrated standard 48

Calibrated Validation Carousel 249

calibrating

instrument wavelength 100

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 358
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 467

Index: C

Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 380

Smart Sipper 415

wavelength with Hg Lamp 277

calibration

wavelength 275

when to calibrate wavelength 277

calibration data

loading CVC 252

Calibrations tab 100

carousel

installing CVC 250

installing Smart Rotary 398

caustic samples

protecting instrument from 116

caution

pinch hazard 355, 377, 399, 410, 412, 415

UV radiation hazard 115, 132, 265

cell

aligning micro 341

cleaning flow cells 421

compatible with Smart Sipper 413

for Peltier Single Cell Holder 319

for Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 376

cell changer

CVC 249

Smart Linear 8-Cell 353

Smart Peltier Linear 367

Smart Rotary 395

status monitor 404

Cell Changer tab

Smart Linear settings 360

Smart Peltier Linear settings 389

Smart Rotary settings 400

cell holder

alignment 119

available reference 339

available sample 341

cylindrical reference 339

cylindrical sample 344

for 15 mm beam height cells 343

for nanoCell 283

for solids 345

for test tubes and vials 349

installing 120–121, 124, 126, 357, 398

rectangular reference 339

rectangular sample 341

removing 356, 399

rotatable 347

standard reference 119

standard sample 119

variable pathlength rectangular 350

variable pathlength slide 351

water thermostatted sample 342

certificate of calibration

storing 252

chemicals

precautions for 106

cleaning

fiber optic probes 334

flow cells 421

instrument exterior 131

instrument touchscreen 132

nanoCell 287

Peltier Recirculator 306

Peltier Single Cell Holder 328

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 364

Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 393

Smart Rotary Cell Changer 405

Smart Sipper 420

Temperature Probe 438

VERSA Probe 449

closing

reference compartment door 107

sample compartment door 107

color

axis 15

spectrum 15

company name 96

comparison operations for Quant equations 58

compartment

reference 107

sample 107

compartment, reference

cleaning 131

installing cell holder in 126

compartment, sample

cleaning 131

installing manual accessory in 120

installing Smart Accessory in 121

installing thermostatted accessory in 124

compliance label 104

component

concentration 53, 141, 152, 162, 172, 181, 192, 203, 214, 225

INSIGHT software 108

keypad 108

molecular weight 53

name 53, 141, 152, 162, 172, 181, 192, 203, 214, 225

reference compartment 107

sample compartment 107

touchscreen 108

computer

connector 109

external 108

remote 129

switching between local and remote 129

computer control 108
468 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: D

Computer Control instrument

setting up 127

turning off 127

computer, remote

attaching to Local Control instrument 129

switching control to 129

concentration

averaging 67, 144, 155, 166, 175, 185, 196, 207, 218, 229

factor 148, 159

limits 67, 144, 155, 166, 175, 185, 196, 207, 218, 229

nucleic acid 139

unit 53, 141, 152, 162, 172, 181, 192, 203, 214, 225

connecting

computer 127

detector cable 133

external computer 109

external trigger 110

fiber optic detector 265

fiber optic probes 266

mercury lamp 109, 276

power cord 109

purge gas 118

recirculator 125

remote start cable 445

USB devices 110

connector 109

external trigger 110

external tubing 112

for Smart Accesories 111

instrument detector 114

internal tubing 113

mercury lamp 109, 114

power cord 109

purge 109

remote computer 109

USB 110

connector, electrical

routing to sample compartment 113

connectors

for fiber optic cables 266

constant from spectrum 89

contact closure trigger 110

control

local or computer 108

switching from local to remote 129

control limits 42, 46

conventions 3

Convert Spectra 81

copying

CVC reports 255

quantitative analysis results 26, 28

cord

routing to sample compartment 113, 116

correction

Nucleic Acid 141

pathlength for nanoCell 288

quantitative analysis 53, 141, 152, 162, 172, 181, 192, 203, 

214, 225

Correction tab

Scan 48

corrosion protection 116

cover

instrument detector 114

mercury lamp 114

reference compartment 107

sample compartment 107

CUE script

running from instrument keypad 130

CVC 249

available tests 253

copying, printing and saving reports 255

initializing 251

installing 250

installing carousel 250

loading calibration data 252

maintaining 258

proper handling for standards 249

recertifying 258

running performance tests 253

standards 249

storing 258

test limits 253

test results 256

viewing reports 256

cycle time 69

cylindrical cell holder

reference 339

cylindricalcell holder

sample 344

D

data acquisition 24–25, 31, 146, 157, 167, 176, 187, 197, 208, 

220, 230

data display 15

data interval 42, 46, 65, 70, 143, 154, 165, 174, 184, 195, 206, 

217, 228

Data Store tab 97

data, CVC calibration 252

date 96

decimal digits 97

default values

life science applications 137

default workbook settings 21

deleting

group 96
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 469

Index: E

spectrum from workbook 21

workbook, template or PV report 74

Depolarizer accessory 259

Derivative 79

derivative 46, 65, 70

converting spectrum to 79

detector

access cover 114

access panel 116

connector, accessing 114

fiber optic module 263

installing 134

intensity 99

precaution for connecting cable 133

removing 133

routing cable 116

storing 134

detector compartment

and UV radiation hazard 115

detector side sample holder 345

devices

external keyboard 110

external mouse 110

high power USB 110

portable memory 110

printer 110

supported 110

diameter

for flow cell tubing 407

for fluid tubing 113

for purge tubing 118

dichromate, potassium

as CVC standard 249

diethylene triamine, precaution with nanoCell 287

diffuse reflectance accessory

integrationg sphere 271

digital signature 458

verifying 459

digits 97

directory 97

dividing

spectra 87

spectrum by constant 89

document

organization 2

drain

for sample and reference compartments 131

dry air or nitrogen, for instrument purge 117

duplicate standard 63, 183, 194, 205, 216, 227

duplicates 26, 28

dust

precautions for 106

removing from CVC standards 258

removing from touchscreen 132

dwell time 69

Dye Chromophore Editor 150, 170

DYMO printer 97

E

editing

CUE scripts 130

label 19

e-mailing

data files 4

workbook 21, 97

Enter keypad button 130

equations for Quant 98

equilibration time 323

ethylamine, precaution with nanoCell 287

Evolution 200 spectrophotometer

models 103

exporting

Measure Rate results 21

report 75

external

computer 108

computer connector 109

instrument connectors 108

extinction coefficient 53, 148, 159

F

Factor 89

factor, correction for nanoCell 289

FEP tubing

for Sipper flow cells 407

Ferrite ring

for shielding USB devices 110

Fiber Optic accessory

aligning 268

attaching cables and probes 266

Bandwidth setting 268

compatible probes 266

components 263

filter setting 268

installing 264

maintenance 267

operating 267

operating precautions 263

radiation hazard from coupled cables 263

radiation hazard in detector compartment 264

routine maintenance 268

storing 264

troubleshooting 270
470 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: G

fiber optic cables

operating precautions 331

fiber optic probes

cleaning 334

installing 332

maintaining 334

operating 333

operating precautions 331

remote start cable 333

safety considerations 331

UV radiation hazard 332

VERSA Probe 443

fiber optic sampling

with Fiber Optic Module 267

with nanoCell 281

fiber optic test cable

proper handling 264

file

CVC calibration 252

File menu 21

films sample holder 347

filter holder 347

Filter setting

for Fiber Optic Module 268

filter, purge gas 117

filters

as CVC standards 249

fingerprints

removing from touchscreen 132

firmware

updating 101

Fixed 9

Accessories tab 44

data acquisition parameters 42

Instrument tab 42

Samples tab 45

fixed kinetics data acquisition 32

fixed position sample slide holder 345

flammable gases

precautions for purge 117

flanged tubing

for Sipper flow cells 414

flow cell

cleaning 421

compatible with Smart Sipper 413

installing in Smart Sipper 413

installing screw-cap 414

replacing tubing 422

tubing materials 407

fluid

external connectors 112

internal connectors 113

fluorinated ethylene polymer tubing

for Sipper flow cells 407

font 96

footer 96

Formula and Units tab 98

formulas for Quant 98

front panel

sample compartment, removing 112

function buttons

for switching control to remote computer 129

Function keypad buttons 130

functions

keypad 130

functions for Quant 53, 58

fuse

changing Peltier Recirculator 298

changing Peltier Single Cell Holder 318

changing Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 375

G

gas

installing for purge 118

precautions for purge 117

gasket

replacing for temperature probe stopper 438

goggles, safety 132

protection from UV radiation 264

Grazing Angle Specular Reflectance accessory 261

grid 15

group 14

adding or deleting 96

applications 96

H

Hach cell sample holder 348

hazard

explosion 117

pinch 251, 254, 355, 410, 412

UV radiation 264–265, 444

UV radiation in detector compartment 115

UV radiation in mercury lamp compartment 113

header 96

height of peak 37

Help

organization 

2

Help menu 21

Hg lamp

access cover 114

connector 109, 114

description 273
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 471

Index: I

disconnecting 277

for wavelength calibration 100

installing 275

operating 275

operating precautions 275

safety considerations 273

UV radiation hazard 113

hiding

label 19

high power USB devices 110

holmium perchlorate, as CVC standard 249

Home button 12

I

icon

Peltier Single Cell Holder temperature status 324

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer status 363

Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer temperature status 385

Temperature Probe status 436

importing

CVC calibration data 252

spectrum 21

standards 28

indicator

power 127–129

initializing

CVC 251

instrument 127–129

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 359

Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 381

Smart Rotary Cell Changer 399

INSIGHT Security 457–459, 463

INSIGHT software 101

for Evolution 200 series spectrophotometer 108

INSIGHT window 11

navigation pane 12

right pane 14

installation qualification 24

installing

CVC 250

CVC carousel 250

fiber optic cables 266

Fiber Optic Module 264

fiber optic probes 266, 332

Hg Lamp 275

instrument detector 134

manual accesory 120

nanoCell 279

Peltier Recirculator 299

Peltier Single Cell Holder 319

purge gas 118

purge gas filter 117

reference cell holder 126

sample cell holders 120

sample compartment windows 116

Sipper flow cell 413

Sipper pump tubing 410

Smart Accessory 122

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 355

Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 376

Smart Rotary Cell Changer 397

Smart Rotary Changer cell holder 398

Smart Sipper 411

Temperature Probe 432

thermostatted accessory 124

VERSA Probe 444

VERSA Probe tips 446

instrument 130

cleaning exterior 131

cleaning touchscreen 132

computer 109

Computer Control 126

corrosion protection 116

Enter button 130

initalizing 127–129

installing detector 134

installing manual accessories 120

installing reference holder 126

installing Smart Accessories 121

installing thermostatted accessories 124

keypad buttons 108

keypad functions 130

keypad shortcuts 131

lifting or moving 106

Local Control 128

major components 106

operating precautions 106

ordering parts 135

performance verification 451–452, 454

removable panels 111

removing detector 133

repairing 5

routine maintenance 131

Run button 130

running CUE scripts from keypad 130

safety considerations 103

safety label locations 104

setting up 126

standard cell holders 118

Stop button 130

Zero/Base button 130

z-height 107

Instrument Local parameter 129

instrument status monitors 23

Instrument tab
472 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: K

Fixed 42

Nucleic Acid 143

Nucleic Acid Labels 154

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay 217

Pierce BCA 184

Pierce Modified Lowry 206

Protein A280 165

Protein Biuret 228

Protein Bradford 195

Proteins & Labels 174

Quant 65

Rate 70

Scan 46

settings for fiber optic sampling 267

instrument, Computer Control

setting up 127

turning off 127

instrument, Local Control

attaching remote computer 129

setting up 128

switching INSIGHT between local and remote 131

turning off 130

Integrated Fiber Optic Module 263

Integrating Sphere Diffuse Reflectance accessory 271

integration time 42, 46, 65, 69–70, 143, 154, 165, 174, 184, 195, 

206, 217, 228

intensity crossings 47

iodide, sodium

as CVC standard 249

IQ 24

K

keyboard

connecting 110

Local Control instrument 11

right-clicking with 11

shortcuts 101

keypad

buttons 108

location 107

operation 130

shortcuts 131

keypad button

Enter 130

Function 130

Power 130

Run 130

Stop 130

Zero/Base 130

kinetics 31

data acquisition 32, 34

L

labels 15, 19

safety 104

Lamp tab 101

lamp, mercury 273

access cover 114

connector 109

for wavelength calibration 100

lamp, xenon

status 101

layout 96

left pane

action buttons 13

task buttons 12

left side sample holder 345

legend 15

lid, nanoCell

installing 280

life science applications 137

default values 137

Nucleic Acid 138–139, 145–146

Nucleic Acid Labels 150, 156–157

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay 212–213, 219–220

Pierce BCA 179, 186–187

Pierce Modified Lowry 201–202, 208

Protein A280 160, 167

Protein Biuret 230

Protein Bradford 190–191, 197

Proteins & Labels 169, 176

light beam

height 107

light path

nanoCell 281, 289

limits

for CVC tests 253

liquid thermostatted accessories

connecting tubing 112

installing 124

loading

CVC calibration data 252

sample 45, 50

Loading Guide

and Run button 130

and Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 360

and Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 390

and Smart Rotary Cell Changer 401

and Stop button 130

Local Control instrument 101, 108

cleaning touchscreen 132

keyboard 11

setting up 128–129

switching INSIGHT software to 129
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 473

Index: M

touchscreen 108

turning off 130

logarithmic functions for Quant equations 58

logical operations for Quant equations 58

logo 96

low volume tubing

for Sipper flow cells 407

M

magnets

precaution for Hg Lamp 273

maintenance

cleaning instrument 131

cleaning touchscreen 132

CVC 258

Fiber Optic Module 267

fiber optic probe 334

installing instrument detector 134

nanoCell 287

Peltier Recirculator 306

Peltier Single Cell Holder 328

removing instrument detector 133

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 364

Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 392

Smart Rotary Cell Changer 405

Smart Sipper 420

Temperature Probe 437

VERSA Probe 449

manual accessories

installing 120

removing 121

Math menu 21, 77, 79, 81–82, 84–85, 87

maximum values

finding 47, 91

Measure button 13

measurement

initiating from instrument keypad 130

stopping from instrument keypad 130

measurement functions for Quant equations 58

measurement results 21

Measurement tab

Nucleic Acid 141

Nucleic Acid Labels 152

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay 214

Pierce BCA 181

Pierce Modified Lowry 203

Protein A280 162

Protein Biuret 225

Protein Bradford 192

Proteins & Labels 172

Quant 53

Rate 69

Scan 47

measuring samples 24

with CVC 253

with fiber optic accessories 267

with nanoCell 279

with Peltier Single Cell Holder 321

with Smart Linear Cell Changer 360

with Smart Peltier Linear Changer 390

with Smart Rotary Changer 401

with Smart Sipper 418

with Temperature Probe 434

with VERSA Probe 446

mechanical shock

precautions for 106

melting point 148, 159

memory

failure 329, 394

memory device

connecting 110

memory failure

for Peltier Recirculator 310

menus 21

Mercury Lamp 273

disconnecting 277

installing 275

operating 275

operating precautions 275

PV tests 276

safety considerations 273

storing 275

UV radiation hazard 275

mercury lamp

access cover 114

connector 109

for wavelength calibration 100

UV radiation hazard 113

Mercury Lamp compartmart

UV radiation hazard 275

methylene chloride, precaution with nanoCell 287

microcuvettes

aligning 119, 341

minimum r squared 63, 183, 194, 205, 216, 227

minimum values

finding 47, 91

module, detector

installing 134

removing 133

storing 134

moisture

precaution for CVC 249

precaution for Fiber Optic Module 263

precaution for instrument 106
474 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: N

precaution for nanoCell 287

precaution for Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 364

molecular weight 53, 148, 159

component 53

monochromator side sample holder 345

mouse

connecting 110

moving

label 19

multiplying

spectrum by constant 89

My Data 74

N

Name and Type tab

Rate 68

nanoCell accessory

and instrument z-height 283

and sample pathlength 282

beam path 281

cleaning 287

compatible cell holders 283

components 279

do not submerge precaution 279

frequently asked questions 289

high background signal 286

installing lid 280

loading samples 285

measuring baseline or zero 280

measuring samples 279–280, 286

pathlength correction factors 288

positioning cells 279

sample volume 284

storing 287

theory of operation 281

wavelength range 283

navigation pane 12

neutral density filter, as CVC standard 249

nitrogen, for instrument purge 117

noise 42, 46

Normalize 84

normalizing spectrum 84

Norprene tubing, chemical compatibility 423

Nucleic Acid

Accessories tab 144

application 139, 145–146

Instrument tab 143

Measurement tab 141

overview 138

Samples tab 144

Type tab 140

nucleic acid 138

concentration 139

purtiy 139

Nucleic Acid Labels 156–157

Accessories tab 155

Instrument tab 154

Measurement tab 152

overview 150

Samples tab 155

Type tab 151

nucleic acids

measuring 146

number of cycles 69

number of samples 45, 50, 67, 72, 144, 155, 166, 175, 185, 196, 

207, 218, 229

O

off button

for Computer Control instrument 127

for Local Control instrument 130

off switch 109

oil

removing from touchscreen 132

Oligo Calculator 148, 159

on switch 109

opening

reference compartment door 107

sample compartment door 107

workbook, template or PV report 74

operating precautions 106

optical cables

attaching 266

optical fiber

test 263

Options 96

ordering parts 135

O-ring

replacing for temperature probe stopper 438

overlaying spectra 14–15

P

page

layout 96

number 96

panel

for external tubing connectors 112

sample compartment front 112

sample compartment side 116

panels

removable 111

parts

ordering 135
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 475

Index: P

path 74, 97

pathlength 140, 151, 161, 170, 180, 192, 202, 213, 224

cell holder slide for variable 351

nanoCell 282

Peltier Single Cell Holder 319

rectangular cell holder with variable 350

Smart Linear Cell Changer 353

Smart Peltier Linear Changer 376

Smart Rotary Cell Changer 395

VERSA Probe 443

pathlength correction factors

for nanoCell 288

peak

area 38

height 37

peak area tool 38

Peak Pick 91

peak/valley measurement tool 37

peaks

finding 47, 91

Peltier

linear changer 367

recirculator 291

single cell holder 311

Peltier Recirculator

acoustic alarm 308

Alarm Mode 305

back panel 293

changing fuse 298

cleaning 306

components 291

dimensions 296

environmental conditions 296

filling reservoir 307

front panel 293

installing 299

maintaining 306

Normal Mode 303

operating 301

other failures 310

resetting water level alarm 309

safety considerations 292

specifications 294

Standby Mode 302

system failures 310

troubleshooting 308

voltage selector 297

voltage setting 298

water level alarm 301

water level failure 309

Peltier Single Cell Holder

changing fuse 318

cleaning 328

components 311

cuvettes 319

dimensions 315

displaying temperature status monitor 323–324

environmental conditions 316

front panel 313

installing 319

maintaining 328

measuring samples 328

normal mode 326

rear panel 313

safety considerations 312

sample volume 319

specifications 314

standby mode 326

startup mode 325

troubleshooting 329

using INSIGHT to operate 322

using Peltier to operate 325

voltage selector 317

voltage setting 318

perchlorate, holmium

as CVC standard 249

Performance Verification 451, 454

combining reports 257

opening reports 257

report 74

test descriptions 452

viewing reports 256

performance verification

with CVC 249

Performance Verification test

CVC 253

wavelength accuracy 276

wavelength reproducibility 276

phosphoric acid, precaution with nanoCell 287

photometric accuracy 452

photometric drift 452

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay 213, 219–220

Accessories tab 218

Instrument tab 217

Measurement tab 214

overview 212

Samples tab 218

Standards tab 216

Type tab 213

Pierce BCA 179, 186–187

Accessories tab 185

Instrument tab 184

Measurement tab 181

Samples tab 185

Standards tab 183

Type tab 180
476 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: P

Pierce Modified Lowry 202, 208

Accessories tab 207

Instrument tab 206

Measurement tab 203

overview 201

Samples tab 207

Standards tab 205

Type tab 202

pipette, calibrated

and nanoCell 285

polytetrafluoroethylene tubing

for Sipper flow cells 407

portable memory

connecting 110

ports

for cords and cables 113

for external tubing 112

for internal tubing 113

potassium dichromate, as CVC standard 249

power

button 130

connector 109

switch 109

Power button 130

power indicator 127–129

powering off

Computer Control instrument 127

Local Control instrument 130

precautions

explosion hazard 117

operating for instrument 106

safety for instrument 103

shock hazard 110

UV radiation hazard 113–114

Preferences tab 97

previewing report 21, 75

Print button 13

printer

connecting 110

printing

CVC reports 255

report 21, 75, 96

probe

Temperature Probe 431

trigger connector 110

probes, fiber optic

aligning 268

attaching 266

compatible 266

VERSA Probe 443

properties of spectrum 21

protecting

against electrical shock 110

against explosion hazard 117

against UV radiation hazard 132

against UV radiation in detector compartment 115

against UV radiation in mercury lamp compartment 113

instrument from corrosion 116

USB cables 110

Protein A280 167

Accessories tab 166

Instrument tab 165

Measurement tab 162

overview 160

Samples tab 166

Type tab 161

Protein Biuret 230

Accessories tab 229

Instrument tab 228

Measurement tab 225

Samples tab 229

Standards tab 227

Type tab 224

Protein Bradford 191, 197

Accessories tab 196

Instrument tab 195

Measurement tab 192

overview 190

Samples tab 196

Standards tab 194

Type tab 192

Proteins & Labels 176

Accessories tab 175

Instrument tab 174

Measurement tab 172

overview 169

Samples tab 175

Type tab 170

PTFE tubing

for Sipper flow cells 407

pump

replacing tubing 421

specifications 427

troubleshooting 428

tubing chemical compatibility 423

tubing specifications 426

pump tubing

and storing Smart Sipper 410

–411

chemical compatibility 423

installing 410

replacing 421

specifications 426

purge

and subambient temperature samples 117

explosion hazard 117
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 477

Index: Q

installing 118

purge connector 109

purge gas

specifications 117

purging

sample compartment 117

purity

nucleic acid 139

PV 451, 454

test descriptions 452

PV reports

directory for saving 97

Q

Quant 10

Accessories tab 66

data acquisition parameters 51

formulas and units 98

functions 58

Instrument tab 65

Measurement tab 53

parameters 25

sample analysis 26, 28

Samples tab 67

Standards tab 63

Type tab 52

quantitative analysis 25–26, 28

settings 51

quartz tip

for VERSA Probe 446

R

r squared 63, 183, 194, 205, 216, 227

radiation hazard 264

for fiber optic probes 332

for installing Hg Lamp 275

in detector compartment 115

in mercury lamp compartment 113

radiation safety label

detector compartment 105

mercury lamp compartment 105

Rapid Mix Accessory 337

Rate 10, 31

Accessories tab 71

data acquisition 32, 34

data acquisition parameters 68

exporting results from 21

Instrument tab 70

Measurement tab 69

Name and Type tab 68

Rate Calculations tab 72

Samples tab 72

Type tab 68

Rate Calculations tab 72

Ratio 87

ratioing spectra 87

reagents 179, 191, 213

recertifying

CVC 258

recirculator

and Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 353

and Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 367

and Smart Rotary Cell Changer 395

and water thermostatted sample cell holder 342

connecting to instrument 125

Peltier 291

rectangular reference cell holder 339

rectangular sample cell holder 341

variable pathlength 350

water thermostatted 342

reduced volume cuvettes

aligning 341

reference cell holder

cylindrical 339

installing 126

rectangular 339

standard 119

reference cell holders

available 339

reference compartment

cleaning 131

installing cell holder in 126

location 107

opening and closing 107

reference correction 48

reference detector

intensity 99

reference sample

cell holder for measuring 119

reference wavelength correction 42

reflectance accessory

15 degree specular 239

20 degree specular 241

30 degree specular 243

45 degree specular 245

60 degree specular 247

8 degree near normal specular 237

grazing angle 261

integrating sphere 271

region

finding peaks in 47, 91

limiting 39

region-threshold tool 39
478 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: S

remote computer

attaching to Local Control instrument 129

switching control to 129

remote start cable

for fiber optic probes 333

for VERSA Probe 445

removable panels 111

removing

Hg lamp 277

instrument detector 133

manual accessory 121

sample compartment windows 116

Smart Accessory 124

Smart Rotary Changer cell holder 399

repairing instrument 5

replicate standard 63, 183, 194, 205, 216, 227

replicates 26, 28

report

adding sample data to 14

layout 96

printing 21

signing 457

Report Master Page tab 96

reports 75

combining CVC 257

copying, printing and saving CVC 255

viewing CVC 256

reservoir

filling 307

reset

for Peltier Recirculator water level alarm 309

resetting

CVC 251

Peltier Recirculator alarm 305

Peltier Single Cell Holder alarm 326

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 359

Smart Peltier Linear Call Changer 381

Smart Peltier Linear Changer alarm 386

Smart Rotary Cell Changer 399

resetting template settings 41

resolution 452

right pane 14

right side sample holder 345

right-clicking using touchscreen keyboard 11

rotatable

test tube and cell holder 347

rotating label 19

Run button 130

S

safety

label locations 104

lifting or moving instrument 106

removing and installing detector 132

using CVC 254

using Fiber Optic Module 263

using fiber optic probes 331

using Hg Lamp 273

using mercury lamp 113

using Peltier Recirculator 292

using Peltier Single Cell Holder 312

using Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 354

using Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 368

using Smart Rotary Cell Changer 396

using Smart Sipper 407

safety considerations 103, 250, 283

safety goggles 132

safety interlock

for Hg Lamp 273

safety label

compliance 104

UV radiation 105

safety warning

explosion hazard 117

general operation 103

shock hazard 110

UV radiation hazard in detector compartment 115

UV radiation hazard in mercury lamp compartment 113

sample

legend 15

loading or saving 45, 50

measuring 24–25, 31, 146, 157, 167, 176, 187, 197, 208, 220, 

230

name 15, 45, 50, 67, 72, 144, 155, 166, 175, 185, 196, 207, 

218, 229

quantifying 25–26, 28

sample cell holder

10 mm rectangular 119

available 341

cylindrical 344

for 15 mm beam height cells 343

for 1-inch square cells 348

for test tubes and vials 349

installing 120

rectangular 341

variable pathlength rectangular 350

variable pathlength slide 351

water thermostatted 342

sample compartment

cleaning 131

connector 111

fluid ports 113

installing manual accessory in 120

installing Smart Accessory in 121
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 479

Index: S

installing thermostatted accessory in 124

location 107

opening and closing 107

purge connector 109

purging 117

removing manual accessory from 121

removing side panel from 116

removing Smart Accessory from 124

routing cords and cables to 113

sample compartment front panel

removing or replacing 112

sample compartment windows

and corrosive samples 116

and purge 117

removing and replacing 116

sample detector

for Fiber Optic Module 265

installing 134

intensity 99

removing 133

sample holder

for filters 347

for solids 345, 347

for test tubes and vials 349

for thin films 347

sample point

X and Y values 36

sample slide holder

fixed position 345

universal 347

variable position 346

sample volume

for nanoCell 284

for Peltier Single Cell Holder 319

for Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 376

for Smart Sipper 418

samples

loading for nanoCell 285

measuring with fiber optic probes 267

measuring with nanoCell 280

measuring with Peltier Single Cell Holder 321, 328

measuring with Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 360

measuring with Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 390

measuring with Smart Rotary Cell Changer 401

measuring with Smart Sipper 418

measuring with Temperature Probe 434

measuring with VERSA Probe 446

volatile, corrosive or caustic 116

Samples tab

Fixed 45

Nucleic Acid 144

Nucleic Acid Labels 155

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay 218

Pierce BCA 185

Pierce Modified Lowry 207

Protein & Labels 175

Protein A280 166

Protein Biuret 229

Protein Bradford 196

Quant 67

Rate 72

Scan 50

samples, subambient temperature

and purge 117

saving

CVC reports 255

PV reports 97

sample 45, 50

template

saving

workbook 97

workbook 21, 97

Savitzky-Golay algorithm 79

scale of displayed data 15

Scan 10

Accessories tab 50

Correction tab 48

data acquisition parameters 46

Instrument tab 46

Measurement tab 47

Samples tab 50

scan kinetics data acquisition 34

scan speed 42, 46, 65, 70, 143, 154, 165, 174, 184, 195, 206, 217, 

228

schedule

for recertifying CVC 258

screw cap flow cell

installing 414

scripts

running from instrument keypad 130

security 457, 459, 463

selection tool

zooming in 36

serial number

loading CVC 252

setting up

Computer Control instrument 127

Local Control instrument 128

Local Control instrument with remote computer 129

Settings button 41

sharing custom templates 73

shielding

for USB devices 110

shipping cost for warranty repair 6

signal-to-noise ratio 42, 46
480 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: S

signature 458

verifying 459

signature meanings 463

signed workbook 457

signing

CVC reports 255

file 458

report 457

silicone tubing

for Sipper pump 407

silicone tubing, chemical compatibiity 423

single beam substitution error 48

single cell holder

installing 120

Peltier thermostatted 311

removing 121

standard 119

water thermostatted 342

slide holder

fixed position 345

universal 347

variable position 346

SMA connectors

for VERSA Probe 443

SMA connectors, fiber optic cable 266

Smart Accessory

connector 111

installing 121

removing 124

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer

calibrating 358

cleaning 364

description 353

displaying status monitor 363

high absorbance values 365

initializing 359

INSIGHT settings 360

installing 355

installing cell holder 357

maintenance 364

measuring samples 360

operating precautions 354

removing cell holder 356

safety considerations 354

troubleshooting 365

Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer

calibrating 380

Cell Changer settings 389

cell changer status monitor 389

changing fuse 375

cleaning 393

compatible cells 376

components 367

description 369

dimensions 373

environmental conditions 373

external connections 370

high absorbance values 394

initializing 381

installing 376

maintaining 392

measuring samples 390

memory failure 394

Normal mode 386

operating from INSIGHT software 382

operating from Peltier Controller 385

safety considerations 368

sample volume 376

setting stir speed 386

setting target temperature 383

setting temperature 386

setting voltage 375

specifications 371

Standby mode 386

Startup mode 385

stir bar 376

system connections 370

temperature controller panels 370

temperature failure 394

temperature status monitor 385

troubleshooting 394

voltage selector 374

water pump requirement 376

Smart Rotary Cell Changer

cleaning 405

description 395

initializing 399

installing 397

maintenance 405

measuring samples 401

measuring standards 404

operating precautions 396

replacing cell holder 398

safety considerations 396

settings 400

status monitor 404

Smart Sipper

calibrating 415

cleaning 420

cleaning flow cells 421

compatible flow cells 413

description 407

installing 411

installing flow cell 413

installing pump tubing 410

maintaining 420

operating precautions 409
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 481

Index: S

pump specifications 427

pump tubing compatibility 423

pump tubing specifications 426

replacing flow cell tubing 422

replacing pump tubing 421

safety considerations 407

settings 418

specifications 422

storing 410–411

troubleshooting 428

tubing packs 407

Smooth 77

smoothing 46, 65, 70, 79

spectrum 47, 77

sodium iodide, as CVC standard 249

software 101

CUE 130

INSIGHT 108

solid sample holder

fixed position 345

rotatable 347

variable position 346

solvents

for cleaning nanoCell 287

SPE-8W Peltier Temperature Controller 367

specifications

fluid tubing 113

instrument beam height 107

purge tubing 118

spectra

displaying 15

overlaying 14–15

spectral cursor tool 36

spectral region

finding peaks in 47, 91

spectrophotometer

cleaning exterior 131

cleaning touchscreen 132

computer connector 109

Computer Control 126

connecting to recirculator 125

corrosion protection 116

Enter button 130

external connectors 109

initializing 127–129

INSIGHT software 108

installing detector 134

installing manual accessories 120

installing purge 117

installing reference holder 126

installing sample compartment windows 116

installing Smart Accessories 121

installing thermostatted accessories 124

internal connectors 111

keypad buttons 108

keypad functions 130

keypad shortcuts 131

lifting or moving 106

Local Control 128

major components 106

models 103

opening and closing reference compartment 107

opening and closing sample compartment 107

operating precautions 106

ordering parts 135

performance verification 451–452, 454

Power button 130

removable panels 111

removing detector 133

routine maintenance 131

Run button 130

running CUE scripts from keypad 130

safety label locations 104

setting up 126

shielding of USB cables 110

standard cell holders 118

Stop button 130

touchscreen 108

Zero/Base button 130

z-height 107

spectrophotometer, Computer Control

setting up 127

turning off 127

spectrophotometer, Local Control

attaching remote computer 129

setting up 128

turning off 130

spectrum

adding 82

averaging 88

converting spectrum to derivative 79

converting to other Y-axis units 81

deleting from workbook 21

display attributes 15

displaying 15

expanding, contracting or rolling 40

finding peaks in 47, 91

finding value crossings in 93

normalizing 84

overlaying 14

performing math operations on 89

properties 21

ratioing 87

smoothing 47, 77

subtracting 85

zooming in on or moving 36
482 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: T

specular reflectance accessory

15 degree 239

20 degree 241

30 degree 243

45 degree 245

60 degree 247

8 degree near normal 237

grazing angle 261

stages 69

standard

calibrated 48

standard cell holders 118

standard curve 53

standard deviation 26, 28

standard tubing packs 407

standards 28, 52–53, 63, 183, 194, 205, 216, 227

CVC 249

handling CVC 249

measuring with Smart Rotary Cell Changer 404

replicate, duplicate or triplicate 63, 183, 194, 205, 216, 227

Standards tab

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay 216

Pierce BCA 183

Pierce Modified Lowry 205

Protein Biuret 227

Protein Bradford 194

Quant 63

statistical functions for Quant equations 58

status monitor

cell changer 389

temperature 385

temperature probe 436

status monitors 23

stir speed

setting for Peltier Single Cell Holder 322

setting for Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 386

using INSIGHT to set 322, 382

using Peltier controller to set 326

Stop button 13

Stop Flow Accessory 337

Stop keypad button 130

stopper

replacing O-rings 438

storing

certificate of calibration 252

CVC 258

Fiber Optic Module 264

Hg Lamp 275

instrument detector 134

nanoCell 287

Smart Sipper 410–411

stray light 452

string functions for Quant equations 58

Subtract 85

subtracting 89

spectra 85

switch

power 109

system policies 457, 459

System Settings 99

T

target temperature

for Temperature Probe 435

using INSIGHT to set 323, 383

using Peltier controller to set 326

task buttons 12

temperature

failure 329, 394

setting for Peltier Single Cell Holder 322

setting for Smart Peltier Linear Changer 382

setting for Temperature Probe 434

temperature controllable

linear cell changer 353, 367

Peltier single cell h older 311

recirculator 291

rotary cell changer 395

sample cell holder 342

temperature controller

Peltier 311

Peltier SPE-8W 367

Peltier TPS-1500W 291

temperature failure

for Peltier Recirculator 310

for Peltier Single Cell Holder 329

for Smart Peltier Linear Changer 394

Temperature Probe

and Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 353

and Smart Rotary Cell Changer 395

cleaning 438

components 431

displaying temperature status monitor 436

installing 432

maintaining 437

operating precautions 431

replacing stopper O-rings 438

setting target temperature 435

settings 434

specifications 431

troubleshooting 440

temperature range

for Peltier Recirculator 291

for Peltier Single Cell Holder 315

for Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 372
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 483

Index: T

for Temperature Probe 431

for VERSA Probe 443

temperature status monitor

displaying 323

for Peltier Single Cell Holder 324

for Smart Peltier Linear Changer 385

for Temperature Probe 436

Temperature tab

Peltier Single Cell Holder settings 322

Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer settings 382

Temperature Probe settings 434

template

deleting 74

description 52, 68

directory for saving 97

list 14

name 52, 68

opening 74

resetting settings in 41

saving workbook settings as 21

settings 51

sharing 73

signing 458

verifying signature for 459

test cable 263

proper handling 264

test limits

CVC 253

test tube holder

for small tubes and vials 349

rotatable 347

tests

CVC performance 253

Performance Verification 452

wavelength and bandwidth with Hg lamp 275

Thermo Security Administration 457

Thermo Software IQ 24

thermostatted

Linear Cell Changer 353

Peltier Linear Cell Changer 367

Peltier Single Cell Holder 311

rectangular cell holder 342

Rotary Cell Changer 395

thermostatted accessory

installing 124

tubing connections 113

thermostatted sample cell holder

fluid controlled 342

Peltier controlled 311

thin film sample holder 347

time 96

tips

installing for VERSA Probe 446

tolerance

for CVC tests 253

for Peltier Single Cell holder temperature 315

for probe temperature 431

for Smart Peltier Linear Changer temperature 372

touchscreen

and Local Control instruments 108

cleaning 132

keyboard 11

location 107

switching control to 129

trademarks 6

transfer optics

fiber optic 263

transmission accessory

variable angle 441

Trigger port

connecting to fiber optic probe 333

connecting to VERSA Probe 445

location 110

trigonometric functions for Quant equations 58

triplicate standard 63, 183, 194, 205, 216, 227

triplicates 26, 28

troubleshooting

Fiber Optic Module 270

Peltier Recirculator 308

Peltier Single Cell Holder 329

Smart Linear 8-Cell Changer 365

Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 394

Smart Sipper 428

Temperature Probe 440

tubing

adapters 113, 125

tubing access panel

removing and replacing 112

tubing packs

for Smart Sipper 407

tubing specification

for flow cells 407

for fluids 113

for purge gas 118

for Sipper pump 407

tubing, flow cell

FEP 407

flanged 414

low-volume 407

PTFE 407

replacing 422

tubing, pump

chemical compatibility 423

installing 410
484 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: U

replacing 421

silicone 407

Viton 407

turning off

Computer Control instrument 127

Local Control instrument 130

turning on

Computer Control instrument 127

Local Control instrument 128

Local Control instrument with remote computer 129

Type tab

Nucleic Acid 140

Nucleic Acid Labels 151

Pierce 660 nm Protein Assay 213

Pierce BCA 180

Pierce Modified Lowry 202

Protein A280 161

Protein Biuret 224

Protein Bradford 192

Proteins & Labels 170

Quant 52

Rate 68

U

unit 69

component concentration 53, 141, 152, 162, 172, 181, 192, 

203, 214, 225

units 81

for Quant 98

universal sample slide holder 347

update policy 6

USB connector, for external computer 109

USB connectors, for external devices 110

USB devices

high power 110

shielding 110

supported 110

user group 14

user name 458

UV radiation safety label

detector compartment 105

mercury lamp compartment 105

V

valley

measuring 37

valleys

finding 47, 91

value crossings 93

Value Level 93

Variable Angle Transmission accessory 441

variable pathlength

cell holder slide 351

cylindrical cell holder 344

rectangular cell holder 350

variable position sample slide holder 346

verifying

instrument performance 249

signature 459

VERSA Probe

attaching remote start cable 445

cleaning 449

components 443

description 443

improving signal-to-noise ratio 446

installing 444

installing tips 446

maintaining 449

measuring baseline or zero 447

measuring samples 446

operating precautions 443

pathlength 443

specifications 443

UV radiation hazard 444

vial sample holder 348–349

view finder 40

viewing

CVC reports 256

Viton tubing

for Sipper pump 407

Viton tubing, chemical compatibility 423

volatile samples

protecting instrument from 116

voltage setting

for Peltier Recirculator 298

for Peltier Single Cell Holder 318

for Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 375

volume, sample

for nanoCell 284

for Peltier Single Cell Holder 319

for Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 376

W

warning

explosion hazard 117

safe operation 103

shock hazard 110

UV radiation hazard 113, 115, 265, 444

warranty 4

and failure to use sample compartment windows 117

items not covered by 5

period 5

repair 5
Thermo Scientific Evolution 200 Series User Guide 485

Index: X

shipping cost for items covered by 6

update policy 6

water level alarm 301, 309

water pump

and Peltier Single Cell Holder 311

and Smart Peltier Linear Cell Changer 367

water thermostatted sample cell holder 342

wavelength

calibrating 100, 273

range 42, 46, 65, 143, 154, 165, 174, 184, 195, 206, 217, 228, 

283

wavelength accuracy 276, 452

wavelength reproducibility 452

wavelength reproducibility test 276

windows, sample compartment

and corrosive samples 116

and purge 117

removing and replacing 116

workbook 74

closing 21

creating 21

default settings 21

deleting 74

deleting spectrum from 21

directory for saving 97

e-mailing 4, 21, 97

opening 74

saving 21, 97

signed 457

signing 458

verifying signature for 459

X

xenon lamp

status 101

Y

Y-axis unit 42, 46

Z

Zero button 13

zero scan

initiating from instrument keypad 130

Zero/Base keypad button 130

z-height

and nanoCell 283

cell holder for 15 mm 343

spectrophotometer 107
486 Evolution 200 Series User Guide Thermo Scientific

Index: Z